expansion from 0.6 mtpa non recovery coke ......2006 shall be provided. copies of consent to...

EIA/EMP REPORT for

EXPANSION FROM 0.6 MTPA NON RECOVERY COKE OVEN & 40 MW POWER PLANT TO 1.0 MTPA INTEGRATED STEEL PLANT, 1.2

MTPA NON RECOVERY COKE OVEN & 205 MW POWER PLANT of

BENGAL ENERGY LIMITED DAUKA, TENTULMURI,PASCHIM MEDINIPUR, WEST BENGAL

Accredited Consulting Organization GLOBAL TECH ENVIRO EXPERTS PVT.

LTD.

C-23, BJB NAGAR, BHUBANESWAR-

751014, ODISHA, PH. NO.-0674-2433487

EMAIL- [email protected]

NABET ACCREDITATED

CATEGORY “A” CONSULTANT

SL. NO.- 77

Accredited Laboratory KALYANI LABORATORIES PVT. LTD.

PLOT NO. 78/944, BALIANTA, PAHAL,

BHUBANESWAR, ODISHA

MoEF&CC ACCREDITATION NO. 125

FOR THE PERIOD OF 06.08.2014 TO

05.08.2019

NABL ACCREDITATION NO. TC-7043

FOR THE PERIOD OF

16.03.2017 TO 15.03.2020

mailto:[email protected]

EIA/EMP report of M/s Bengal Energy Limited, At-Dauka, P.O.Tentulmuri, PS-Narayangarh, Dist-Paschim Medinipur, WB

TC - 1 Global Tech Enviro Experts Pvt. Ltd.

Compliance to the prescribed Terms of Reference vide Ltr no J-11011/28/2008-IA.II(I) dt:

21.06.17

Sl.No ToR Conditions Action Taken in EIA & EMP Report

Specific ToR CHAPT

ERS BRIEF DESCRIPTION

1 Public Hearing shall be conducted by SPCB

CH7

PH was conducted by SPCB on

15.05.2018 at Project Site, Dauka,

Dist-Paschim Medinipur, West

Bengal. The details are given in Pg

214-224.

2

The issues raised during PH and commitment

of the project proponent on the same along

with time bound action plan to implement the

commitment and financial allocation thereto

should be clearly provided

Ch7

The issues raised during PH and

commitment of PP along with

budgetary expenditure of Rs 1810

lakhs, expenditure budget head,

time schedule has been given in

para 7.8 in Pg 224-226

3

Project proponent should carry out social

impact assessment of the project as per the

OM J-11013/25/2014-IA-I dt 11.08.2014

issued by the ministry regarding the

guidelines on environment sustainability and

enterprise social commitment (ESC) related

issues. The SIA study so carried out should

form part of EIA/EMP report

CH7 Social Impact assessment study

has been conducted as per the OM

issued by Ministry and the detailed

SIA has been attached as Annexure

VI

4

Detailed specification of Air Pollution Control

Equipment shall be provided in EIA/EMP. Post

Project monitoring shall be clearly specified

along with the no. of locations, stations,

frequency of monitoring, parameters to be

monitored, fund provision etc

CH6

The detail action plan along with

monitoring schedule & frequency is

illustrated in table 6.1 from page

187.

5

Permission for drawl of Surface water as

proposed shall be provided alongwith

EIA/EMP.

CH 2

Permission exists for drawl of

14,400 M3/day water from

Kangsabati River. The permission

letter is attached as Annexure III

6

Green belt in 33% of the project area shall be

planned with local and broad-leaved species

and details of species, number, location,fund

provision etc shall be provided in the EIA/EMP.

CH4

11,216 nos. of trees have already

been planted in about 56.0 ha of

land which is about 34 % of the

total area. The detail plan is given

in para 4.8 Pg 177-178

7

The Project proponent shall identify railaway

siding points to be used most frequently by it

for transportation of materials and goods.

CH 2

The company has developed its

own railway siding at Benapur

station on Kharagpur-Balasore-

Bhadrak Section of SE railway. The

permission letter is attached as

Annexure II

8

The plant shall be planned to Zero Liquid

Discharge (ZLD)

CH 2

The waste water generated from

various operations shall be trated

and reused. No effluent shall be

discharged outside. The company

has envisaged Zero Liquid

Discharge.

9

The plan for concreted floor with covered

storage of raw materials and coal shall be

provided in the EIA/EMP

Ch 2

All the raw materials will be stored

under shed and over concrete floor.

The details is given in Pg 56



10

The project proponent shall plan for solar light

system for all common areas, street lights,

villages, parking around the project area and

maintain the same regularly. CH 2

Power saving measures to be

undertaken for the plant includes

plan for LED lights in residential

area and solar syatems in

peripheral areas. Details provided

in Pg 64 11

The Project proponent plan for LED lights in

their offices and residential areas.

12

The proponent shall submit plan for solid

waste management as per the provisions of

SWM Rules, 2016 for thei residential colony as

a part of the EIA/EMP report.

CH 2

The detailed solid waste

Management Plan has been given

in table 2.4, under para 2.6.6 Pg 64

Standard ToR CHAPT

ERS BRIEF DESCRIPTION

1 Executive Summary

The Executive Summary includes

the desired configuration, technical

details, present environmental

status, Impact, Environmental

Management Plan along with

budgetary provisions. The details

are enclosed in page 7-15.

2 Introduction

i. Details of the EIA consultant including NABET

Accreditation CH 1

The consultant for this project is

M/s Global Tech Enviro Experts Pvt

Ltd., Bhubaneswar. They are

NABET accreditated “ A” Category

Consultant. Details of the

consultant has been given in

Chapter - 2 at page no 21.

ii. Information about the project proponent CH 1

Mr. Rajeev maheswari is the owner

of this project. He has about 25

years of experience in Steel

production. Detailed information is

provided in Para 1.2 of Chapter - I

page no17.

iii. Importance and benefits of the project CH 1

The project is located at Dauka,

PS- Tentulmuri, Dist-Paschim

Medinipur, West Bengal Given in

Para 1.3.3 of Chapter - 1 page no

18-19.

3 Project Description

i. Cost of project and time of completion. CH 2

The approximate cost of the project

is 4943 crores. The tentative

completion time is 3 years. The

details are provided Para 2.6.8 &

2.6.9 of Chapter - 2 page no 71-72

ii Products with capacities for the proposed

project CH 2

The proposed project is an

expansion project from 0.6 MTPA

Coke Oven and 40 MW power to

1.2 MTPA Coke oven, 205 MW

power and 1.0 MTPA Integrated

Steel Plant. The details of the

configuration is provided in Para

2.4 in table no 2.2 of chapter - 2

page no 29



iii.

If Expansion project, details of existing

products with capacities and whether

adequate land is available for expansion,

reference of earlier EC if any.

The proposed project is expansion

of existing facilities. The total land

available for the project is 161.87

ha. Plant facilities cover 131.1 ha

and balance 30.77 ha is vacant

area for future expansion.

iv List of raw materials required and their source

along with mode of transportation . CH 2

The major raw Materials are Iron

Ore, Coal, Pig Iron The details of

their procurement, their source and

mode of transportation is explained

in Para 2.6.3 in chapter - 2 page

no 56 & 58

v Other chemicals and materials required with

quantities and storage capacities CH 2

vi Details of emission, effluents, hazardous

waste generation and their management. CH 7

The existing plant had 2 no. of

stacks attached to Coke oven,

RMHP. The proposed expansion will

have additional 12 no. of stacks

attached to DRI Kiln, IF, EAF

Sinter, additional Coke Oven & CPP.

The detail is given in table 4.5.

6387 m3/day of waste water is

generated which is treated in ETP

and reused in the process. Detailed

water balance diagram & Schematic

diagram of ETP is provided para

2.10 in chapter-2. There is no

hazardous waste generated from

the process. However, small

amount of hazardous wastes like

Spent Oil, ETP Sludge & Oil filters

will be generated. The detail

management plan is given in para

4.9 page 167.

vii

Requirement of water, power, with source of

supply, status of approval, water balance

diagram, man-power requirement(regular and

contract)

CH 2

13,165 m3/day of fresh water will

be drawn from Kangsabat river.

153 MW of power will be required.

Total manpower requirement is

1355 both regular & contract

Permission letter with water

balance diagram is given in para

2.6.4 to 2.6.5 page no 59-62. The

permission letters are annexed as

Annexure III.

viii

Process description along with major

equipments and machineries, process flow

sheet (quantitative) from raw material to

products to be provided.

CH 2

Process description along with

major equipments and machineries,

process flow sheet (quantitative)

from raw material to products has

been given in para 2.5.2 of

Chapter - 2 page31-46

ix Hazard identification and details of proposed

safety system CH 7

Hazard identification & Risk

Analysis with safety system

proposed for th project has been

illustrated in para 7.4 in chapter -

7, 193-195

x Expansion/modernisation proposals:



a. Copy of all the environmental

Clearance(s) including Amendments thereto

obtained for the project from MoEF / SEIAA

shall be attached as an Annexure. A certified

copy of the latest Monitoring Report of the

regional Office of the Ministry of Environment

and forests as per circular dated 30th may,

2012 on the status of compliance of conditions

stipulated in all the existing environmental

clearances including Amendments shall be

provided. In addition, status of compliance of

consent to operate for the ongoing existing

operation of the project from SPCB shall be

attached with the EIA- EMP report.

EC was granted on 02.01.2009

vide letter no J-11011/28/2008-IA-

II(I)

Certified RO monitoring report

shows minor compliances was

detected. The PAs have already

complied to the conditions

identified by RO. PAs have already

complied to the conditions

identified by RO. The details are

attached as Annexure I

CTO exists for the existing plant

and is valid till 31.03.2022 vide

letter No. 5899-2359/WPB(HRO)-

K/2009.

b. In case the existing project has not

obtained environmental clearance, reasons for

not taking EC under the provisions of the EIA

Notification 1994 and/ or EIA Notification

2006 shall be provided. Copies of consent to

establish/ No objection Certificate and consent

to operate (in case of units operating prior to

EIA Notification 2006, CTE and CTO of fy

2005-2006 ) obtained from the SPCB shall be

submitted. Further, compliance report to the

further, compliance report to the conditions of

consents from the SPCB shall be submitted.

Not Applicable

4 Site details

i

Location of the project site covering village,

Taluka/ Tehsil, District and state, justification

for selecting the site, whether other sites were

considered.

CH 2

The project is located at Dauka

village of Pachim Medinipur District

of West Bengal. Location of the

project with all details has been

given in para 2.3 of Chapter - 2 &

in Chapter - 5 .No alternate site

was considered as the project is

the to be proposed in existing land.

ii

A topo sheet of the Study area of radius of 10

km and site location on1:50:000/1:25:000

scale on an A3/A2 sheet.(including all eco

sensitive areas and environmentally sensitive

places).

CH 2

The project comes under Survey of

India Toposheet no F45J6. Site

location is given in para 2.3.2 in

chapter - 2 , fig 2.1 Page 26

iii Co –ordinates (lat-long) of all 4 corner of the

site.

CH 2

The project site extends from 22

15’ 22.96’’ N to 22 15’ 27.68’’ N

and 87 22’ 53.37’’ E to 87 23’

34.69’’ N with AMSL 32m .Table of

boundary coordinates along with

google map is in ch- 2, Fig 2.2,

page no 28, .

iv Google map- Earth downloaded of the project

site



v

Layout maps indicating existing unit as well as

proposed unit indicating storage area, plant

area, green belt area, utilities etc. If located

within an industrial area / Estate /Complex,

lay out of industrial area indicating location of

unit within the industrial area

CH 2

Lay out map showing existing unit

in blue color & proposed units in

pink color with all the facilities is

given in Fig - 2.5 of ch - 2. page 55

vi

Photographs of the proposed and existing (if

applicable) plant site. If existing, show

photographs of plantation/ green belt, in

particular.

CH 3

Photographs of existing facilities in

14.97 ha & Green Belt plantation

in 53.41 ha with its direction is

provided in para 3.2 under site

description in ch- 3 page no 73-76.

vii

Land use break-up of total land of the project

site( identified and acquired), Gov./ pvt.-

Agricultural, forest, wasteland, water bodies,

settlements, etc shall be included.(not

required for industrial area)

CH 2

Total land required for the project

is 131.1 ha. Total of 161.87 ha has

been acquired by the proponent.

Land schedule with land use

breakup is given in para 2.6.1 table

2.1 in chapter - 2 page no 52-53.

viii

A list of major industries with name and type

within study area (10km radius) shall be

incorporated. Land use details of the study

area

CH 3

The project is surrounded by 2

nos. of Steel Industries within 10

km radius. The list of industries is

given in table no - 3.2 in ch - 3

page no 79.

ix Geological features and Geo hydrological

status of the study area shall be included. CH 3

The area is dominated by

Metamorphic rocks. The main rivers

are Subarnarekha and Kangsabati.

The geological & geohydrological

features is provided in para 3.5.4 &

3.5.6 of ch- 3 in page no 97-100.

x

Details of the drainage of the project up to 5

km radius of study area. If the site is within

1km radius of any major river, peak and lean

season river discharge as well as flood

occurrence frequency based on peak rainfall

data of the past 30 years. Details of the flood

level of the project site and maximum flood

level of the river shall all so be provided.

(Mega green field projects)

CH 3

The nearest river is Kangsabati,

about 16.7 km away from the site.

The HFL is at a distance of 16.5 km

from the site. 10 km radius

Drainage, with description of the

area has been provided in chapter

3 in para 3.5.6.

xi

Status of acquisition of land. If acquisition is

not complete, stage of acquisition process and

expected time of complete possessions of the

land.

CH 2

The company owns 161.87 ha of

land for its existing and expansion

facilities. The details of land

breakup is in para 2.6.1 table 2.1

in chapter - 2 page no 52-53..

xii R & R details in respect of land in line with

state Govt policy. CH 3

There was no settlement in

acquired industrial land or the land

tobe acquired. Hence R&R does not

arise.

5 Forest & wild life Related issues(If applicable): The existing land on which

modification and expansion is

proposed has been allotted in

Raturia Industrial Area. No forest

land is involved in the project.

i

Permission and approval for the use of forest

land (forestry clearance), if any, and

recommendations of the State Forest

department.(If applicable)



ii

Land use map based on high resolution

satellite imagery (GPS) of the proposed site

delineating the forestland (in case of projects

involving forest land more than 40 ha).

iii

Status of application submitted for obtaining

the stage 1forestry clearance along with latest

status shall be submitted.

iv

The projects to be located within 10 km of the

National parks, Sanctuaries, biosphere

Reserves, Migratory Corridors of wild Animals,

the project proponent shall submit the map

duly authenticated by chief wildlife Warden

showing these features vis-a-vis the project

location and the recommendations or

comments of the chief wildlife Warden-

thereon.

v

Wildlife Conservation plan duly authenticated

by the chief Wildlife Warden of the state

Government for conservation of schedule1

fauna, if any exists in the study area.

vi

Copy of application submitted for clearance

under the wildlife (protection) Act, 1972, to

Standing Committee of the national Board for

Wildlife.

6 Environmental Status

i

Determination of atmospheric inversion level

at the project site-Specific micro-metrological

data using temperature, relative humidity,

hourly wind Speed and direction and rainfall

CH 3

Atmospheric inversion level at 7.00

am is 40m-80m & at 2.00 pm is

1000m-1150m. Inversion level

using site specific temp., humidity,

wind speed & direction is given in

Ch - 3 from page no 96 under

section 3.5.3

ii

AAQ data (except monsoon) at 8 locations for

PM 10. PM 2.5, SO2, Nox, CO and other

parameters relevant to the project shall be

collected. The monitoring stations shall be

based CPCB guidelines and take into account

the pre-dominate wind direction, population

Zone and sensitive receptors including

reserved forests

CH 3

8 locations were identified as per

windrose diagram and CPCB

guidelines namely Keshuriya,

bargopal, Daharpur, Nutandih, Silti,

Belti, Shalka, Mirjapur. Major

parameters like PM10, PM2.5, SO2,

NOx ,CO monitored and the details

are illustrated in Table 3.10 from

page no 91.

iii

Raw data of all AAQ measured for 12 weeks of

all stations as per frequency given in the

NAQQM Notification of Nov. 2009 along with -

min., max., average and 98% values for each

of the AAQ Parameters from data of all AAQ

Stations should be provided as an annexure to

the EIA Report.

12 weeks Raw data of 8 AAQ

locations as per NAAQM standard is

Attached as Annexure IV. The

summarized values including max.,

min. and 98th percentile is given in

table 3.10



iv

Surface water quality of nearby River (60 m

upstream and downstream) and other surface

drains at eight location as per CPCB/ MoEF&

CC guidelines.

CH 3

8 locations were identified in the

buffer area including 2 loactions in

60m upstream and downstream of

Kangsabati river as per CPCB

guidelines. The locations are U/s &

D/s of River Kangsabati, Dauka

pond, Rampura Pond, Bagberia

pond, Banspukuria Pond, &

Kalighai river. The details are Given

in Table 3.12B from page no 109-

110 in ch - 3.

v

Whether the site falls near to polluted stretch

of river identified by the CPCB/MoEF & CC.If

yes give details

CH 3

No, The site does not fall near to

any polluted stretch of river

identified by CPCB / MoEF & CC.

vi Ground water monitoring at minimum at 8

locations shall be included CH 3

Eight locations in Daharpur,

Nutandih, Silti, Keshuriya,

Bargopal, Belti, Shalkha, Mirjapur

were identified and the montoring

results are Given in Table 3.12 A

from page no 104 in ch - 3.

vii Noise levels monitoring at minimum at 8

locations within the study area. CH 3

8 Noise monitoring locations were

identified within 3 km radius from

the project site. The monitoring

values were found to be within

limits and the details are Given in

para 3.5.8 in table 3.14 page no

121 in Ch - 3.

viii Soil characteristic as per CPCB guidelines. CH 3

Soil characteristics were monitored

as per CPCB guidelines in 8

locations within the buffer area.

Given in para 3.5.7 in table 3.13

page no 116 in Ch - 3.

ix

Traffic study of the area ,type of vehicles,

frequency of vehicles for transportation of

materials, additional traffic due to proposed

project , parking arrangement etc

CH 3

Traffic study including the type of

vehicles and their frequency was

carried out in NH 16 location for 4

days. The proposed project will

impose additionl 2500 PCU/hr on

existing road. The existing road can

withstand the additional load

without traffic congestion. The

details are given in para 3.6 in

page no 121-124 in Ch - 3.

x

Detailed description of flora and fauna

(terrestrial and aquatic) existing in the study

area shall be given with special reference to

rare, endemic and endangered species. If

Schedule-1 fauna are found within the study

area, a Wildlife Conservation plan shall be

prepared and furnished.

CH 3

The detailed description of flora &

Fauna with all the rare, endemic

and endangered species is attached

as Annexure V

As per the study report no

Schedule -1 fauna was found within

the study area.

xi Socio-economic status of the study area. CH 3

Given in para 3.8 in Ch - 3.

Detailed SIA study is attached as

annexure VI

7 Impact Assessment and environment Management Plan



i

Assessment of ground level concentration of

pollutants from the stack emission based on

site-specific meteorological features. In case

the project is located on a hilly terrain, the

AQIP Modelling shall be done using inputs of

the specific terrain characteristics for

determining the potential impacts of the

project on the AAQ. Cumulative impact of all

sources of emissions (including

transportation) on the AAQ of the area shall

be well assessed. Details of the model used

and the input data used for modelling shall

also be provided. The air quality contours

shall be plotted on a location map showing the

location of project site, habitation nearby,

sensitive receptors, if any.

CH 4

AAQ modeling & Traffic modeling

has been carried out using the site

specific Micro Meterological data

and the predicted GLC due to the

same is stated under para 4.3.3

from page no 151-153 & 155-158.

in ch - 4

ii

Water quality modelling - in case , if the

effluent is proposed to be discharged in to the

local drain, then water quality Modeling study

should be conducted for the drain water

taking into consideration the upstream and

downstream quality of water of the drain.

CH 4

Waste water generated from

process shall be treated in the

proposed ETP & STP and will be

reused in the process. No Effluent

will be discharged to local drains or

outside the plant premises. SO,

water quality modeling is not

envisaged .The detail is given in

Page 154

iii

Impact of the transport of the raw materials

and end products on the surrounding

environment shall be assessed and provided.

In this regard, Options for transport of raw

materials and finished products and wastes

(large quantities) by rail or rail-cum road

transport or conveyor-cum-rail transport shall

be examined.

CH 4

The impact of the transportation of

raw materials and products has

been assessed through Traffic

modeillng for present & proposed

scenario. EURO IV/V vehicles

conforming to emission norms will

be used for transportation. The

details are provided in chapter - 4

in page no 155-159 & 163-165.

iv

A note on treatment of waste water from

different plant operations, extent recycled and

reused for different purpose shall be included.

Complete scheme of effluent treatment.

Characteristics of untreated and treated

effluent to meet the prescribed standards of

discharge under E (p) Rules.

CH 4

The details of waste water

management & disposal is covered

under para 4.4.2 & page 172-174.

Schematic Diagram of ETP & STP

has also been provided. No effluent

will be discharged outside. Waste

water will be recycled and reused in

process.

v Details of stack emission and action plan for

control of emission to meet standards. CH 4

The stack emissions are given in

table 4.5 which are used as model

input for deriving the isopleth using

ISCST 3 MODEL . Necessary

pollution control equipment has

been provided in the same table.

vi Measures for fugitive emission control CH 4

Primary & Secondary Fugitive

emission source & control

measures is given in para 4.9 page

no 146-147 ch - 4.3.3



vii

Details of hazardous waste generation and

their storage, utilization and disposal. Copies

of MOU regarding utilization of solid and

hazardous wastes shall also be included. EMP

shall include the concept of waste-

minimization, recycle/reuse/recover

techniques, Energy conservation, and natural

resource conservation.

CH 4

Hazardous waste are used oil,

cotton easte, empty barrels and oil

filters. Hazardous wastes shall be

given to authorized recyclers. Solid

wastes inventory with their

generation, storage & management

practices is given under para 4.3.3

at page no 166. MoUs for Fly ash,

Bottom Ash and DRI fly ash are

attached as Annexure VII

viii

Proper utilization of fly ash shall be ensured as

per Fly Ash Notification, 2009. A detailed plan

of action shall be provided.

CH 4

Fly Ash generation, storage &

management practices is given

under para 4.3.3 at page no 167.

MoUs for Fly ash, Bottom Ash are

attached as Annexure VII

ix

Action plan for the green belt development

plan in 33% area i.e land with not less than

1,500 trees per ha. Giving details of species,

width of plantation, planning schedule etc.

shall be included. The green belt shall be

around the project boundary and a scheme for

greening of the roads used for the project

shall also be incorporated.

CH 4

11,216 nos. of trees have already

been planted in about 56.0 ha of

land which is about 34 % of the

total area. The detail plan is given

in para 4.8 Pg 177-178

x

Action plan for rainwater harvesting measures

at plant site shall be submitted to harvest

rainwater from the roof tops and storm water

drains to recharge the ground water and also

to use for the various activities at the project

site to conserve fresh water and reduce the

water requirement from other sources.

CH 4

It ha been estimated that about

3,81,102 m3 of water can be

harvested and used in plant. The

details is provided under para 4.5

from page no 175-176

xi

Total capital cost and recurring cost/annum

for environmental pollution control measures

shall be included.

CH 6

The budgetary provisions for EMP is

155.1 cr with recurring cost of

18.33 cr. The details is given in

table 6.2 with SEGREGATED OPEX

& CAPEX. Page 188

xii Action plan for post-project environmental

monitoring shall be submitted. CH 6

The detail action plan along with

monitoring schedule & frequency is

illustrated in table 6.1 from page

187.

xiii

Onsite and offsite Disaster (natural and Man-

made) Preparedness and Emergency

Management plan including risk Assessment

and damage control. Disaster management

plan should be linked with district Disaster

Management plan.

CH 7

The onsite & Offsite disaster

management plan & Emergency

plan is given in section 7.6 with the

hirachy of commands & emergency

command structures covered

between 197-204

8 Occupational health

i

Details of existing occupational & safety

hazards. What are the exposure levels of

hazards and whether they are within

permissible exposure level (PEL). If these are

not within PEL, what measures the company

has adopted to keep them within PEL so that

the workers can be preserved.

CH 7

The details of identification

Occupational Health Hazards &

respective mitigation measures

with PPE is been detailed in 7.12.1

from page no 207-209



ii

Details of exposure specific health status

evaluation of worker. If the workers health is

being evaluated by pre designed format, chest

x-rays, audiometry, vision testing (far & near

vision, color vision and any other ocular

defect) ECG, during pre placement and

periodical examinations give the details of the

same. Details regarding last month analyzed

data of above mentioned parameters as per

age,sex duration of exposure and department

wise.

CH 7

From the periodic monitoring and

annual health check up of the

employee base of M/s BEL Ltd, no

trend of disease vectors were

identified correlating to the type of

job, or period of job for individuals.

Therefore, it may be inferred that

the temporary ailments if identified

within the employee are not related

to working conditions.

iii

Annual report of health status of workers with

special reference to occupational health and

safety

Health checkup has been carried

out & Analysis has been done for

TC, DC, ESR, HB, FBS, LFT, KFT,

Urine Analysis, CXR,PFT,& ECG.

Attached as Annexure VIII

iv

Plan and fund allocation to ensure the

occupational health & safety of all contract

and casual workers

CH 6

1.5sr has been allocated for

Occupational Health and Safety.

The detail cost is given in Pg 212

9 Corporate Environment Policy

i

Does the company have a well laid down

environment policy approved by its Board of

directors? If so, it may be detailed in the EIA

report

CH 7

The environment policy including

safety measures and standard

operating procedures is exhibited in

page no 234-236. ii

Does the environment policy prescribe for

standard operating process/ procedures to

bring into focus any infringement / deviation /

violation of the environmental or forest

norms/conditions? If so, it may be detailed in

the EIA

iii

What is the hierarchical system or

administrative order of the company to deal

with the environmental issues and for

ensuring compliances with the environmental

clearance conditions? Details of the system

may be given

CH 7

The hierarchy for administrative

control and reporting system is

given in page no 236-238

iv

Does the company have system of reporting

of non compliances/ violations of

environmental norms to the board of directors

of the company and / or shareholders or

stakeholders at large? This reporting

mechanism shall be detailed in the EIA report.

CH 7

The company has a system for

reporting of Non compliances &

their remedies to head of the

Organization and stake holders.

239-240

10

Details regarding infrastructure facilities such

as sanitation, fuel, restroom etc. to be

provided to the labour force during

construction as well as to the casual workers

including truck drivers during operation.

CH 4

During construction period the

existing infrastructural facilities will

be extended to labor force. The

details with respect to sanitation &

Hygine is detailed under para 4.3.1

at page no 143

11 Enterprise Social Commitment(ESC)



i

Adequate funds(at least 2.5% of the project

cost) shall be earmarked towards the

Enterprise Social Commitment based on public

Hearing Issues and item-wise details along

with time bound action plan shall be included.

Socio- economic development activities need

to be elaborated upon.

CH 7

As per the issues raised during PH

and the gas analysed in SIA study

the company will spend 18.10 crore

under CER activities. The details of

distribution of budget is given

under para 7.8 page 225-226.

12

Any litigation pending against the project and/

or any direction/ order passed by any Court of

law against the project, If so, details thereof

shall also be included. Has the unit received

any notice under the section 5 of environment

(protection) Act, 1986 or relevant Section of

Air and water Acts? If so, Details thereof and

compliance/ ATR to the notice(s) and present

status of the case.

CH 1 There is no litigation pending

against the company. Page 20

ADDITIONAL TORS FOR INTEGRATED STEEL PLANT

1

Iron ore/coal linkage documents along with

the status of environmental clearance of iron

ore and coal mines

CH 2

M/s BEL obtains Coal from

Singapore either through Vizag port

and Iron Ore from Barbil. The

linkage document is attached as

Annexure IX

2

Quantum of production of coal and iron ore

from coal and iron ore mines and the projects

they cater to. Mode of transportation to the

plant and its impact

The major raw Materials are Iron

Ore, Coal, Pig Iron The details of

their procurement, their source and

mode of transportation is explained

in Para 2.6.3 in chapter - 2 page

no 56 & 58

3

For Large ISPs,a 3D view i.e DEM (Digital

Elevation Model) for the area in10 km radius

from the proposal site. MRL details of project

site and RL of nearby source of water shall be

indicated.

CH 3

The DEM map depicts high

elevation 61.1 m in NW region. The

DEM is given in Fig 3.6, CH 3

4

Recent land-use map based on satellite

imagery. High-resolution satellite image data

having 1m-5m spatial resolution like

quickbird, ikonos, IRS P-6 pan sharpened

etc.for the 10 km radius area from proposed

site. The same shall be used for land

used/land cover mapping of the area.

CH 3

High resolution multi spectral

satellite Image namely LISS III has

been considered for preparation of

Land use map of the total which is

provided in fig 3.4 & page 77-78.

5

PM(PM10 AND PM2.5) present in the ambient

air must be analyzed for source analysis

natural dust/RSPM generated from plant

operations (trace elements) of PM10 to be

carried over.

CH 4

The elemental analysis of PM10 &

PM 2.5 has been carried out and

the result is illustrated in Table

3.10A from page no 94

6

All stock piles will have to be on top of a

stable liner to avoid leaching of materials to

ground water .

CH 2

Stock piles will be stored on

impervious layer under covered

sheds.

7

Plan for implementation of the

recommendation made for steel plants in the

CREP guidelines.

CH 6

The CREP guideline compliance has

been given in page 188-189 in

table 6.3.



8 Plan for slag utilization. CH 4

Blast furnace slag will be handed

over to ASO Cement. as per their

agreement. EAF & IF slag will be

used for construction after iron

recovery. Details is given under

para 4.3 at page no 166.

9 Plan for utilization of energy in off gases (coke

oven ,blast furnace). CH 2

90 MW power will be generated

from DRI & MBF gas and A part of

the gas after cleaning will be used

in MBF tuyeres to heat blast air. 80

MW will be generated from Coke

Oven

10 System of coke quenching adopted with

justification. CH 2

Dry Quenching will be adopted for

the proposed project. Details given

in Pg 34

11 Trace metals Mercury, Arsenic and Fluoride

emissions in the raw material. CH 2

Under para 2.6.3 the chemical

analysis of coal is given in page no

57.

12 Trace metals in waste material especially slag. CH 2

The occurrence of trace metals with

their form in BF slag is illustrated

under para 2.6.6 at page no 65.

13 Trace metals in water CH 3 The trace metal in Kangsabati River

water is given in Pg 103

14 Details of proposed layout clearly demarcating

various units CH 2

Lay out map showing existing unit

in blue color & proposed units in

pink color with all the facilities is

given in Fig - 2.5 of ch - 2. page 55

15

Complete process flow diagram describing

each unit, its process and operations along

with material balance CH 2

Process description along with

major equipments and machineries,

process flow sheet (quantitative)

from raw material to products has

been given in para 2.5.2 of

Chapter - 2 page31-46 16

Details on design and manufacturing for all

the units

17

Details on environmentally sound technologies

for recycling of Hazardous materials as per

CPCB guidelines may be mentioned in case of

handling scrap and other recycled materials.

CH 4

Hazardous waste are used oil,

cotton easte, empty barrels and oil

filters. Hazardous wastes shall be

given to authorized recyclers.

Details given under para 4.3.3 at

page no 166.

18 Details on requirement of energy and water

along with its source and authorization. CH 2

13,165 m3/day of fresh water will

be drawn from Kangsabat river.

153 MW of power will be required.

Total manpower requirement is

1355 both regular & contract

Permission letter with water

balance diagram is given in para

2.6.4 to 2.6.5 page no 59-62. The

permission letters are annexed as

Annexure III.

19 Details on toxic metal content in waste

material and its composition and end use. CH 2

The occurrence of trace metals with

their form in BF slag is illustrated

under para 2.6.6 at page no 65. 20 Details on toxic content (TCLP), composition

and end use of slag

EIA/EMP report of M/s Bengal Energy Limited, At-Dauka, P.O.Tentulmuri, PS-

Narayangarh, Dist-Paschim Medinipur, WB

1 Global Tech Enviro Experts Pvt. Ltd.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY ........................................................................................ 7

CHAPTER-1 ....................................................................................................... 16

INTRODUCTION................................................................................................ 16

1.0 GENERAL ................................................................................................ 16

1.1 PURPOSE OF THE REPORT ......................................................................... 16

1.2 IDENTIFICATION OF THE PROJECT & PROJECT PROPONENT: .......................... 17

1.3 BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF NATURE, SIZE, LOCATION OF THE PROJECT AND ITS

IMPORTANCE TO THE COUNTRY, REGION ............................................................. 18

1.3.1 NATURE & SIZE OF PROJECT ............................................................. 18

1.3.2 LOCATION OF THE PROJECT SITE: ..................................................... 18

1.3.3 IMPORTANCE OF THE PROJECT TO THE COUNTRY AND REGION ............... 18

1.3.4 NATIONAL STEEL POLICY: ................................................................... 19

1.3.5 GLOBAL STEEL SCENARIO ................................................................... 19

1.3.6 DOMESTIC SCENARIO: ........................................................................ 19

1.4 LITIGATION/COURT CASE AGAINST THE COMPANY .................................... 20

1.5 SCOPE OF THE PRESENT STUDY DETAILS OF REGULATORY SCOPING CARRIED

OUT (AS PER TERMS OF REFERENCE) .................................................................. 20

1.6 AUTHORIZATION ..................................................................................... 21

1.7 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT: .............................................................................. 21

CONCLUSION: ................................................................................................. 21

CHAPTER-2 ....................................................................................................... 23

PROJECT DESCRIPTION .................................................................................... 23

2.0 CONDENSED DESCRIPTION OF THOSE ASPECTS OF THE PROJECT LIKELY TO

CAUSE ENVIRONMENTAL EFFECTS. ..................................................................... 23

2.1 TYPE OF PROJECT ..................................................................................... 23

2.2 NEED OF THE PROJECT .............................................................................. 23

2.3 LOCATION OF THE PROJECT(MAPS SHOWING GENERAL LOCATION, SPECIFIC LOCATION,

PROJECT BOUNDARY & PROJECT SITE LAYOUT) ................................................................ 24

2.3.1 GENERAL LOCATION ................................................................................. 24

2.3.2 SPECIFIC LOCATION ................................................................................. 25

2.3.3 PROJECT BOUNDARY & PROJECT SITE LAYOUT ............................................. 27

2.4 SIZE OR MAGNITUDE OF OPERATION (INCLUDING ASSOCIATED ACTIVITIES

REQUIRED BY OR FOR THE PROJECT) .................................................................. 27

Project configuration & product mix ................................................................. 27 Table 2.2 Project Configuration Before And After Expansion ........................................ 28

2.5 TECHNOLOGY AND PROCESS DESCRIPTION: ............................................. 28

2.5.1 TECHNOLOGY .......................................................................................... 28

2.5.2 PROCESS DESCRIPTION ........................................................................ 29

DRY QUENCHING FLOW SHEET ........................................................................... 32 Fig 2.1 Process & material flow sheet of M/s BEL .......... Error! Bookmark not defined.

2.5.3 MATERIAL BALANCE: ...................................................................... 46 Table 2.4 Sources and type of Pollution from the Proposed Project & mitigation measure .. 48




2.6 PROJECT DESCRIPTION, INCLUDING DRAWINGS SHOWING PROJECT LAYOUT,

COMPONENTS OF PROJECT ETC. SCHEMATIC REPRESENTATIONS OF THE FEASIBILITY

DRAWINGS WHICH GIVES INFORMATION IMPORTANT FOR EIA PURPOSE. ................ 49

2.6.1 LAND DETAILS ..................................................................................... 49 Table 2.1 Land schedule of project site core zone ...................................................... 49 Table 2.1A Land utilisation of project site core zone ................................................... 49

2.6.2 PROJECT LAYOUT ............................................................................... 50 Table 2.3 Water Requirement .................................................................................... 54 Fig 2.2 Water Balance Diagram ................................................................................ 55 Table 2.4 Solid Waste Generation ........................................................................... 59 Table 2.5 Summary Of Manpower Requirement ......................................................... 60 Table 2.6 Category-wise break-down of manpower ...................................................... 61 Table 2.7 Total capital cost of Project ......................................................................... 61

2.7 DESCRIPTION OF MITIGATION MEASURES INCORPORATED INTO THE PROJECT TO

MEET ENVIRONMENTAL STANDARDS, ENVIRONMENTAL OPERATING CONDITIONS OR

OTHER EIA REQUIREMENTS (AS PER REQUIRED SCOPE) ........................................ 63

2.8 ASSESSMENT OF NEW & UNTESTED TECHNOLOGY FOR THE RISK OF

TECHNOLOGICAL FAILURE. ................................................................................ 64

CONCLUSION ................................................................................................... 64

CHAPTER-3 ....................................................................................................... 65

DESCRIPTION OF EXISTING ENVIRONMENT .................................................... 65

3.0 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................... 65

3.1 STUDY AREA, PERIOD & COMPONENTS ........................................................ 65

3.1.1 STUDY AREA ...................................................................................... 65

3.1.2 STUDY PERIOD................................................................................... 65

3.1.3 COMPONENTS .................................................................................... 66

SITE CONNECTIVITY ...................................................................................... 66 Fig 3.1 Location of Site ............................................................................................. 66

3.2 PHOTOGRAPHS OF PROJECT SITE ............................................................... 67

3.3 TOPOGRAPHY .......................................................................................... 67

3.3.1 LAND USE PATTERN OF BUFFER ZONE ...................................................... 67 Fig 3.4 Landuse & Land Cover MapLAND USE PATTERN OF 10KM BUFFER ZONE OF

PROJECT SITE ......................................................................................................... 67 3.4 ESTABLISHMENT OF BASELINE FOR VALUED ENVIRONMENTAL COMPONENTS AS

IDENTIFIED IN THE SCOPE WITH METHODOLOGY ADOPTED. BASE MAP OF ALL

ENVIRONMENTAL COMPONENTS. ........................................................................ 69

3.5 BASELINE STATUS OF STUDY AREA ............................................................ 70 Table-3.2: Temperature Profile of the study area ......................................................... 70 Table-3.3: Maximum and Minimum Humidity of the Study Area ..................................... 70 Table-3.4: Rainfall Pattern in the Region ..................................................................... 71

3.5.2 METEOROLOGICAL CONDITIONS DURING STUDY PERIOD. ...................... 71 Table-3.5: Summarized Meteorological Data at site. ..................................................... 72 Table-No. 3.6: Overall Wind Frequency Distribution ..................................................... 72

3.5.3 AMBIENT AIR QUALITY ..................................................................... 74 Table 3.7 Monitored parameters and frequency of sampling .......................................... 74 Table 3.8 Techniques used for ambient air quality analysis ........................................ 75 Table-3.9: National Ambient Air Quality Standards as per MoEF Notification under

Schedule-VII, Rule- 3(3B). dt 18.11.09 ...................................................................... 75 Table- 3.10 A: Details of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations ............................. 76 Table 3.10 B Summary of Ambient Air Quality Result .................................................. 77 Table 3.10A: Chemical characterization of RSPM (PM10) ............................................. 80




MIXING HEIGHT ............................................................................................ 81

ToR-4(ix) Geological features and Geo-Hydrological status of the Study Area shall

Be Included 83

3.5.4 GEOLOGY OF THE STUDY AREA ......................................................... 83 Fig 3.13 Map Showing the geological features of the study area ........................................

3.5.5 GEOMORPHOLOGYOF THE STUDY AREA .............................................. 83 Fig 3.14Geomorphological Map of the area ......................................................................

3.5.6 WATER ENVIRONMENT: ....................................................................... 84 Fig 3.15 Ground water Prospect Map of the area ........................................................... Fig 3.16 Drainage Map of the study area ..................................................................... Table- 3.12: Surface and Groundwater Sampling Locations ......................................... 85 Table 3.12 A Ground Water analysis result .................................................................. 87 Table 3.12 B Surface Water analysis result ................................................................. 91

3.5.7 SOIL CHARACTERISTICS ..................................................................... 95 Fig 3.17 Soil Map of The area ..................................................................................... Table- 3.13: Details of Soil Quality Monitoring Locations ............................................... 96 Table 3.13 A Soil Analysis Results .............................................................................. 98

3.5.8 NOISE ENVIRONMENT: ...................................................................... 100

DISCUSSION ..................................................................................................... 103

THE NOISE READING TAKEN WERE WITHIN THE LIMITS AS THERE IS NO SUCH NOISE GENERATING

SOURCE EXCEPT VEHICULAR MOVEMENT. DURING FESIVALS THE NOISE LEVEL INCREASES. ........... 103

3.6 TRAFFIC STUDIES: ................................................................................. 103

3.7 ECOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT OF THE 10KM. RADIUS OF THE STUDY AREA: .... 106

3.7.1 Ecological Overview .......................................................................... 106

3.7.2 Objective: ....................................................................................... 107

3.7.3 Floral Characteristics ......................................................................... 108

Plankton Analysis ........................................................................................ 108 Table 3.16 Quantitative Assessment of Natural Plant species & Calculation of Biodiversity

Index of Natural Plant Species in the study area ......................................................... 111 3.8 SOCIO-ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT ........................................................... 113

3.8.1 OBJECTIVE: ..................................................................................... 113

3.8.2 DEMOGRAPHIC PATTERN ................................................................... 114

3.8.6 GAP ANALYSIS ................................................................................. 114

3.9 CONCLUSION: .......................................................................................... 115

CHAPTER-4 ..................................................................................................... 116

ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT & MITIGATION MEASURE ............... 116

4.1 DETAILS OF INVESTIGATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS DUE TO PROJECT

LOCATION, POSSIBLE ACCIDENTS, DESIGN, CONSTRUCTION, OPERATION,

DECOMMISSIONING OR REHABILITATION OF A COMPLETED PROJECT .................. 116

4.1.1 Objectives of Impact Prediction .......................................................... 116

4.1.2 Impact Prediction & Assessment ......................................................... 117

4.1.3 Pollution Potential ............................................................................. 117

4.2 METHODS USED FOR THE STUDY OF ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS .................. 117 Table 4.1: Parameter Impact Value of Environment Components ............................... 120 Table 4.2 Impact Identification Matrix for M/s Bengal Energy Ltd............................. 121

4.3 IMPACT PREDICTION & MEASURES FOR MINIMISING AND/OR OFFSETTING

ADVERSE IMPACT IDENTIFIED. ........................................................................ 123

4.3.1 IMPACTS DURING CONSTRUCTION PHASE: ......................................... 123 Table 4.4: Action Plan for Excavation and Muck Disposal during Construction .............. 126

4.3.3 IMPACTS DURING OPERATIONAL PHASE ............................................ 127




Table 4.5: Details of predicted stack emission from proposed expansion Project ........... 130 Table 4.6 Assessment of GLC of pollutants without APC equipments .............................. 133 Isopleth of NOx ........................................................................................................... Table 4.7 The GLC values after implementation of APC systems are ............................ 137 Table 4.3 Solid Wastes utilization & disposal measures ............................................... 138 Table 4.9 Hazardous Waste Management ................................................................... 139

4.4 EMP AT DESIGN STAGE ........................................................................... 139

4.4.1 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLANT (EMP) AT CONSTRUCTION STAGE:

140

4.4.2 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLANT (EMP) AT OPERATIONAL PHASE . 141 E S Ps ................................................................................................................... 141

4.5 RAIN WATER HARVESTING ...................................................................... 147

4.6 MAINTENANCE OF POLLUTION CONTROL EQUIPMENTS: .............................. 148

4.8 GREEN BELT DEVELOPMENT .................................................................... 149

4.9 SOCIO-ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT............................................................ 150

4.10 IRREVERSIBLE AND IRRETRIEVABLE COMMITMENTS OF ENVIRONMENTAL

COMPONENTS ................................................................................................ 151

4.11 ASSESSMENT OF SIGNIFICANCE OF IMPACTS (CRITERIA FOR DETERMINING

SIGNIFICANCE, ASSIGNING SIGNIFICANCE) ...................................................... 152

CONCLUSION ................................................................................................. 154

CHAPTER-5 ..................................................................................................... 155

ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES (TECHNOLOGY & SITE) .................................... 155

CONCLUSION ................................................................................................. 155

CHAPTER-6 ..................................................................................................... 156

ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME ............................................... 156

6.1 TECHNICAL ASPECTS OF MONITORING THE EFFECTIVENESS OF MITIGATION

MEASURES .................................................................................................... 156

6.2 ADVANTAGES OF MONITORING ................................................................. 156

6.3 SAMPLING LOCATIONS ........................................................................ 157

6.4 DATA ANALYSIS ..................................................................................... 158

6.5 REPORTING SCHEDULE .......................................................................... 158 Table 6.1 Monitoring Schedule ................................................................................. 159

6.6 BUDGETORY PROVISIONS FOR EMP .......................................................... 161 Table 6.3 Investment towards EMP, Implementation & its yearly maintenance ............ 161 Table 6.4 CREP Compliance ...................................................................................... 161

CONCLUSION ................................................................................................. 163

CHAPTER-7 ..................................................................................................... 164

ADDITIONAL STUDIES ................................................................................... 164

7.1 RISK ASSESSMENT & DISASTER MANAGEMENT: ...................................... 164

7.2 OBJECTIVES ....................................................................................... 164

7.3 DEFINITION OF ENVIRONMENTAL RISK .................................................. 165

7.4 IDENTIFICATION OF HAZARDS .............................................................. 165 Gen. ToR 3(x) Hazard Identification and details of proposed safety measures................. 165 Table 7.1 Hazard Identification of the Proposed Steel Plant .......................................... 166

7.5 ENVIRONMENTAL RISK EVALUATION...................................................... 169 Table 7.2 – Determination of Risk Potential ................................................................ 169

7.6 DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN ................................................................ 170




Table 7.3 Manpower to be in position ........................................................................ 170 7.7 ROLE OF KEY PERSONS ........................................................................... 172

7.7.1 WORKS MAIN CONTROLLER: .............................................................. 172

7.7.2 SITE INCIDENT CONTROLLER: ........................................................... 173

7.7.3 COMBAT TEAM LEADER .................................................................... 173

7.7.4 RESCUE TEAM LEADER ..................................................................... 173

7.7.5 AUXILIARY TEAM LEADER ................................................................. 174 Table 7.4 ACTION PLAN FOR ON-SITE EMERGENCY ............................................... 174

7.8 SILENT HOUR COMMAND STRUCTURE ...................................................... 175

7.9 ACTIVATION & CLOSING PROCEDURE FOR ON-SITE EMERGENCY.................. 176

7.9.1 ACTIVATION PROCEDURE .................................................................. 176

7.9.2 FACILITIES AVAILABLE FOR ON-SITE EMERGENCY PLAN: ...................... 177

7.10 FACILITIES AVAILABLE ........................................................................ 177

7.11 OBJECTIVE OF ONSITE EMERGENCY PLAN ............................................... 178

7.12 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH ...................................................................... 179

7.12.1 Occupational Health Hazard ........................................................... 179

7.12.2 EXPOSURE LIMITS ........................................................................ 181

7.12.3 FIRST AID MEASURES ................................................................... 182

7.12.4 EXPOSURE CONTROLS AND PERSONAL PROTECTION ......................... 183 Table 7.5 Health Hazard in Major Shops: ................................................................. 184

7.8 PUBLIC HEARING ................................................................................... 187

7.8 CORPORATE ENVIRONMENT RESPONSIBILITY ............................................ 198

CONCLUSION ................................................................................................. 199

CHAPTER-8 ..................................................................................................... 200

PROJECT BENEFIT .......................................................................................... 200

8.1 PROJECT BENEFIT .................................................................................... 200

8.2 INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT .............................................................. 200

8.3 EMPLOYMENT POTENTIAL ........................................................................ 201

8.4 REVENUE GENERATION TO CENTRAL & STATE GOVERNMENT ....................... 202

CHAPTER-9 ..................................................................................................... 203

ENVIRONMENT COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS ...................................................... 203

CONCLUSION ................................................................................................. 203

CHAPTER-10 ................................................................................................... 204

ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN (ADMINISTARATIVE)

....................................................................................................................... 204

10.1 EMP IMPLEMENTATION AND MONITORING .............................................. 204

10.2 METEOROLOGY ................................................................................... 204

10.3 EMISSIONS AND AIR QUALITY............................................................... 204

10.4 DRAINAGE SYSTEM ............................................................................. 204

10.5 WATER QUALITY .................................................................................. 205

10.6 NOISE LEVEL ...................................................................................... 205

10.7 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH ...................................................................... 205

10.8 LABORATORY FACILITIES ..................................................................... 205

10.9 UPDATING OF EMP ............................................................................... 205

10.10 ORGANISATION AND MANPOWER ....................................................... 205

10.11 FUNCTIONS OF EMP CELL ....................................................................... 210




CHAPTER-11 ................................................................................................... 213

SUMMARY & CONCLUSION ............................................................................. 213

CHAPTER -12 .................................................................................................. 222

CONSULTANT PROFILE ................................................................................... 222




EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

ToR 1 Executive Summary

i) Project name and location

Proposed Expansion project of M/s. BEL is located over 161.87 ha of land at village-Dauka, PO-

Tentulmuri, PS- Narayangarh, Dist-Paschim Medinipur, West Bengal, which extends from 220

15’ 22.96’’ N to 220 15’ 27.68’’ N and 870 22’ 53.37’’ E to 870 23’ 34.69’’ N with, with 32

AMSL appearing on Toposheet No-73M/6 (F45J6). The proposed expansion is confined over the

same land of 161.87 ha.

ii) Products & Capacities (existing & proposed)

M/s. BEL, was granted EC vide J-11011/28/2008-IA II (I), 2nd January, 2009for 0.5 MTPA

Integrated steel in MBF,DRI, EAF & CCM route; 1.2 MTPACoke Oven & 140 MW CPP which

included both WHRB & FBC. But the unit could install 0.6 MTPA Coke Oven & 40 MW CPP and

has now applied and granted ToR for 1.0 MTPA integrated steel, 1.2 MTPA Non-Recovery Coke

OVEN & 205 mw POWER Plant. The configuration & capacities are as given in table below.

Facility Existing Configuration

Existing capacity in TPA

Proposed configuration

Proposed capacity in TPA

Final capacity

Product End use

Non.Recovery CO Plant

1x0.6 MTPA 6,00,000 1x0.6 MTPA 6,00,000 12,00,000 Lam Coke MBF

CPP(Coke Oven gas) 1x40 MW 40 MW 1x40 MW 40 MW 80 MW Elec. Power Internal use/Sale

DRI Kiln - Nil 4x500 TPD

6,40,000 4,48,000

10,88,000 Sponge Iron EAF & IF

4x350 TPD

CPP (DRI) - Nil 68 MW 68 MW Elec. Power Internal use/Sale

MBF,2.7T/m3day - Nil 2x320m3 5,96,000 5,96,000 Hot Metal EAF & IF

Sinter Plant 1x60m2 2T/m2.hr, 340days

- Nil 1x60m2 10,00,000 10,00,000 Sinter MBF

EAF with LF, 16H/day, 325days

- Nil 2x80T 8,32,000 8,32,000 Liq. Steel LF

LF - Nil 1x25T Holding Liq. steel CCM

C C M - Nil 2,500 TPD 8,15,000 8,15,000 Steel Billet Sale

IF 15H/day, 325 days

- Nil 3x20T 2,92,500 2,92,500 Liq. Steel CCM


CPP (BF gas fired ) - Nil 1x22 MW 22 MW 22 MW Elec. Power Internal use/Sale

AFBC - Nil 1x35 MW 35 MW 35 MW Elec. Power Internal use/Sale

A S U - Nil 120 TPD 1,200 m3/hr 1,200 m3/hr

Oxygen Nitrogen

Use in MBF & EAF

iii) a. Requirement of land




The project area is located at Vill-Dauka, Po-Tentulmuri, PS-Narayangarh in Paschim Medinipur district of

West Bengal. The company has in its possession 161.87 ha of land. The proposed expansion will be

accommodated in available vacant area of this land. This is an industrial barren land.

b. Requirement of Raw material with source of supply.

Major Raw material inventory for project after modification cum expansion with source and mode of

transportation is estimated and given below.

Material Gross Capacity in TPA Source Mode of Transport

Coking Coal 16,80,000 Imported Ship/Rail/Road

Non-Coking Coal 17,96,780 Talcher Rail

Iron Ore 19,98,800 Barbil, Banspani Rail

Iron Ore fines 7,68,000 Barbil, Banspani Rail

Dolomite 1,36,000 Biramitrapur Rail/Road

Lime stone 1,39,000 Biramitrapur Rail/Road

Other chemicals required for the proposed project is

Sl No Item Description Unit Quantity Per Annum

1 DM plant resins KG 342

2 Hydrochloric acid KL 178

3 Caustic soda KG 287

4 Lubricants KG 3,112

5 Lubricants LTR 10,015

c. Requirement of water

The total water requirement after the expansion project will be 13,165 m3/day, which will be sourced

from river Kangsabati. Two intake wells at the river, one at Jinsar 220 23’ 34.42” N and 870 21’ 49.32” E

and other at Uttershimla 220 23’ 19.30” N and 870 23’ 05.03” E has been set up. Transportation of water

from river to project site will cover a pipe length of 23.7km and cross canal, NH-6, Howrah-Kharagpur

Rly. Line and pass along the length of NH-60, and outfall at 220 14’ 45.48” N and 870 23’ 23.08” E.

Permission has already been from Government of west Bengal, SE Rly etc. This water project is to supply

10 MGD i.e. 40,920 m3/day and part of job has already been completed.

d. Requirement of Power

Power requirement after expansion will be 153 MW. Own Captive Power generation will be 205 MW.

After usage balance power of 52 MW will be supplied to State Grid.

e. Requirement of Fuel

16,80,000 TPA Coking Coal, 17,96,780 TPA Non coking Coal will be used as fuel in project.

iv) Process description in brief

Steel production in proposed expansion will be in DRI/MBF-IF/EAF- route. Lump Iron Ore along with

Coal and dolomite will be fed to Kilns for sponge iron production. Similarly, Iron ore agglomerate sinter

will be manufactured in sinter plant and will be fed to MBFs with coke, Oxygen, dolomite & pulverised

coal injection for production of hot metal. Hot metal from MBF & Sponge Iron will be used in IFs and EAFs

for production of liquid steel which will be casted in CCM for production of billets..




v) Capital cost of the project, estimated time schedule

The total project cost has been estimated as Rs 4943 crore. This will include pollution control equipments

which will be installed along with process equipments and a CER cost of 18.10 Crore. The plant will be

commissioned and give commercial production in three after obtaining Environmental Clearance.

vi) Site selected for the project

The project is located at Dauka, Tentulmuri, Paschim Medinipur. The expansion has been proposed in the

acquired area on which existing plant is running. It has well developed infrastructure like road network,

railway siding etc. No national park or wildlife sanctuary or eco sensitive zones or places of

archaeological importance are present within 10 km radius around the project and the site does not come

under critical polluted area. Hence alternate site has not been considered.

vii) Baseline Environmental data.

For the preparation of EIA report a monitoring schedule covering winter season of the year was carried

out from 1st Nov 2017 to 31st Jan 2018. The consultant had engaged NABL accreditated laboratory , M/s

Kalyani Laboratories Pvt Ltd for carrying out monitoring under their strict supervision.The impact

identification started with collection of baseline data such as existing ambient air quality, qualities of

ground water, surface water, soil, noise level prevailing in the area and meteorological parameters like

temperature, humidity, wind speed and direction, cloud cover etc.

Land

The general land use/land cover features of the buffer zone include settlements, agricultural land,

vegetation and forest, collieries both in use & disused, wasteland, water bodies, wet land, and industrial

land, infrastructure and others.

Agriculture land of buffer zone is about 66%, followed by 16.5 % rural settlement and about 3.1% dense

forest.

Water

Kangsabati River is of high significance in the region as it caters to the water requirements of most of the

villages and the majority of the industrial units in the region. River is about 20 km away from the project

site. In 1978, the area was affected by flood and there after no flood hazard has been observed since last

40 years. The mean sea level of the river is 26m and the MSL of the plant is 33 m.

Annual avg. Rain fall project area being 1440 mm and project area 20 ha there will be about 3,81,102m3

of rain water harvested per annum and will meet summer supply to plant i.e. lean period of river

Kangsabati.

The analytical results of surface water samples at different location for various parameters reveal that all

the parameters comply with IS: 2296 (Class ‘C’) standards indicating their suitability for drinking and

other purposes after conventional treatment followed by disinfection.

Similarly the analysis results of groundwater samples showed all the parameters are within the

prescribed limits as per IS: 10500 standards for drinking water.

Climate

Climate in the study region is generally dry and hot and is characterized with seasonal variations of temp.,

humidity, rainfall etc.

Summer is from March to June. South West monsoon brings rain to the area from mid June to September.

Post monsoon are October & November. November to February are winter in the area.

The area receives fairly good amount of rainfall from the southwest monsoon during June to September.

Light showers of rain occur during the months of October, November and sometimes in December also

Annual Average rain fall 1440 mm

Meteorological conditions In order to determine the micrometeorological conditions of the study area a temporary micro-

meteorological monitoring observatory was set up near the site from Nov 2017-Jan 2018. The results

were compared with data of IMD station Midnapore. At the site Overall predominant wind direction has

been from North and the North East direction during study period.

The average wind velocity found to be 3.72 m/s and the calm period is 34.83%.




Ambient air

The study area represents mostly industrial environment. Air quality in the project area is affected by the

presence of polluting industry nearby. The prominent sources of air pollution in the study area are due to

emission from industries, vehicular movement and domestic coal burning as fuel in some parts of the

study area.

During the study period, the concentrations of PM10 measured to vary between 93.6-61.9 g/m3 at

different locations of the study area. The concentrations of PM2.5 varied between 49.8-27.2 g/m3 at

different locations of the study area. During the study period, the average levels of SO2 concentrations at

all location varied from 15.4-6.1 g/m3. The concentrations of NOX values varied between 28.7-10.5

g/m3 at different locations. The concentrations of CO value ranged between 789-342 µg/m3 at different

locations during the study period

Soil analysis

The study area analysis results of the soil parameters show deficiency normal nutrients and micro

nutrients of. The bulk density of the study area ranges from 1.13 to 1.3 gm/cc. The other nutrient content

like nitrogen, potassium and phosphate content of the soil is very low indicating land not suitable for

agriculture purposes. This is to be taken care of in agricultural land as well as growing trees for green

belt.

Flora and Fauna

Flora and Fauna of the study area reveals that no Schedule- I type of fauna found in the study area. In

faunal population; cattle, goats, dogs, rats, insects are common in the study area.

As per IUCN's "Red Data Book", none of the taxa found in this region could be marked as rare or endangered plant species.

Socio Economic

The socioeconomic features around the 10km radius of the plant site have been collected through

primary and secondary data collection. The study area covers 12425 inhabitants. Out of the total

population 53 % are male and 43% are female. SC population is 25%, ST 1.0% and other 74%. 57 % of the

total population is literate.

Priority to be given to local people in employment in proposed expansion project to improve economy of the locality. viii) Identification of Hazard in handling, processing and Storage of material and safety systems

provided.

All the shops will have their own list of hazards, which have been identified and damage to human being

and environment has been discussed with risk management, which can reduce if not mitigated fully. The

major on-site emergency situation may occur from storage and handling, fuel gas, molten metal and slag

handling, acids, alkali storage and handling and electrical short-circuit. Proper safety equipments will be

provided to the workers and proper standard operating procedure will be followed during handling and

processing hazardous material. Hazards in various working area have been identified, its severity has

been estimated and mitigation has been suggested.

Hazard Identification & Risk Analysis for different units has been addressed with identification of most

critical hazard operations.

ix) Likely Impact of the project on air, water, land, flora fauna

Air Environment:

The pollutant emissions from the proposed project will have maximum ground level concentration as

33.48 µg/m3 for PM10, 31.23 µg/m3 for PM2.5, 44.65µg/m3 for NOx and 62.18 µg/m3 for SO2. With

installation of APC systems like bag filters, and ESPs the maximum ground level concentration will come

down to 2.53 µg/m3 for PM10, 1.49 µg/m3 for PM2.5 and 34.11 µg/m3 for SO2.

However there will be occasions when dust venting may be forced due to APC failure although inter

locking provision has been suggested for tripping the unit. Action plan has been suggested to protect

crops of the villagers during such situations. In case of failure of APC immediate action will be taken at

most impact points with water jet mixed system which will be truck mounted.

Water Management




As the plant water system is designed based on maximum recirculation system. The effluents likely to be

generated from the proposed plant are:

Backwash Waste from Filtration Plant;

Run-off water from Raw Material Storage Yards;

Waste Water from Billet Caster;

Cooling tower blow-down of various shops; and

Plant Sewage & Canteen Effluents.

The effluents will be treated in ETP and will be reused. M/s BEL abides to Zero Discharge Liquid norms

for its existing plant. Rain water harvesting will be done to reduce raw water drawl during lean period of

Damodar.

Noise Pollution Management

The noise level within the plant boundary is occupational noise levels and confined within shops. The

level will be further minimized when the noise reaches the plant boundary and the nearest residential

areas beyond the plant boundary, as elaborate green belt development is envisaged for all along the

boundary for attenuation of noise and fugitive emission. All the equipment in the steel plant will be

designed/operated in such a way that the noise level shall not exceed 85 dB (A) as per the requirement of

Standard.

Solid Waste Management

The comprehensive EMP enlists the management plan for each individual unit.

Solid waste Quantity in

TPA

Utilisation measures

EAF & IF slag 1,20,000 Use in construction work

IF & EAF flue dust 24.000 Will be used in making sinter for use in BF

DRI Dolchar 2,72,000 Use in AFBC to generate steam for power generation

Power plant Fly ash 1,50,750 Supply to Gava Ecocrete Pvt Ltd as per MOU.

DRI ash & dust 5,75,600 Land feel and dump in abandoned coal mines for which

permission to be sought

BF slag 1,84,760 To be used in sinter plant & balance to be Sold to ASO

Cement Ltd as per MOU 20.09.2018

BF sludge + dust 2,93,670 To be used in sinter plant & balance to be Sold to ASO


Power plant Bottom Ash 1,00,500 Sold to Gava Ecocrete Pvt Ltd, MOU 30th August, 2018

In case of excess BF slag and sludge over sale, this can be used as raw material for iron ore sinter making.

Measures for Improvement of Ecology:

There is no wildlife sanctuary within the 10 km radius of the proposed plant. The core zone area is devoid

of plantation. There will not be any loss of plantation because of the project. On the other hand, the

company will provide the comprehensive green-belt cover in 33 % of the project area as per the MoEFCC

norms to improve the local ecology. The company plans to acquire the nearby abandoned coal quarries

with deep gorges and holes and will fill the same with the non-hazardous solid waste and will develop

thick green belt cover over the sites. All these steps will considerably improve upon the ecology of the

area.

x) Impact Mitigation Measure




Gaseous Emission

a. Hot flue gas with particulate matter, SO2, CO2 and NOx will be generated from DRI kilns, Flue gas

will pass through, DSC, ABC & ESPs for separation of particulate matter and clean gas will be

sucked by ID fans and vented to atmosphere through high stack. Efficiency of ESPs being >99%,

particulate matter emission will come down. In the existing plant 1 no. of ESPs for Cement

rinding units is installed and additional 4 ESPs and 5 Bagfilters will be installed.

b. Fumes generated from Induction Furnace will be cleaned in bag filters and vented to atmosphere

through ID fan and stack. Emission will come down.

c. Sinter plant and FBC will have ESPs to clean gaseous emission which are then sucked by ID fans

and vented to atmosphere.

d. Both DRI Kiln flue gas, Coke Oven gas will have WHRB boiler for removal of heat for generation of

steam for power. Ventury scrubber will be used in MBF to remove particulate matter in the form

of sludge. BF dust and sludge having residual carbon will be used in making sinter.

With this pollution control measure the resultant ground level concentration will come down from

estimated value as follows.

PM10 from 33.48 to 2.53 µg/m3, PM2.5 from 31.23 µg/m3 to 1.49 µg/m3, SO2 from 62.18 to 34.11

µg/m3

Liquid Effluent

a. Industrial waste water from MBFs, DRI kilns and CPP will pass through ETP, where

neutralization and settling will take place. After treatment the turbidity will come down from 60

to <15 NTU, oil & grease from 31 to <5PPM and suspended particle from 1000-5000 to <30 PPM.

b. Domestic waste water will pass through STP having equalization, aeration and settling tank.

Industrial and domestic effluent water after settling tanks will undergo filtration through gravel

& sand bed and will be used for toilet flushing, green belt watering, dust suppression and vehicle

washing.

c. Water quenching will be avoided and dry quenching will be adopted for red hot coke. This will

eliminate waste water generation and treatment from Coke Oven Plant.

Solid and Hazardous Waste

a. Fly ash and bottom ash from CPP will be supplied to Gava Ecocrete Pvt Ltd as per MOU for fly ash

brick manufacturing. Bottom ash , fly ash and kiln accretion from DRI kiln will be used as road

making and land fill material. Possibility of dumping DRI ash & dust in abandoned coal mines to

be explored.

b. BF slag & sludge will be utilized in sinter making and balance will be sold to ASO Cement Ltd as

per MOU. IF slag normally contains about 15% Iron, hence slag will be cooled, crushed and

undergo magnetic separation. Residual iron thus recovered will be recycled to IF for re-melting

and slag which has high silica content and equivalent to river sand will be used as construction

material/land fill.

c. Used oil, DM plant resins and lead batteries like hazardous materials will be handed over to

authorized dealer/suppliers

xi) Hazard Identification & Risk Analysis

It may be observed that the major on-site emergency situation may occur from coal & chemicals storage

and handling; fuel gas handling, molten metal and slag handling, acids and alkali storage and handling and

electrical short-circuit. The off-site environmental disaster may occur if large-scale fire and explosion




occurs, the effect of which extends beyond the plant boundary. The off-site environmental disaster may

occur due to significant environmental degradation for a sustained period.

Probable Hazards has been identified through the process of HIRA for major units like ASU, DRI, SMS,

Rolling mill, Sinter & CPP. The respective mitigation majors are also enlisted along with the onsite

emergency Plan. The Environmental management plan includes the environmental Risk mitigation

measures.

BEL has a well-developed Disaster Management Plan consisting of the preparedness plan for onsite and

offsite disasters and the role of key persons during occurrence of any disaster. An emergency cell headed

by Works Main Controller and followed by Site Controller, Combat Leader, Rescue team operates to

prevent any type of disaster. The DMP also states the activation and closing procedure for onsite

emergency along with the responsibilities of each member.

xii) Issues raised during Public Hearing

Public Hearing for proposed expansion from its 0.6 MTPA Non-Recovery Coke Oven and 40 MW Power

Plant to 1.0 MTPA Integrated Steel Plant, 1.2 MTPA Non-Recovery Coke Oven and 205 MW Power Plant at

Dauka, PO- Tentulmuri, PS-Narayangarh, Dist-Paschim Medinipur, West Bengal by M/s Bengal Energy

Limited was conducted on 15.05.2018, at 12.00 hrs at the project site, WB.

Sl.No Name of Public Issues raised by Public Commitment of P P

1 Sri Sarat Pramanik,

Tentulmuri

Source of water for the plant and

concern on pollution due to

expansion

Water requirement will met from nearby

river for which the company has requisite

permission. Pollution control norms of

statutory authorities will be followed &

proper control measures will be taken for

abatement of pollution. Green belt will be

further strengthened.

2 Sri Subod Dey, Khorigaria

Sri Sukumar Das,

Khorigaria

Concern on pollution due to

expansion, its control so as to

provide a better environment for

local village.

Pollution control norms of statutory

authorities will be followed & proper

control measures will be taken for



3 Sri Mantu Behari Patra Enquired about development of

the area due to expansion

CSR activities are being carried out

regularly and will also continue on regular

basis.

4 Sri Anil Singh, Banspukuria

Sri Dipak Pal, Tentulmuri

Employment provision for local

people and their safety aspects.

The issue will be addressed.

5 Sri Badal Patra, Tentulmuri Requested the proponent to

assist local people for health

protection and provide food like

gur and channa to the labours.



basis.

6 Sri Durgapada Das,

Khorigaria

Sri Dhananjoy Bhuiya,

Khorigaria

Sri Bhadreswar Singh,

Nangunia

Provision of training programs

for skill development to local and

employment opportunities.



basis.

7 Sri Sujit Khara,

Malka

Concern about control of

pollution and employment

opportunities for locals.









xiii) CER Plan with proposed expenditure

The company will spend 18.10 crores of its project cost on CER activities based on circular . This will be

spent along the construction activities of the project and cover all the issues raised by public during

Public Hearing and as committed by project proponent.

S.N0 Item Description Ist Yr (in lacs)

2nd Yr (in lacs)

3rd Yr (in lacs)

Total (in lacs)

1

Refreshers course to technical

persons, on advanced

industrial training and

practical exposure to

industries, like process, safety,

disaster etc.

Rent Establishment + Training Material +

Stipend+ faculty 60 60 60 180

2

Development of water shed

and renovation of water bodies

in Banspukuria, Tentulmuri

villages

12 Nos of New &

Existing water

bodies @ 4

Nos/Yr. @ Rs

400000

Digging, Paving, de-

siltation & removal

of Aquatic weeds

16 16 16 48

3

Construction of village

community center and its

renovation

3500000/ Village

3 Villages with

community hall,

recreational and

study centers

35 35 35 105

4 Strengthening of approach

roads

Proposing 4 km CC

Approach &

Village Roads

Rs 1200000./Km for

widening &

strengthening

48 48 48 144

5 Adoptation of primary schools

and Anganwadi Centres

3 Schools & 3

Anganwadi

centres

Renovation of the

school building,

construction of

toilets, provide

bench & desk

25 25 25 75

6 Technical and Infrastructural

aid to farmers.

Providing deep irigation points with

electricity, supply of high yield seeds,

fertilizer to poor farmers. The villages will

be decided in consulattion with local

administration.

35 30 65 130

7 Promote artisans

Hand loom and Dhokra metal casting are

famous cottage industries of the area are

in ruined condition to be resumed with

modernisation

15 22 18 55

8 Swatch Bharat Mission

Providing Tractors, Back Hoe cum

toploader, dust bins and development of

the dump yard

300 300 225 825

9 Energy efficient street light Electrification of the village with energy

efficient LED bulbs. 77 78 76 231

10 Plantation and distribution of

saplings in and around the

Adoptation of 5 villages for plantation and

distribution of saplings 5.4 7.2 4.4 17




villages

11 Total expenditure 1810

xiv) Occupational Health Measures

Sl. No. Group Item Potential Health hazard Preventive measures

I Raw materials and products handling

Iron ore & Coke, Eye/skin irritation Water sprinkling’ Coal , lime stone/Dolo Respiratory track diseases Dry fogging in

conveyors, ID fan Other fluxing minerals due to Dust, burning due to bag filter, PPE like

safety shoes, Product steel local fire Dust mask and safety

goggles. Acids/Alkalis Water jet for eye

washing II Major shops DRI kiln flue gas CO, dust, heat Pollution Control

Equipments for direct exhaust of the gas

Sinter Plant Dust, heat, Respiratory track diseases, Well ventilation of work place with air ventilating systems

noise Head Ache PPE like gloves, dust mask to prevent dust inhalation

Captive power plant

Fly ash, explosion, noise, vibration, HT, electric equipments, Acid and alkali

Electric shock, injury due to chemicals, burn/ eye injury

Use of PPE, barricading high voltage area.

III Utilities Fuel gas Gas leaks Fire and gas Use of PPE

Distribution Poisoning Electric power

Supply Short circuit Electric shock Use of PPE

IV All shops Falling from

height Collapse of scaffoldings Injury, breaking of bone Proper scaffolding to

withstand Breaking of slings Load and use of safety

belt Tested from time to time.

Falling of heavy People working over Head injury Use of helmet and safety shoes Objects from

height Head, next floor

xv) Post Project Monitoring Plan

Depending upon prevailing predominant wind direction AAQ monitoring stations have been decided

where monitoring instruments shall be installed for measuring polluting parameters at regular intervals.

Similarly Fugitive emission will be monitored twice a month and Stack monitoring will be continuous

with Online monitoring systems. Three locations has been identified for Ground Water and Surface water

monitoring which will be carried out twice in a year. ETP, STP, CT will be monitored once a month or as

per the Standard Operating Procedures.




CHAPTER-1

INTRODUCTION

1.0 GENERAL

M/s. Bengal Energy Limited (BEL) is a group company which is an agglomeration of

companies actively involved in the trading of steam coal, coking coal, coke and Iron ore

fines etc. It is manufacturer of metallurgical coke & also involved in power generation

&distribution services in Kolkata, West Bengal.

The company has already acquired 161.87 ha of land on which existing project is

operating. The Company was accorded prior Environmental Clearance vide Letter No. J-

11011/28/2008-IA II(I) dated 2nd January 2009 for 0.5 MTPA Integrated Steel Plant, 1.2

MTPA Non-Recovery coke oven plant and 140 MW power Plant.

Out of the facilities granted in EC, the company has installed and running only 0.6

MTPA Non-Recovery Coke Oven and 40 MW Power Plant and balanced facilities have not

been installed and validity period of EC is over. Consent to operate for existing running

facilities issued by West Bengal Pollution Control Board vide letter No-CO 88332 has

been renewed and valid up to 30.3.2022.

The existing operating project is located at-Dauka, P.O-Tentulmuri, PS-Naraingarh, in

Paschim Medinipur district of West Bengal. The location is well connected to rest of India.

The company has come out with expansion proposal for which ToR has already been

issued by EAC (Industry-1) in their 19th meeting held during 8th-9th June 2017. The

expansion proposal is to manufacture 1.0 MTPA steel product by installation of Sinter

Plant DRI kilns, IFs, EAFs, MBF, ASU and 165 MW Power plant in addition to one more

0.6 MTPA Non-recovery Coke Oven unit.

The Government of India has made it mandatory for all developmental projects to

prepare a detailed EIA study so that the impacts of the proposed developmental activity

can be predicted and a suitable management plan can be implemented before

commissioning of a project as per EIA Notification 2006 and amendments thereby.

In view of the above, extensive Base line study has been done as per terms of reference

issued for core zone and 10km radius Buffer zone of project area. EIA/EMP Report has

been prepared in line with the Terms of Reference (ToR) suggested by Environmental

Appraisal Committee (Industry-I).

1.1 PURPOSE OF THE REPORT

The purpose of this EIA report is to collect current base line status, predict adverse

impact on existing environment due to the proposed project &suggest measures to

reduce the burden of environmental impacts for sustainable development. EIA study has

ever increasing importance as a tool for developmental decision-making. Environmental

impact assessment; as an environmental instrument, shall predict proposed activities

that are likely to have a significant impact on the local and regional environment and

hence is subject to a decision for necessary mitigations. It is also used as a planning tool

to promote sustainable development by integrating environmental considerations into a

wide range of proposed action plans.




The purpose of this EIA study is also to critically analyze the manufacturing process of

different products proposed to be manufactured with reference to types and quantity of

different raw material consumption, possible source of waste water, dust/gas emission

and hazardous waste generation, their adverse impact on environment and health of

flora and fauna & control measures to reduce the pollution and to delineate a

comprehensive environment management plan along with recommendations in proposed

environment management system.

This process is applied prior to major decisions and commitments made by project

proponent while setting up project. A broad definition of environment is adopted. The

social, cultural and health effects are considered as an integral part of EIA. Particular

attention is given in EIA practice for preventing, mitigating and offsetting the significant

adverse effects of proposed project on the environment.

Long term objectives of EIA are to:

1. Protect human health and safety;

2. Avoid irreversible changes and serious damage to the environment;

3. Safeguard valued resources, natural areas and ecosystem components; and

4. Enhance the social aspects of the proposal.

EIA is an administrative process that identifies the potential environmental effects of

undertaking a proposal, and presents these environmental effects alongside the other

advantages and disadvantages of the proposal to the decision-makers. In the vast

majority of EIA procedures this means that the outcome of the EIA process provides

advice to the decision-makers it does not provide a final decision. So, by itself, the EIA

procedures cannot be expected to stop a proposal, although this is an outcome that

some members of the general community and environment groups may expect.

EIA cannot be regarded as a means of introducing an environmental “veto” power into

administrative decision-making processes. Decisions that are unsatisfactory from an

environmental point of view can still be made, but with full knowledge of the

environmental consequences. The final decision about a proposal depends upon the

likely severity of the adverse effects, balanced against other expected benefit.

1.2 IDENTIFICATION OF THE PROJECT & PROJECT PROPONENT:

The project is a red category Integrated Steel expansion project & basically a prime

metallurgical unit proposing to produce 1.0 MTPA steel billets from Sintered Iron Ore and

comes under schedule 3(a) category-A of EIA Notification, 2006.

Gen.ToR 2(ii) Information about the Project Proponent

Managing Director of M/s Bengal Energy Limited is Er.Rajeev Maheshwari. He is an

engineering graduate with a degree in Mining from IIT, Kharagpur and has over 25 years

of overall experience in Mines, Ferro alloys, coal and coke trading business.

Director Mr.Om Jalan, a graduate in Commerce, has over 15 years of experience in the

trading business of coal and coke.

Director – Operations Mr.Navin Maheshwari, Chartered Accountant & Cost Accountant, is

involved in the operational and liaison aspects of BEL.

Chief Project Coordinator Mr.Arun Kumar Maharaj, Mechanical Engineer, has an

experience of over 30 years in power plant, heat exchangers and ESP, responsible for




rendering his technical expertise in the commissioning and execution of related projects

in Bengal Energy.

President – Projects J K Choudhary, holds a degree in B.Sc (Engineering) and has

worked for many reputed companies, handling top management responsibilities in

Projects, Operation, Maintenance and Marketing namely MMTC Limited, Neelachal Ispat

Nigam Limited, Jindal Steel & Power Ltd, Visa Steel Ltd.

Clientele

Tata Steel, Tata Metaliks, SAIL, Bhushan Power & Steel Ltd, Usha Martin & Mideast

Integrated Steel Ltd. and many more.

1.3 BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF NATURE, SIZE, LOCATION OF THE PROJECT AND

ITS IMPORTANCE TO THE COUNTRY, REGION

1.3.1 NATURE & SIZE OF PROJECT

The existing project of M/s BEL is running with 0.6 MTPA Non-Recovery Coke Oven and

40 MW Power Plant. The proposed expansion is to manufacture 1.0 MTPA steel product

by installation of one more non-recovery Coke oven Plant, Sinter Plant DRI kilns, IFs,

EAFs, MBF, ASU and 165 MW Power plant.

Hence the project is a brown field Red Category steel manufacturing unit. It is a primary

metallurgical industry; manufacturing steel from Iron ore and comes under schedule

3(a), category ‘A’ of EIA notification September, 2006.

1.3.2 LOCATION OF THE PROJECT SITE:

The project is located at-Dauka, P.O-Tentulmuri, PS-Narayangarh, in Paschim Medinipur

district of West Bengal. The project site of M/s Bengal Energy Limited extends from 220

15’ 22.96’’ N to 220 15’ 27.68’’ N and 870 22’ 53.37’’ E to 870 23’ 34.69’’ N, AMSL 32m.

The project has 161.87ha of land which can be found in Survey of India topo sheet No-

F45J8

The existing project has well developed infrastructure and the expansion project will

avail this facility.

Gen. ToR 2(iii) Importance and benefits of the project

1.3.3 IMPORTANCE OF THE PROJECT TO THE COUNTRY AND REGION

India produced 88.97 million tons(mt) , 89.79 mt and 96 mt of crude steel during 2014,

2015 and 2016 respectively. In lieu of this, Govt. of India has drawn following

strategies:

The Minister of Steel & Mines has reiterated commitment of Central Government

to support the steel industry to reach a production target of 300 Million Tonne Per

Annum (MTPA) in 2025.

Government has planned Special Purpose Vehicles (SPVs) with four iron ore rich

states i.e., Karnataka, Jharkhand, Orissa, and Chhattisgarh to set up plants

having capacity between 3 to 6 MTPA.

The Central Board of Excise and Customs (CBEC) has issued a notification

announcing zero export duty on iron ore pellets, which will help the domestic




industry to become more competitive in the international market. Facts show

importance of setting up steel industry.

Therefore for commercial viability as well as to meet the National target, proposed

expansion is sought for.

1.3.4 NATIONAL STEEL POLICY:

The Indian government announced National Steel Policy (NSP) in November, 2005

envisaging a Compound Annual Growth Rate (CAGR) of 7.3% per annum in the steel

sector up to 2019-20. To achieve this, the NSP aims to increase indigenous production

capacity from 38 MT in 2005 to about 110 MT by 2019-20, through a multipronged

strategy.

However in 2006-07 domestic crude steel production grew at the rate of 10.9%

and consumption at 11.6%, accordingly the estimated for production of steel was

revised in 2008 and was projected at 180MT as target to be achieved by 2019-

20.

In 2010-11 India produced 78MT, in 2012-13 81MT, and in 2013-14 84 MT crude

steel. At the same time world steel production in 2013 and 2014 was 1,607 MT &

1,636MT crude steel respectively.

Need to boost per-capita steel consumption in rural area to improve quality of

life.

Appropriate steps must be taken to ensure adequate and timely supply of basic

Raw materials and processed inputs from domestic and over see sources.

1.3.5 GLOBAL STEEL SCENARIO

In 2017, the world crude steel production reached 1690 million tonnes (mt) and

showed a growth of 4% over 2016.

China remained world’s largest crude steel producer in 2017 (832 mt) followed by

Japan (105 mt), India (101.4 mt) and the USA (82 mt).

World Steel Association has projected Indian steel demand to grow by 7.5% in

2018 and by 7.3% in 2019 while globally, steel demand has been projected to

grow by 3.9% in 2018 and by 1.4% in 2019. Chinese steel use is projected to

grow by 6% in 2018 and show nil growth in 2019.

Per capita finished steel consumption in 2017 is placed at 212 kg for world and

523 kg for China by World Steel Association. The same for India was 69 kg in

2017.

1.3.6 DOMESTIC SCENARIO:

The Indian steel industry has entered into a new development stage, post de-regulation,

riding high on the resurgent economy and rising demand for steel.

Rapid rise in production has resulted in India becoming the 2nd largest producer of crude

steel during the current year (2018) so far, from its 3rd largest status in 2017. The

country is also the largest producer of sponge iron or DRI in the world and the 3rd

largest finished steel consumer in the world after China & USA.

In a de-regulated, liberalized economic/market scenario like India the Government’s role

is that of a facilitator which lays down the policy guidelines and establishes the




institutional mechanism/structure for creating conducive environment for improving

efficiency and performance of the steel sector.

In this role, the Government has released the National Steel Policy 2017, which has laid

down the broad roadmap for encouraging long term growth for the Indian steel industry,

both on demand and supply sides, by 2030-31.

The said Policy is an updated version of National Steel Policy 2005 which was released

earlier and provided a long-term growth perspective for the domestic iron and steel

industry by 2019-20.

The Government has also announced a policy for providing preference to domestically

manufactured Iron & Steel products in Government procurement. This policy seeks to

accomplish PM’s vision of ‘Make in India’ with objective of nation building and encourage

domestic manufacturing.

Steel industry was de-licensed and de-controlled in 1991 & 1992 respectively.

India is currently the 2nd largest producer of crude steel in the world.

In 2017-18, production of total finished steel (alloy + non alloy) was 126.85 mt, a

growth of 5.6% over last year.

Production of Pig Iron in 2017-18 was 5.73 mt, a decline of 45% over last year.

India was the largest producer of sponge iron in the world. The coal based route

accounted for 79% of total sponge iron production (30.51 mt) in the country in 2017-18.

[Source: Ministry of Steel]

Gen. ToR 12 Any litigation pending against the project and/or any

direction/order passed by any court of law against the project. If so

details thereof. Has the unit received any notice under the section 5 of

Environment (protection) Act, 1986or relevant sections of Air & Water

Act?

1.4 LITIGATION/COURT CASE AGAINST THE COMPANY

No, litigation or court cases are pending against the project nor any direction/order has

been passed by any court of law against the project. The unit has not received any

notice from the regulatory authority under EP Act 1986 or Air & Water Act.

1.5 SCOPE OF THE PRESENT STUDY DETAILS OF REGULATORY SCOPING

CARRIED OUT (AS PER TERMS OF REFERENCE)

The scope of study covers the core zone and the buffer zone covering 10 km radius area

from the boundary of the core zone (plant area). Following are the details of regulatory

scoping carried out:

Literatures have been reviewed and secondary data relevant to the study area

have been collected.




Environmental monitoring has been conducted to generate baseline data with

respect to soil, air, water & noise as per the terms of reference so as to evaluate

the existing environmental status in the study area.

Incremental levels of pollutants in the study area due to the proposed project

activities have been predicted with the help of software.

Evaluation of the predicted impacts on the various environmental attributes in the

study area has been done using scientifically developed and widely accepted

environmental impacts methodologies.

Environmental Management Plan (EMP) outlining the measures for improving and

restoring the environmental quality of the area for sustainable development have

been worked out.

Regular Environment monitoring program & remedial measure for a clean

environment has been planned.

Details of Occupational & safety Hazards and their mitigation measures have been

made.

1.6 AUTHORIZATION

M/s. Bengal Energy Limited has entrusted M/s Global Tech Enviro Experts Pvt. Ltd.,

Bhubaneswar for the preparation of EIA report for their expansion project.

ToR 2(i) Details of the EIA Consultant including NABET accreditation.

M/S Global Tech Enviro Experts Pvt. Ltd., Bhubaneswar is QCI- NABET accredited “A”

grade consultant Ref: SL No 77.QCI/NABET Notification Dt. March 2019

In accordance to the scope of work, M/s. GTEEPL team visited the project site along with

accredited laboratory team at-Dauka, P.S.-Tentulmuri, in the district of Paschim

Medinipur, W B. During their visit, the team collected samples like Air, Water, Soil &

Noise from the project site for analysis and generation of Base line data and studied

availability of infrastructure facilities like raw materials, water, power and transportation

facilities. The team also made socio-economic study of 10km buffer zone of the project

site to know existing socio-economic status of the locality and studied flora & fauna of

the locality. The representative of M/s.BEL accompanied GTEEPL team during site visit

and Base line study.

1.7 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT:

M/s GLOBAL TECH ENVIRO EXPERTS PVT LTD, Bhubaneswar expresses its deep

gratitude to M/s. Bengal Energy Limited for entrusting the assignment of preparing and

providing all documents required for submission of EIA report and for the active interest

and cooperation extended by the concerned officials of M/s Bengal Energy Limited.

CONCLUSION:

The Company was accorded prior Environmental Clearance to set up 0.5 MTPA

Integrated Steel Plant with coke oven and power plant in January 2009 but then steel

market remained sluggish and the company could not venture to set up steel plant and

could set up a part of coke oven & power plant.




Now the market has recovered in 2017-18 India’s steel production has reached b126.58

MTPA, and target has been set by the “Ministry of Steel” to achieve the 300 MTPA steel

production by 2030. Hence the company has come up with a fresh proposal for 1.0 MTPA

Integrated Steel Plant in line with the target. The company has acquired sufficient land

to set up the industry but the process route and project configurations are to be decided;

requirement of power, raw material & water to achieve 1.0 MTPA steel to be estimated

and their source and availability to be explored. Cost of the project and completion time

is required to be estimated. Similarly solid waste and waste water generated are to be

estimated. All these aspects need to be addressed in next chapter.




CHAPTER-2

PROJECT DESCRIPTION

2.0 CONDENSED DESCRIPTION OF THOSE ASPECTS OF THE PROJECT LIKELY

TO CAUSE ENVIRONMENTAL EFFECTS.

M/s Bengal Energy Limited, at: Dakua, Tentulmuri is presently running with 0.6 MTPA

Non-Recovery Coke Oven and 40 MW Power Plant. After proposed expansion M/s BEL will

manufacture 1.05 MTPA steel Billet using facilities of 4x500TPD & 4x350 TPD DRI kilns,

3X20T IF, 2X80T EAF, 2X320 m3 MBF,120 TPD ASU( to produce oxygen & Nitrogen

required for the project), 1.2 MTPA Non recovery Coke oven plant and generate 205 MW

Power from Waste Heat recovery and AFBC.

2.1 TYPE OF PROJECT

The proposed project is 1.0 MTPA Integrated steel expansion project. It is a Primary

metallurgical processing industry to manufacture steel billet for sale through DRI-MBF-

IF/EAF route with facilities of making coke and produce Oxygen & Nitrogen. This being

an integrated steel project comes under Red category polluting industry, but pollutions

will be under control with proper Environmental Management Plan.

2.2 NEED OF THE PROJECT

Steel is a core industry and its demand is strongly linked to the overall economic activity

of the Nation. Given the inherent long-term potential of the Indian economy and its

cyclical nature, the long-term prospects of the steel industry are fairly comfortable. The

demand and production has been growing at a healthy rate for the last few years and

the forecast for the next decade and half is also very promising.

Steel plays a vital role in the development of any modern economy. “Per capita

consumption of steel” is generally accepted as a yardstick of socio-economic

development and living standards of people. No wonder, crude steel production in the

world, since the beginning of last century, has been increasing steadily touching >1.5

Billion Metric Tonne mark in 2014.India produced 88.97 million tons(mt) , 89.79 mt and

96 mt of crude steel during 2014, 2015 and 2016 respectively, where as The Minister of

Steel & Mines has reiterated commitment of Central Government to support the steel

industry to reach a production target of 300 Million Tonne Per Annum (MTPA) in 2025.

As such, no developing country can afford to ignore steel owing to its strategic

importance in development.

The scope for raising the total consumption for steel is huge, Per capita consumption of

steel in India at current levels is about 65 kg. As a comparison per capita steel

consumption in China is 430 kg and the world steel consumption per capita average is

180 kg.

The proposed integrated steel project aims at manufacturing Mild steel& Alloy steel

billets, Coke and Oxygen for sale and internal use. All these products have high market

demand. Steels of different grade has high demand in construction work, equipment

manufacture as well as domestic appliance manufacture and steel as a whole has




forward and backward linkages in terms of material flow, income and employment

generation.

The facts clearly indicate the importance of this project to manufacture steel.

Gen Tor-4(i) Location of the Project Site Covering village,

Taluka/Tehsil, District and State and Justification for Selecting the

Site, whether Other Sites Were considered.

2.3 LOCATION OF THE PROJECT(maps showing general location, specific

location, project boundary & project site layout)

Location of a manufacturing plant is influenced by important factors like proximity to raw

material resources, infrastructure facilities like road, railway network, power supply etc

and availability of water & other utilities. Considering the above factors and after

inspecting several sites, the company has selected the site at Dauka near Kharagpur in

Paschim Medinpur district of West Bengal.

The location for the proposed expansion project is selected inside existing land At-

Dauka, P.O. Tentulmuri, P.S. Narayangarh Dist. Paschim Medinipur in West Bengal in the

state of West Bengal where existing plant is running. The location is well connected with

road & rail. The NH-60 connecting to Balasore – Rupnarayanpur (Kharagpur) is only 01

Km away from the proposed site & the Balasore-Kharagpur railway line is passing only at

01 Km away from the proposed site. As river Kansabati is flowing 18Km away from the

location, water will be drawn from the river to meet the plant water requirement.

The site is also well connected with the raw material source like coal and iron ore. The

coal will be fetched from Talcher/Ib valley coal fields within 250Km and the iron ore will

be sourced from Joda/Barbil area of orissa, around 200 Km from the proposed

site.Nearest seaport Haladia, Dhamra & Paradeep located nearer to the proposed site.

Location of the proposed integrated steel plant satisfies the requirement of site selection

criteria. The site is not surrounded by heavily populated locations. There There are no

national park, biosphere reserve, historical/archeological sites/monuments and

sea/estuaries etc. within the 10 km radius of the site.

Therefore, the present site fulfils all the basic requirements of the proposed industry and

the statutory requirement of the MoEFCC and hence no alternative site has been

considered. .

2.3.1 GENERAL LOCATION

The project site of M/s Bengal Energy Limited extends from 220 15’ 22.96’’ N to 220 15’

27.68’’ N and 870 22’ 53.37’’ E to 870 23’ 34.69’’ E, AMSL 32m.




2.3.2 SPECIFIC LOCATION

TOPOSHEET OF STUDY AREA

Gen. ToR 4(ii) A toposheet of the study area of radius of 10km and the

site location on 1:50,000/1:25,000scales on an A3/A2 sheet

(including all eco-sensitive areas and environmentally sensitive

places)

Toposheet of 10km radius buffer zone of project site has been given below.

The Topo sheet shows the connectivity and indicates that the project boundary or the

battery limit does not belong to part of any National Park, wild life sanctuary or Natural/

Biosphere reserve.

Buffer zone also does not contain any features of archaeological/ historical and

cultural/aesthetic importance

From the Toposheet it is seen that

1) There is no major river in the buffer zone of the project site.River Kanska is

outside 10km radius buffer zone

2) Slope is towards Kanska river, i.e. towards north.

3)Kharagpur city is thickly populated and on eastern side of project site.




Table 2.1 Environment Sensitivity around 10 km radius

Sl.No. Areas Name/

Identity

Aerial distance

(within 10 km.)

Proposed project

location boundary

1 Areas protected under

international conventions,

national or local legislation for

their ecological, landscape,

cultural or other related value

Nil NA

2 Areas which are important or

sensitive for ecological reasons -

Wetlands, watercourses or other

water bodies, coastal zone,

biospheres, wild life sanctuary,

mountains, forests

No such sensitive

areas exist.

NA

3 Areas used by protected,

important or sensitive species

of flora or fauna for breeding,

nesting, foraging, resting, over

wintering, migration

Nil NA

4 Inland, coastal, marine or

underground waters

Nil NA

5 State, National boundaries Nil Not within 10km

radius of project

boundary

6 Routes or facilities used by the

public for access to recreation or

other tourist, pilgrim areas

Nil No such route

present within 10

km. radius

7 Defence installations Nil Not existing

8 Densely populated or built-up

area

Nil Kharagpur town is

beyond 10km

radius

9 Areas occupied by sensitive man-

made land uses (hospitals,

schools, places of worship,

community facilities)

Small places of

worship

Scattered

10 Areas containing important, high

quality or scarce resources

(ground water resources, surface

resources, forestry, agriculture,

fisheries, tourism, minerals)

No such NA

11 Areas already subjected to

pollution or environmental

damage. (those where existing

legal environmental standards

are exceeded)

Nil NA




12 Areas susceptible to natural

hazard which could cause the

project to present environmental

problems (earthquakes,

subsidence, landslides, erosion,

flooding or extreme or adverse

climatic conditions)

No Zone III of Earth

quake zones

Gen. ToR 4(iv) Google map-Earth downloaded of the project site

Gen. ToR 4(iii) Co-ordinates (lat-Long) of all four corners of the site

2.3.3 PROJECT BOUNDARY & PROJECT SITE LAYOUT

Google -Earth map of M/s Bengal Energy Limited project site, down loaded and has BEEN

shown below been. Co-ordinates of all the four corners of project site have been shown

on satellite picture of the project site.

2.4 SIZE OR MAGNITUDE OF OPERATION (INCLUDING ASSOCIATED ACTIVITIES

REQUIRED BY OR FOR THE PROJECT)

Project configuration & product mix

Gen. ToR 3(ii) Product with capacities for proposed project.

Gen. ToR 3(iii) If expansion project, details of existing products with

capacities and whether adequate land is available for expansion,

reference of earlier EC if any.

This is an expansion project on the same land on which existing plant is running.Prior EC

taken vide F.N0. J-11011/28/2008-IA II(I),2nd January,2008. The existing plant is having

0.6MTPA non-recovery coke oven plant and 40 MW power plant based on waste heat

recovery from coke oven gas.

The expansion project will have one more 0.6 MTPA non-recovery dry quenching Coke

oven plant, 4x500TPD and 4x350 TPD DRI kilns, 2x320m3 MBF, 1x60m2 Sinter plant,

2x80T EAF, 2x20T IF with LF, 120 TPD Air Separation Unit to produce Oxygen and

Nitrogen & 165 MW power generation from Waste Heat recovery & AFBC. So that 1.0

MTPA steel billet Plant, 205 MW power Plant and 1.2 MTPA coke oven plant will be there

after expansion.

Existing project configuration, production capacity, Expansion project configuration,

production capacity and final production capacity of project has been given in the table

2.2 below.

The project has 161.87 ha of land and even after expansion there will be 30.77 ha of

vacant space which can accommodate further expansion. Hence land is adequate for

expansion.




Table 2.2 Project Configuration Before And After Expansion

Facility Existing

Configuration Existing capacity in TPA



Final capacity

Product End use

Non.Recovery C O Plant


CPP(WHRB COB) 1x40 MW 40 MW 1x40 MW 40 MW 80 MW Elec. Power Internal use/Sale


6,40,000 4,48,000


4x350 TPD

CPP (WHRB DRI) - Nil 68 MW 68 MW Elec. Power Internal use/Sale


Sinter Plant 2T/m2.hr, 340days

- Nil 1x60m2 10,00,000 10,00,000 Sinter MBF



LF - Nil 1x25T HoldingLiq. steel CCM


IF15H/day, 325 days - Nil 3x20T 2,92,500 2,92,500 Liq. Steel CCM





Oxygen Nitrogen

Use in MBF & EAF

2.5 TECHNOLOGY AND PROCESS DESCRIPTION:

Gen. ToR 3(ix) & Additonal ToR 15 Process description along with

major equipments and machineries, Process flow sheet(Quantitative)

from Raw material to products to be provided.

2.5.1 TECHNOLOGY

The process route selected by M/s BEL for 1.0MTPA steel making is through DRI-MBF-IF

and EAF-LF-CCM route. The technology is well proven. In order to utilize iron ore fines

and waste materials sinter will be produced & used in Blast furnace. The unit wise

process description has been discussed below.

12




2.5.2 PROCESS DESCRIPTION

Additional ToR 16 Details on design and manufacturing process for all the units

1.Coke Oven

Coking coal is crushed & screened and charged in oven of batteries. The shape of

Coal/coke bed is parallelepiped & located in the upper part of the oven. The oven

operates under negative pressure.

Chargrd coal is heated in oven and volatile matter is released from coal and burns inside

on top of the coal bed utilizing air entrained through the various ports/openings

(channels) located in both side doors and the oven roof called primary air.

This burning of VM provides the heat required for the coke making process. Partially

combusted gases exit the top chamber through "down comer" passages in the oven wall

and enter the sole flue. Combusted gases collect in a common tunnel and exit via a stack

which creates a natural draft in the oven for circulation. Secondary air is introduced into

the sole flues which completes combustion.

Due to the temperatures generated, all of the potentially polluting hydrocarbons and

byproducts are completely burnt within the oven and avoid pollution.

The coking front advances from the bottom and from the top, joining somewhere in the

middle. The design of the flues and the control of the air flow allow the coking rate at the

top and bottom of the coal bed to be equalized.

Heat generated due to combustion is only partially utilized in making Coke and balance

heat goes with waste fluegas and recovered in WHRB generating steam at pressure

which drive turbogenerator and generates power.

The cool waste gas is cleaned in a flue gas desulfurization plant prior to being discharged

to the atmosphere Desulphurization is carried out by aspersion of lime slurry on the

gas. At least 80% of the SO2 generated during coking is eliminated. This equipment

generates solid calcium sulfate and sulfide as a waste




COKE OVEN FLUE GAS FLOW PATH

Coke oven gas of 93,000 to 1, 15,000Nm3/hr. at temperature of 9000C to 12000C comes

out of each battery. The gas composition will be about

CO2 7.1 %

H2O 13.0 %

N2 71.2 %

SPM 76.0 mg/m3




SO2 224 ppm

CO gas can be cooled down to 160-1700C after heat recovery in boilers. After recovery

of waste heat Coke Oven gas can be vented to atmosphere through ID fan & high stack.

Stamp charging of coal in the ovens will be adopted. Stamp charging technology

facilitates to produce high strength & high quality BF coke. Stamp charging reduces

emission during charging and minimizes door leakages.

Non-Recovery type Coke Oven has following advantages

Various types of coal can be blended for production of coke without affecting the

quality of coke.

Cost of production is less due to usage of low rank coal.

Emission can be minimized as ovens are operated in negative pressure and

operated in close loop system.

Utilization of waste heat for generating steam and power.

Lower Capital investment.

Major Equipements of Coke Oven after expansion has been given in Table 2.3

Table 2.3 Configuration Coke Oven Plant

Sl. No Component Existing for 0.6

MTPA

Proposed for

expansion0.6 MTPA

Total

1 No. of Battery 04 04 08

2 No.of Ovens 160 160 320

3 Coal stamping box 02 02 04

4 Charging car 02 02 04

5 Pushing car 02 02 04

6 Hot coke car 02 02 04

7 Quenched Coke

Pusher

02 02 04

8 Flue dampers for

stacks

04 04 08

Quality of LAM Coke From 1.2 MTPA Cove Oven Plant

Ash 2.5 % Max

Sulphur 0.6 % Max

Phosphorus: 0.03 % Max

CSR 63-66%

CRI 23-25%

M 10 8 Max

M 40 82 Min




Steam Turbo Generator

Multistage, Nozzle governed, Horizontal spindle, two bearings, Impulse type bleed cum

condensing steam Turbine suitable to receive steam flow of 140-160 TPH at 64 kg/cm²

pressure, 480°C temperature and 35 to 40 MW power can be generated from 0.6 MTPA

Coke Oven Plant.

Additional ToR 10 System of coke quenching adopted with justification

Coke Dry quenching

Dry Coke Quenching is an energy efficient and environmental friendly technology. In this

process, Red-hot coke at about 1,100°C is charged into the coke cooling tower, and inert

gas normally Nitrogen is blown into the tower from the bottom. Heat exchange takes

place with the circulating inert gas. After the gas is heated to a high temperature like

800°C, it is introduced to waste heat recovery boiler to convert water in the boiler tubes

into steam. The temperature of the coke at the cooling tower outlet is reduced to approximately 200°C.

DRY QUENCHING FLOW SHEET

Inert Gas moves upward and Coke moves downward by gravity and in the process, they

exchange heat. Coke is discharged at the bottom. The passage time of the coke through

the chamber / cooling chamber is around 5 to 6 hours and the rate of inert gas required

for cooling is around 82,000 Nm3/hr.




The hot Inert gas coming out from cooling chamber contains heavy coal dust &

suspended particles. Coal dust may deposit on water tubes of WHRB and reduce its heat

transfer efficiency hence inert gas is passed through Primary & Secondary dust collectors

Justification of dry quenching

Due to advantages as stated below, dry quenching is justified.

Advantage of Dry quenching

The moisture content of coke produced by dry cooling as around 0.2 % as

compared to that of around 5 % in wet quenched coke. It helps in reducing the

coke rate in blast furnace. Moisture in coke needs additional heat in the blast

furnace for evaporation.

Use of dry cooled coke reduces the coke rate in the blast furnace by around 2 % -

2.5% as per blast furnace units.

Since the hot coke is cooled gradually by the inert gas, it is free from surface pore

and internal cracks normally present in the wet quenched coke

Water consumption is reduced significantly & waste water handling is ruled out.

The waste heat is recovered in general can produce steam @500-700kg/T of

coke, hence 140-185 kwn/T of coke can be generated. So from proposed

0.6MTPA coke oven it is expected that about 8MW power can be generated.

2.DRI Kiln

Sponge Iron is the metallic form of iron produced from reduction of iron oxide below the

fusion temperature. It is obtained when iron oxide (generally lumpy iron ore –

“Hematite”) is reduced to metallic form in solid state itself. Since there is no melting,

external shape is retained. Color changes from red to black. Due to removal of oxides

there is 30% reduction in weight. The true density changes from about 4.4 to 7.8

gm/cm3. Thus, there is about 54% reduction in true volume and this is manifested in the

formation of pores throughout the interior of sponge iron pieces. Under the microscope,

a sponge like structure is seen and hence it is named sponge iron, but it is not at all soft

like sponge as the name suggests.

Two processes of direct reduction of Iron ore is prevailing all over the world. 1) Gas

based & 2) solid or Coal based.

M/s BEL is proposing 4 rotary DRI kilns of capacity of 500 TPD and 4 nos. 350 TPD

capacity based direct reduction of hematite ore by SL / RN process technology.

Coal based processes

Customized or Indigenous Process:

In India, the coal based DRI production process employs a rotary kiln as the main

reactor wherein the process of reduction of the iron oxide is carried out with coal as

reductant. Refractory lining of about 150-200 mm thickness is given inside the kiln to

protect the shell. The kiln has a general slope of 2.5 - 3% down towards the discharge

end. There is air blowers mounted on the kiln shell having dampers to provide required

air for combustion at different heating zones.




Sized iron ore and coal in required proportion are fed in to the kiln with the help of the

weigh feeders at the feed end. Due to the rotational motion of the kiln and due to the

slope provided, the charge moves forward to the discharge end. Thermocouples are

mounted on the kiln to measure and control the temperature of the different heating

zones. Fine coal is also injected through the discharge end of the kiln with the help of the

coal injector machines & lobe compressor, to meet the additional carbon and volatile

matter requirement of the reaction. Kiln discharge material which is a mixture of sponge

iron and char (mixture of unreduced iron, uncalcinated limestone, gangue and semi

burnt coal) is taken to a rotary cooler. Water is sprayed on the cooler shell to indirectly

cool the kiln discharge mix to about 120°C. The cooler also has a slope of about 2.5%.

The cooler discharge falls onto a hopper and taken through conveyors for screening of

fines and coarse materials. After separating the -3 mm and +3 mm sizes in the product

screen, the cooler discharge mix is subjected to magnetic separation where sponge iron

is separated from char. Sponge iron and char of coarse and fine sizes are stored in

separate silos or hoppers.

The reducing gases generated from the combustion of the coal, flow counter current to

the direction followed by the solids and emerge from the feed end. The kiln is maintained

at a positive pressure of about +5 mm water column. The flue gases then pass through

the gravitational Dust Settling Chamber (DSC) and pass on to the After Burning

Chamber (ABC) located right above the DSC. In the ABC, the residual CO is converted

to non- toxic CO2. Therefore, in ABC the off-gas laden with combustible matter is burnt.

On the top of the ABC, there is an emergency cap to maintain the kiln pressure by

letting out the accumulated gases.

The latest trend in DRI plant is to use Electrostatic Precipitator for dust trapping. In this

system, the flue gas, at about 900 °C - 950°C, is taken to a Gas Conditioning Tower

(GCT) where quenching water is added to cool the gas to about 150°C. The cooled gas

then travels to the Electrostatic Precipitator (ESP). Dust is trapped in the ESP and the

flue gas is let out using chimney.

DRI plants install Waste Heat Recovery Boilers (WHRB) after the ABC, to utilize the

waste heat content of the flue gas. The WHRB generates steam at high pressure and use

it to run turbines and produce electricity.

Reaction mechanism of coal based DRI kiln:

There are two major temperature zones in the kiln. The first pre-heat zone is where the

charge is heated to 900 — 1000°C. The second metallization zone is held fairly constant

at 1000-1050°C.

The charge into the kiln consists of a mixture of iron oxide lump, fluxes such as

limestone and/or dolomite (amount depending of sulfur content of the coal) and medium

volatile non-coking coal. In the pre-heating zone, the moisture is driven off first, and

then the hydrocarbons and hydrogen evolve by thermal decomposition of the coal.

As the combustible gases rise from the bed of solid material, a portion of the gases is

burnt in the free board above the bed by controlled quantities of air introduced through

the air tubes. As the kiln rotates, the primary mode of heat transfer is by radiation to the

tumbling charge and subsequently by internal solids mixing and renewal of the exposed

bed surface.

In the pre-heat zone, the reduction of iron oxide proceeds only to ferrous oxide (FeO)

(Equation 1).




Fe203 + CO = 2 FeO + CO2............................ (I)

Final reduction to metallic iron occurs in the metallization zone by reaction of CO with

FeO to form CO2 and metallic iron (Equation II).

FeO + CO = Fe + CO2 ........................... (II)

Most of the CO2 reacts with the excess solid fuel in the kiln and is converted to CO

according to the Boudouard reaction (Equation III).

CO2+C= 2CO............................ (III)

Coals with higher reactivity are preferred as they provide rapid conversion of CO2 to CO,

thereby maintaining reducing conditions in the kiln metallization zone. The highly

endothermic reaction of coal with CO2 prevents the bed from overheating and attaining

high temperature that could lead to melting or sticking of the charge.

High coal reactivity decreases the reduction zone bed temperature but increases the

relative capacity. Desired bed and gas temperature in the freeboard can be achieved

with high reactivity fuels even with very high throughput rates.

DRI kiln flow sheet of M/s BEL.

3. Mini Blast Furnace:

Blast furnace is a vertical shaft furnace that produces liquid metal from lump iron ore /

and sinter by the reducing action of carbon(coke) at a high temperature in the presence

of a fluxing agent limestone. Blast furnaces consist of several zones: a crucible-shaped

hearth at the bottom of the furnace; an intermediate zone called a bosh between the

hearth and the stack a vertical shaft (the stack) that extends from the bosh to the top of

the furnace; and the furnace top, which contains a mechanism for charging the furnace.

The furnace charge, or burden, of iron-bearing materials (e.g., iron-ore pellets and

sinter), coke, and flux (e.g., limestone) descends through the shaft, where it is

preheated and reacts with ascending reducing gases to produce liquid iron and slag that

accumulate in the hearth. Air that has been preheated to temperatures from 900° to

1250° C together with injected fuel such as pulverized coal is blown into the furnace

http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/222589/furnace

http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/94732/carbon-C

http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/124831/coke

http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/341344/limestone

http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/258544/hearth

http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/74661/bosh

http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/548015/slag




through multiple tuyeres (nozzles) located around the circumference of the furnace near

the top of the hearth; these nozzles may number from 12 to as many as 40 on large

furnaces. The preheated air is, in turn, supplied from a bustle pipe, a large-diameter pipe

encircling the furnace. The preheated air reacts vigorously with the preheated coke,

resulting in both the formation of the reducing gas (carbon monoxide) that rises through

the furnace, and a very high temperature of about 1,650° C that produces the liquid iron

and slag.

The bosh is the hottest part of the furnace because of its close proximity to the reaction

between air and coke. Molten iron accumulates in the hearth, which has a tap hole to

draw off the molten iron and, higher up, a slag hole to remove the mixture of impurities

and flux. The hearth and bosh are thick-walled structures lined with carbon-

type refractory blocks, while the stack is lined with high-quality fireclay brick to protect

the furnace shell. To keep these refractory materials from burning out, plates, staves, or

sprays for circulating cool water are built into them.

The stack is kept full with alternating layers of coke, ore, and limestone admitted at the

top during continuous operation. Coke is ignited at the bottom and burned rapidly with

the forced air from the tuyeres. The iron oxides in the ore are chemically reduced to

molten iron by carbon and carbon monoxide from the coke. The slag formed consists of

the limestone flux, ash from the coke, and substances formed by the reaction of

impurities in the ore with the flux; it floats in a molten state on the top of the molten

iron. Hot gases rise from the combustion zone, heating fresh material in the stack and

then passing out through ducts near the top of the furnace.

Technology: High temperature melting of Iron ore/Sinter using coal, coke and Oxygen.

Design parameter:

BF Volume: 2 x 320 cum

Productivity: 2.70 t/cum/day/Furnace

Charging system PLC controlled batching, weighing and

Charging by belt Conveyors

No. of working days: 345 days

Tapping 10 taps/day (avg.)

In order to reduce the coke rate and to ensure furnace productivity it is proposed to

install three checker filled type stoves. The stoves will be fired by clean blast furnace

gas. The stoves are designed to provide hot blast at a temperature of 1150 deg C.

PCI system

The Pulverized coal dust injection system will be adopted to reduce costly coke

consumption.

Raw coal will be ground to produce coal of 80% below 75 microns. Inert atmosphere will

be maintained in the ball mill for safety. The ball mill will be connected to bag filter. The

powder coal will be stored in the fine coal silo and injected through tuyeres.

Gas cleaning plant

http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/610791/tuyere

http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/74661/bosh

http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/258544/hearth

http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/495715/refractory

http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/562296/stack

http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/95021/carbon-monoxide

http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/548015/slag




A gas cleaning plant to clean the raw BF gas from dust catcher with the following main

technological parameters is envisaged. A gravity type dust catcher (inner diameter 8.5

m) will be installed forcollection of larger size dust from raw blast furnace gas. A spiral

conveyor will be installed below the dust catcher to collect dust and the dust will be sent

to sinter plant through trucks. The fine dust laden gas will subsequently be passed

through double venture scrubbers for further arrest of dust. The advantage of this kind

of scrubber is that is greatly reduces investment cost and its maintenance is easy. In

ventury scrubber with variable throat water will be spread at a control rate to obtain

desired cleanliness of gas. The gas than will pass through a cyclone for removal of

moisture and finally the gas passes through an automatic leaf type gate valve filter and

clean gas at a pressure of 0.08-1.0 kg/ cm2 will be delivered for stove heating and power

plant. The water from gas cleaning plant shall be classified in rake classifiers and BF

Sludge in the form of cake will be transported for use in sinter plant as it contains more

than 40% Fe2O3 and about 37% carbon.A flare stack will be provided to burn

excess/unused BF gas. Water seal pot will be used to prevent back firing.

BF gas has the following characteristics

Very low calorific value (CV) in the range of 700 to 850 Kcal/Cu m. CV is very

much dependent on the coke rate.

It has a high density. It is around 1.250 Kg/Cu m at the standard temperature

and pressure (STP) which is 0 deg C and 1 atm. Pressure. This density is highest

amongst all the gaseous fuel. Since the density is higher than the density of air it

settles in the bottom in case of a leakage.

It has low theoretical flame temperature which is around 1,4550 C.

It has low rate of flame propagation. It is lower than any other common gaseous

fuel.

BF gas burns with a non- luminous flame.

Auto ignition point of BF gas is around 6300 C.

BF gas has lower explosive limit (LEL) of 27% and upper explosive limit (UEL) of

75% in an air gas mixture at normal temperature and pressure.

The high pressure of BF top gas is utilized to operate a generator (Top gas

pressure Recovery Turbine – i.e. TRT in short). TRT can generate electrical

energy (Power) up to 35 kWh/ ton of hot metal, i.e. about 2.5 MW without

burning any fuel..

Slag granulation system

Liquid slag coming out of blast furnace will be granulated by high pressure water Jet

(below box). The slag will flow in the slag runner in the cast house in the end of which a

granulator will be installed. The solidified slag granules and water mix will flow into a

settling tank, where the solids will settle down at the bottom. Hot clear water will flow

into a clean water tank for recycling. The granulated slag will be lifted by a grab crane

and taken to the storage area by trucks.

Pig casting machine and ladle repair shop

Two pig casting machines will be provided to cast hot metal into pigs as required. The

pig casting machine will be of strand type. The weight of each pig can be below 10kg for




ease of handling. From the machine, the pigs will be collected directly in a pig handling

truck, placed below the pig casting machine. The loaded pig handling truck will be taken

out to storage/despatch area after weighment in the weigh bridge.

Pig casting machine will be provided with to cast the liquid hot metal into pigs. There will

be a ladle repair shop adjacent to PCM for handling the ladle brought in for relining.

Technological parameters of MBF

No of blast furnace 2

Useful volume, m3 320

Productivity, t/d m3 2.66

I % iron in HM 92

Coke rate (dry), kg / THM 470

PC injection, kg /THM 80

Slag rate, kg / THM ( Tons of Hot Metal) 300

Top pressure, kg/cm2 (g) operating 0.8

About 2.5 MW power can be generated from BF Top gas by setting up pressure Recovery

Turbine.

4. Induction Furnace

BF-Basic OxygenFurnace route is selected for integrated steel Plants having annual

production capacity>1.0 MTPA. DRI-EAF-IF route of steel making is adopted for mini

steel plants of capacity 0.5 to 1.0 MTPA.

India is the first country using Induction Melting Furnaces for making mild steel. As a

matter of fact, EAFs are not making mild steel of structural quality for over a decade

now. The bulk of structural quality mild steel for long products is manufactured by

Induction Melting Furnaces. The EAF units have also installed Induction Melting

Furnaces. There are several reasons for the popularity of Induction Melting Furnaces for

making steel. They consume less power comparing EAFs. Expenditure on electrode is nil.

They use lesser quantity of refractory. Initial investment is less on plant and equipment.

Thus, there are economic advantages in making steel through Induction Furnaces route.

M/s BEL proposes medium frequency coreless Induction Furnace. A coreless furnace has

no inductor or core, unlike the channel furnace. Instead, the entire bath functions as the

induction heating area. Copper coils encircle a layer of refractory material surrounding

the entire length of the furnace interior. Running a powerfulelectric current through the

coils creates a magnetic field that penetrates the refractory and quickly melts the metal

charge material inside the furnace. The copper coil is kept from melting by cooling

waterflowing through it.

The furnace coil, which produces the electromagnetic field is not designed to get hot.

Although some heat is conductedfrom the molten bath through the lining to the coil,

most ofthe heat load on the coil is caused by current flowing throughit. This requires that

it becontinually cooled, not only to increase its electrical efficiency but to prevent it from

melting.

Typically, the cooling system is built into the coil itself whichis made of hollow copper

tubing in which the cooling waterflows. The water picks up the heat caused by the

http://www.aiifa.org/articles/display/slug:modern-concepts-of-steel-making-through-induction-furnaces




current aswell as heat conducted from the metal through the refractoryand carries it to a

heat exchanger for removal.

M/s Bengal Energy Limited proposes to install 3x20T, 10H IFs. The charge will be

approx:32% hot metal, 62% DRI, 6%scrap and pig iron.

Furnace transformer rating= 7MVA

5. Electric Arc Furnace

Steel making in India utilizes oxygen as well as electric energy. About 56% of total steel

is made using electric route. Out of this 56%, 22% steel is made on Electric Arc

Furnaces (EAF) and rest on Induction Furnace (IF). Lately, there has been varying

inclination towards adapting EAF technology for steel making in India. This is mainly

because of factors such as investment cost, operational cost, raw material availability,

government policies etc.In Electric Arc Furnace steel making method, scrap or DRI or

some amount of hot metal are added to the furnace. Arcing is done to melt the solid raw

material. Oxygen is blown to reduce the carbon.

EAF works with the principle of generating electric arc on the raw material and melting it

with heat. Normally connected to a transformer of 3 phase electrical source, graphite

electrodes are used for transferring the electrical energy to the raw material kept in the

vessel and creating the arc. It is a batch process and when molten metal is tapped to the

ladle it is called as ‘heat’, hence to specify the electric arc furnace mainly two points are

required: Heat Size & Transformer Capacity.

The EAF are of heat size varies from 5T to 300T. This can process any raw material like

scrap, DRI or hot metal. EAFs were developed with the idea of melting scrap. In the

beginning, these were used mainly for foundries and for small alloy making units. But

knowing the advantages of productivity, energy utilization, metallurgical working etc,

EAF became popular in integrated steel plants also with all heat sizes.

Advantages of EAF are many. It is the equipment which can be tailor designed,

specifically suiting the requirement of the process. In different countries based on the

raw material availability, technology suppliers adjust the design of EAF. In western

countries, where scrap availability is high, EAF operates for scrap melting and in Middle

East, where gas based DRI is available; EAFs are designed for flat bath operation.

In case of operation of an EAF, the cost of electricity is the major component. In case of

IF the requirement of electricity is similar like EAF. However, in EAF, part of the electrical

energy can be substituted by chemical energy (exothermic reaction of carbon with

oxygen) leading to lower costs.

Steel quality depends upon possibility and efficiency of the particular melting unit to

remove undesired elements like C, S, P etc. On this frontEAF score over IF.

In case of EAF when raw material is DRI, dephosphorization can be done in EAF and

desulphurization can be done during ladle refining. Such metallurgical work is not

possible in IF.

After melting the raw material, if the liquid melt contains P higher than the specified

limits, P is converted to oxides with oxygen blowing and remains in slag of EAF. De-




phosphorization occurs near steel melting point, by maintaining an oxidizing atmosphere

i.e. Oxygen blowing which increases the content of oxygen in the metal bath.

M/s BEL proposing 2x80T, 16 H EAF for making alloy steel of low S &P.Hot metal will be

transferred from blast furnace to steel melt shop at one end of the furnace aisle. Hot

metal will be charged into the EAF, utilizing the shop crane, through side launder.

Production MS & CS billets

2x80T EAF and 3x20T IF will consume about 68% solid charge and 32% hotmetal from

MBFs and produce liquid steel. This will be treated in ladle Furnace for secondary

metallurgical treatment before casting in to billets.The grades of steel of production of

saleable billets has been proposed as follows:

CS IS:1875/71

CS IS:2830/75

CS IS: 2831/75

MS IS: 432/66

MS IS: 2062/69

6. LADLE FURNACE (LF)

LF will be equipped with arc heating, inert gas stirring, wire feeding and alloy addition

facilities. This unit will also be utilized to hold the heat for an extended period of

timeshould it be necessary for reasons, such as sequencing of heats in CCM. Provision

for bottom purging with Ar/N2 will be provided.

The refining cycle time in the LF will normally be around 30 to 40 minutes, depending on

the extent of treatment and holding required. All heats from EAF can thus be

conveniently handled by LF.

Number of units: One (1)

Nominal capacity: 80 tons

Transformer rating: 15MVA

Type of unit: Lift / lower roof type

The furnace cover (roof) will be of the lifting and lowering type. The ladle will be brought

to the treatment position on a transfer car. The LF cover will be water-cooled. LF unit will

be equipped with ferro-alloy storage bunkers and addition facilities, wire feeder, hand

held temperature measurement and sampling device and inert gas rinsing facility from

ladle bottom.

Argon rinsing station

Provision of an on-line argon rinsing installation will be kept in the layout for rinsing of

the steel and temperature measurements. The steel grades not requiring temperature




adjustment and alloy additions and also not requiring hold up for sequencing operations

can be directly delivered to CCM, after rinsing and temperature measurements.

Vacuum degassing (VD) unit (optional)

It is proposed to install one VD unit for treatment of steel for low gas content. In

addition, for evacuation of gases, rinsing if steel by inert gas through porous plug and

small amounts of alloy addition for trimming temperature measurement and sampling

can be done. Treatment time in VD unit will be around 30 minutes.

Liquid steel handling

Liquid steel from the IF and EAF will be tapped into a preheated ladle, while it is placed

on a transfer car. Each ladle will be equipped with a slide gate system and fitted with

porous plug at the bottom for inert-gas stirring. The steel in the ladle will be tapped free

of slag as far as practicable. The transfer car will transfer the steel ladle into the LF aisle

for treatment at LF. After treatment, the ladle will be placed on the lifting and lowering

type ladle turret of the CCM by the overhead crane. On completion of the casting, the

slag in the ladle will be dumped on the ground in a specified area. The ladle will then be

taken back to the preparation area and placed on the ladle stand for slide gate and

porous plug setting and preheating.

7. CONTINUOUS CASTING MACHINE (CCM)

No. of machines One Hi-speed caster

No. of strands Three with provision for 4th strand.

Type of machine Tubular moulds, bow type and multi-point

unbending

Steel grade to be cast Alloy and special steels including auto

grades, spring steel (Si-Mn), free cutting

steel, LC/HC steel.

Ladle capacity, T: 80 and 25

Ladle handling Ladle turret

Size range to be cast: Size / Length 120-140 Sq.mm / 6 to 12 m

Design Speed Up to 6.0m/min

Billet cutting device: Auto gas cutting machine

Method of discharge: On horizontal discharge roller table to turn

over cooling bed with billet packet device

The CC machine will be equipped with ladle shroud manipulator to protect the metal

stream from atmospheric oxidation during teeming operation. Necessary tundish

preparation facilities, moulds and Segment assembly, testing and storage facilities will

also be provided. Automatic control system for functioning of the billet casting

equipment including casting speed, primary/secondary cooling water system and billet

transfer system up to the end of cooling bed will also be provided. Provision of

emergency water supply to caster will be made.

8. SINTER PLANT




The two main technologies for agglomeration are sintering and pelletizing. The sintering

process is adopted for agglomerating relatively coarse iron ore fines whereas pelletizing

is adopted in case of very fine ores generated during beneficiation.

The sintered iron ore, which comes out as big cakes at discharge end is broken to –150

mm size lumps by a sinter breaker. Then the sinter is sent to the sinter cooler. The cold

sinter is sent by conveyor to the cold sinter crushing and screening building which

generates the different size products:

5 to 50 mm size sinter is sent to blast furnaces.

–5 mm size return fines are sent to proportioning building.

Apart from conservation of iron ore by utilizing the ore fines, instead of discarding, the

other benefits of charging sinter into blast furnace are listed below:

Utilization of steel plant wastes, such as flue dust, mill scale, coke breeze etc.

during the sintering process.

Decrease in coke rate of blast furnace.

Increase in productivity of blast furnace.

Reduction of charging of raw lime stone and dolomite into BF.

Decrease in production cost of iron.

M/s BEL is planning to install sinter plant for catering to its blast furnaces requirement

and reduction of hot metal production cost.

The process of sintering iron ore fines is defined as an agglomeration process in which

coarse iron ore fines (-10 mm size) are joined together by firing them together in the




presence of carbonaceous fuel so as to generate incipient fusion between the particles.

The fused particles join together and form cake. These are then cooled and crushed to

desired size and screened before sending them to blast furnace.

It is found that fluxed sinters are more beneficial to blast furnace as compared to non-

fluxed sinter. This is because, by charging the entire flux requirement of blast furnace

into the sinter mix the heat required for calcinations of fluxes could be reduced to a

great extent. Such a step led to reduction in heat load inside the blast furnace resulting

in decreased coke rate.

In order to obtain good quality sinter, the ore fines, fluxes, fuel and dust from de-dusting

plants etc. have to be mixed in proper proportions. For this purpose, the materials are

kept in separate bunkers and calculated amounts are collected from respective bunkers

by means of weigh feeders on to a single conveyor which transports them to a mixing &

nodulizing drum. The sinter mix components are thoroughly mixed inside a rotating

drum which also helps in formation of small nodules of the sinter mix. The nodular size

of the mix helps in achieving adequate permeability of the sinter mix bed when charged

on to the sintering machine. Measured amount of water is also mixed in the sinter

charge for achieving proper modulization.

The mix from the mixing and nodulizing drum is taken to the sintering building and

charged into the sintering machine which is an continuous chain made up of pellets

having gratings to permit suction of atmospheric air through the sinter mix during the

movement of the sintering bed from one end to the other.

Immediately after completion of charging on the sintering strand, the sinter mix enters

into a heating zone where the carbon particles of the coke breeze get ignited.

Simultaneously, air is sucked through the sinter mix bed by means of suction boxes

(below the pallets) which are connected to the suction fan. While the sinter machine with

sinter mix bed moves forward, the combustion front in the sinter bed moves downwards.

By the time a particular cross-section of the sinter bed reaches the discharge end, the

combustion front reaches bottom of the sinter mix and the sintering process gets

completed.

Technological parameters of Sinter plant

No of Sinter Plant 1

Useful Area, m2 60

Productivity, t/ m2.hr 2.1

I % iron in sinter 65 (minimum)

No of working days in a year 340

Fuel for ignition BF gas

Calorific value of BF gas 700-800 kcal/m3

Size of Sinter for BF feed +5 to - 50 mm

9. OXYGEN PLANT

Atmospheric air is the main input to the Oxygen Plant and it is sucked by air

compressors through filter media, air enters a purifier consisting of twin Molecular Sieve

driers, working alternatively. The Molecular Sieves remove the Carbon dioxide &

moisture from the process air before the air enters Air SeparationUnit.




The air has to be cooled to sub- zero temperatures for liquification & the cryogenic

refrigeration & the cooling is provided by highly efficient turbo expander, which cools the

air to temperature almost below -165 to-1700C.

Oil free, moisture free and Carbon Dioxide free air enters into low pressure plate fin type

Heat exchanger where the air is cooled below sub- zero temp, by air expansion process

in the turbo expander.Due to the excellent thermal efficiency we can achieve a

temperature difference delta t as low as 20 C at the warm end of these exchangers.

Air gets liquefied when it enters the air separation column & gets separated into oxygen

& nitrogen by the process of rectification.

In cold box, air is separated into its components by means of distillation which employ a

thermal process known as cryogenic rectification to separate the individual components

from one another in order to produce high-purity nitrogen, oxygen and argon in liquid

and gaseous form. Oxygen & nitrogen so obtained is compressed to 30 bars and sent to

Bullets/Steel melt.

Liquid Oxygen is available at the outlet of the ASU at a purity of 99.6%.

Liquid Nitrogen is also available at the outlet as a alternate product at purity of

99.99%(up to 3ppm as required).Nitrogen gas will be available as a byproduct.

Production capacity of the Oxygen Gas Plant is 1 x 1200 m³/hr. Out of the gaseous

oxygen, Liquid Oxygen & Nitrogen is 120 TPD & liquid argon is 3 TPD. Adequate bullets

for oxygen store will be installed. The oxygen will be supplied in processing plants as

and when required. No water or fuel is required in the manufacturing process though

compressors and other machines need cooling water to remove heat of compression.

The dust free atmospheric air is sucked in by a multi-stage air compressor through a

filter and compressed to the working pressure. After each stage, intermediate coolers

and water separators are provided. The compressed air then passes through the

evaporation pre-cooler and then to the alumina-molecular sieve battery where the

moisture and carbon di-oxide are removed from the process air. It then passes through

the heat exchanger No.1 where it is cooled by the out-going waste nitrogen and product

oxygen. A part of this cold air then flows through an expansion machine and the balance

through the 2nd heat exchanger. An expansion valve, RI, controls the ratio of the two

air streams. Both these streams of air then unite in the medium pressure column where

it partially liquefies. The liquid air (rich liquid) then passes through the expansion valve

R2 to upper column, which is at lower pressure than the medium pressure columns.

Similarly, the liquid nitrogen (poor liquid) travels from the medium pressure column to

the upper column through an expansion valve R3 where the separation of oxygen and

nitrogen occurs. Nitrogen being more volatile passes out as a gas from the top of the

column of the Oxygen plant and this waste nitrogen flows through both the heat

exchangers cooling the in-coming air. Similarly, the product oxygen is also passed

through the two heat exchangers to cool the incoming air and then to the filling manifold

via a liquid pump.

Air separation plants produce nitrogen, oxygen and argon using air as raw material and

electrical power & cooling water as utilities. While there are variations in process details,

reflecting desired product mix and other factors, all air separation plants below to one of

two general process categories.

10. POWER PLANT




Additional ToR 9 Plan for utilization of energy in off gases (coke Oven,

Blast furnace)

Total power production has been envisaged at 205 MW, including existing 40 MW based

on running Coke Oven Plant.

Sum up of 205 MW: 40 + 40 MW power shall be produced by utilizing waste heat of

gases from coke oven for which 4 X 2 numbers of waste heat recovery boilers shall be

installed with 2 numbers of turbo generator sets of 40 MW each. 90 MW Power shall be

produced by utilizing waste heat of DRI kilns, and Blast furnace gas for which waste heat

recovery boilers and gas fired boiler with 1 number turbo generator set would be

installed. Generation of remaining 35 MW power has been envisaged based on AFBC

Boiler.

WHRB and AFBC Boilers will have same specifications, which are as follows.

Working Pressure 66kg/cm2 abs

Super heater temperature 4850C

BFW temperature 1300C

Operating hours 365x24hrs

The boilers will be complete with evaporator steam drum, mud drum, bank of super

heaters, economizers, ID fans, ESPs and internal piping etc. Soot blowing and de super-

heating system will also be provided.

Emergency DG Set

No. 2000 kVA emergency DG set will be provided to cater the loads during emergency

conditions. The DG set will be sized considering the essential loads like steam turbine

lube oil system, generator seal oil systems, Air pre-heaters, turning gear motor, jacking

oil pumps, lifts, battery chargers, emergency AC lighting, etc. during any emergency

condition. The DG Set will be started automatically in case of failure of AC Power. Manual

starting facility from Central Control Room will also be provided in addition to automatic

starting.

2.5.1 PROCESS AND MATERIAL FLOW DIAGRAM




2.5.3 MATERIAL BALANCE:

Material Balance of 2x320m3 MBF

Input in TPA Output in TPA

Sinter 6,04,000 Hot Metal 5,96,000

Hematite ore 2,58,000 BF slag 1,84,760

Coke 2,86,080 BF sludge+ dust 2,93,670

PCI 42,910 BF gas 1,76,560

Dolomite 60,000 - -

Total 12,50,990 Total 12,50,990

Material balance of 1x60m2 Sinter Plant


Iron Ore fines 7,68,000 Sinter 6,72,000

Lime stone/dust 96,000 Flue gas 2,76,500

Dolomite fines 76,500 - -

Coke breeze 62,400 - -

BF Dust & sludge

Recycle

2,73,600 - -

Total 12,76,500 Total 12,76,500

Material balance of 4x500 TPD & 4x350 TPD DRI Kilns


Hematite Iron Ore 17,40,800 Sponge Iron 10,88,000

Coal 8,61,700 Dolchar 2,72,000

Injection Coal 5,36,500 DRI dust 5,93,850

Air injection 6,08,900 Flue gas 52,62,350

Lime stone 43,500 Fly Ash 12,27,300

Combustion Air 46,52,100 - -

Total 84,43,500 Total 84,43,500

Material balance of 3x20T IF & 2x80T EAF


DRI 6,30,000 Liquid Steel 11,24,000

Hot metal 5,39,000 Slag 1,20,000

Pig 57,000 Flue+ Dust 24,000




Scrap 22,000

Ferro alloys 20,000

Total 12,68,000 Total 12,68,000

Iron balance

Fe from DRI@85% =5, 35,500 TPA Liquid steel 11, 24,000 TPA

Fe from HM & Pig @92% = 5, 48,320 TPA

Fe from Scrap @95% = 20,900 TPA

Ferro alloys ~19,500 TPA Total 11, 24,220 TPA

Material balance of1.2 MTPA Coke Oven Plant


Coking CoalNet & Dry 16,80,000 LAM Coke & coke breeze 12,00,000

Coke Oven gas 4,80,000

Total 16,80,000 Total 16,80,000

Material balance of 35 MW Power Plant


Char 2,72,000 Fly Ash 1,50,750

Non-coking coal 1,12,500 Bottom Ash 1,00,500

- - Flue gas 1,33,250

Total 3,84,500 Total 3,84,500

Energy Balance for 35 MW power plant

Char 31.5TPH@ 1800kcal/kg = 20.62 MW

Coal 13.02 TPH @ 3100 kcal/kg = 14.68 MW

Total = 35.20 MW




Table 2.4 Sources and type of Pollution from the Proposed Project & mitigation

measure

Sl.

No

.

Section/

Unit Operation

Emission

released waste

generated

Types of

pollution

Mitigation

measures

1. Raw

Material

and scrap

Handling

Stock pile,

crushing,

screening,

material transfer &

charging etc.

Fugitive dust

emission

Air pollution, soil

& water pollution

Water sprinklers, Fully

covered conveying, dry

fog, suction swivel hood,

bag filter, green belt 7

storage of material on

concrete floor/under shed

2 Induction

Furnace

Melting of sponge

iron, pig and scrap

Fume and slag Air pollution &

soil pollution

Bag filter, high stack, iron

recovery & slag disposal

3 MBF Reduction of iron

ore/ sinter by coke

at 16000C

CO, CO2& Nox; BF

slag & sludge. Hot

water from

granulation of slag

Air pollution.

Thermal & soil

pollution

Slag granulation. Sludge

and slag use in sinter

making & sale to cement

plant, ventury scrubber,

burning of excess BF gas

to generate power

4 EAF Quality steel

production using

HM from MBF,

scrap & DRI

Fume and slag Air pollution &

soil pollution

Bag filter, stack, iron

recovery from slag and

slag disposal

5 Sinter plant Agglomeration of

sized iron ore fines

by fusion at

12000C

Particulate matter,

CO2& NOx

Air pollution, ESP and high stack

6 CCM Casting

continuously

molten steel in

multi strand

casters

Spillage of hot

liquid metal and

contact with hot

water and mill

scale

Water pollution Settling tank, mill scale

recovery & recycle.

7 AFBC Production of

Steam for power

generation

Particulate matter,

CO2, SO2, NOx and

generation of fly

and bed ash

Air pollution Land

pollution, Noise

pollution & water

pollution

ESP, high stack, silencer

for steam venting, ETP

8 Non

recovery

Coke Oven

Production of coke

and Generation of

Steam for power

generation

Particulate matter,

SO2 & NOx

Air pollution,

thermal pollution

& Water pollution

Waste heat recovery from

COG, Dry quenching of red

hot coke to avoid water

pollution, heat recovery

from DQC

9 DRI kilns Production of

Sponge iron using,

Iron ore, coal &

lime stone

Particulate matter,

SO2 & NOx

Air pollution,

thermal pollution

Water pollution &

soil pollution

Dust settling chamber,

After burning chamber,

Waste Heat recovery &

ESP




2.6 PROJECT DESCRIPTION, INCLUDING DRAWINGS SHOWING PROJECT

LAYOUT, COMPONENTS OF PROJECT ETC. SCHEMATIC REPRESENTATIONS OF

THE FEASIBILITY DRAWINGS WHICH GIVES INFORMATION IMPORTANT FOR

EIA PURPOSE.

2.6.1 LAND DETAILS

M/s BEL has in its possession of 161.87 ha of land on which existing plant is running and

proposed expansion facilities will be accommodated in the vacant spaces available on

this land. The entire land will be used for setting up plant facilities, rain water

harvesting, water & raw material storage, solid waste dumping yard and development of

green belt.

ToR-4 (vii) Land use break up of total land of the project site

(identified and acquired), government/private-agricultural, forest,

wasteland, waterbodies, settlements etc. shall be included (not

required for industrial area)

The project of M/s Bengal Energy Limited is located at Dauka, Tentulmuri, Dist-West

Medinipur, and West Bengal. It is the core zone and the project boundary or the battery

limit does not belong to part of any National Park, wild life sanctuary or Natural/

Biosphere reserve. It also does not contain any features of archaeological/ historical and

cultural/aesthetic importance.

Table 2.1 Land schedule of project site core zone

Land Type Area in ha

Industrial land 161.87

Forest Land 0

Water Logged land 0

Agricultural Land 0

The total land of 161.87 ha has been acquired by M/s BEL and is available for the project

and its expansion will be carried out on the vacant areas within the existing plant boundary. The detailed breakup of the land is given in the table below:

The entire land will be used for setting up plant facilities, rain water harvesting, raw water, product, raw and waste material storage and establishing green belt.

Table 2.1A Land utilisation of project site core zone

Sl. No. Different Units Area in ha.

1 Existing plant Facilities 14.97

2 Proposed plant Facilities 24.28

3 Raw Material Storage 13.00

4 Water storage Facility 5.20

5 Rain water harvesting 5.20

6 Solid Waste disposal area 12.21




7 Internal roads & others 2.83

8 Green belt 53.41

9 Vacant Space available for further

expansion

30.77

Total 161.87

Gen. ToR-4(xi)Status of acquisition of land. If land is not complete

stage of the acquisition process and expected time of complete

possession of the land.

M/s Bengal Energy Limited has acquired entire land of 161.78ha. It has no forest, waste

land, water bodies nor settlements inside acquired land. Existing coke oven Plant is

running on this land. Expansion facilities will be accommodated on vacant spaces of this

land.

Gen. ToR-4(xii)R & R details in respect of land in line with state

Government Policy.

Entire land has already been acquired and existing plant is operating on this land. No

settlement was there and so R&R has not been required.

2.6.2 PROJECT LAYOUT

The Project general layout showing existing and expansion facilities have been shown

below.

Gen. ToR 4(v) & Additional ToR 14 Layout map indicating existing as

well as proposed unit indicating storage area, plant area, green belt

area, utilities etc. If located within an Industrial

area/Estate/Complex, Layout of Industrial Area indicating location of

unit within the Industrial Area/Estate.

The raw material handling system for storage and supply of various raw materials has

been located near the consumer section. All the major users are connected to this

system by conveyors. All raw materials are proposed to be received in dump trucks and

unloaded in the raw material receiving yard. Sufficient space is earmarked to cater to the

needs of all the units of the plant.

All the plant facilities are laid out considering the need for optimized earthwork, rational

material flow, economy in operations and the space requirements for rational

development. The layout also takes into account the stage wise commissioning of the

individual units of the proposed project.

The plant layout has been made in such a manner so that the material flow from the

units will be smooth and convenient, considering the process flow chat.

The power plant has been located near waste gas source suitably considering the

location of the DR plants & coke oven from which the major fuel sources for power

generation will be available. Adequate space is provided in all the production blocks for

accommodation the immediate service facilities such as the sub-stations, water

recirculation, yard utilities etc.




PROJECT LAYOUT MAP WITH PROJECT COMPONENTS

The general layout of the plant has been developed with requisite provision for

landscaping and greenbelts with a view to avoid adverse impact on the environment.

33% of total land is earmarked for this purpose. Existing facilities have been shown in

blue colour and proposed facilities in pink.

2.6.3 RAW MATERIAL INVENTORY

The major raw material for Coke oven Plant, Integrated Steel Plant and AFBC Boilers will

be as follows:

Gen.ToR 3(iv) List of Raw materials required and their source along

with mode of transportation.

Material Gross Capacity in

TPA

Source Mode of Transport







Transportation of Raw material as well as products will be done only by Environmental

compliant Bharat/Euro III vehicles. Mater to be transported fully covered to avoid

spillage on Roads. Materials will be transported to the site through the existing railway

siding.

Sp ToR(vii) Project proponent shall identify railway siding points to be

used frequentl.

The company has developed its own railway siding for transporation of raw materials and

products. Permission exists for siding at Benapur Station on Kharagpur-Balasore-

Bhadrak Section of South Eastern Railway. The permission letter has been attached as

Annexure II

Specific ToR (ix) Plan for concreted floor with covered storage

(sheds) of Raw material and coal shall be provided in the EIA EMP

report.




Raw material will be partly indigenous and partly imported, but all of them might have

various trace elements harmful to animal of plant health, when leached by rain water

and finally mixed with surface or ground water.

Dolchar is a byproduct of DRI kilns but it is considered as Raw material for AFBC.

All the Raw materials to be stored under shed and over concrete floor.

Additional ToR 11 Trace metals Mercury, Arsenic, and fluoride

emissions in the raw material

M/s Bengal energy is proposing to get imported coal as raw material for its project.

Hence average value of trace elements has been taken into consideration, which are as

follows.

Average range & Average values for trace elements in international coal

Element Average range mg/kg Average, mg/kg

As 0.36-9.8 2.69

B 11-123 47

Be 0.1-2.0 1.0

Cd 0.01-0.19 0.093

Hg 0.03-0.19 0.091

Pb 1.1-22 7.0

Se 0.15-5.0 2.15

Cr 2.9-34 17.6

Cu 1.8-20 10.8

Ni 1.5-21 11.1

Zn 5.1-18 12.7

Source: (Creelman, 2002)

Toxicity of trace elements

Cd has no known biological function. It accumulates in the kidneys and liver. It is

carcinogenic and can cause emphysema and fibrosis of the lung

Cr is also carcinogenic. It accumulates in the liver and spleen. Cr exists in the non-toxic

form Cr (III) and tends to be absorbed onto clays, sediments and organic matter. It is

therefore not very mobile in the environment. Cr(VI) is more mobile and more toxic

Exposure to Hg causes neural and renal damage, and cardiovascular disease. Organo-

mercury compounds bio-accumulate, particularly in fish.

Pb causes anaemia and has cardiovascular, neurological and gastrointestinal effects.

Some compounds are animal and possibly human carcinogens.

Although Se is an essential element, the safe range is narrow. Elevated levels cause

gastrointestinal disturbance, liver and spleen damage, and anaemia.

B-rich soils can limit plant growth resulting in decreased crop yields. Limits have been

adopted on the permissible levels of B in wastewater and water for irrigation.

Mitigation measure of toxic trace elements




Boiling Points of Hg, As, Se, Cd and Pb are 356.70C, 6130C, 684.80C, 766.80C & 17490C

respectively. In coal fired system of power plants or DRI Kilns temperature remains

above BP of these elements except Pb.

For a typical coal combustion plant the most important gaseous species are As asAsO,

As4O6, and As2O5, Cd as elemental Cd and CdO, Hg as elemental Hg, Pb as PbO, Sb as

SbO, Se as SeO2, and Zn as element Zn. Co, Cu, Ni and some of the Cr are not

volatilised and found in PM2.5 fly ash particles as ferrite spinels

Source :Zevenhoven and Kilpinen (2001)

Class 1: Elements that are approximately equally concentrated in the fly ash and bottom

ash, or show little or no small particle enrichment. Examples include manganese (Mn),

beryllium (Be), cobalt (Co), and chromium (Cr)

Class 2: Elements that are enriched in the fly ash relative to bottom ash, or show

increasing enrichment with decreasing particle size. Examples include arsenic (As),

cadmium, (Cd) lead (Pb), and antimony (Sb)

Class 3: elements which are emitted in the gas phase (primarily mercury (Hg) and, in

some cases, selenium (Se)).

Trace elements when vaporised, deposit on surface of finest ash particle at reduced

temperature and get separated in ESPs Or Bagfllters. These are then used in making

bricks or cement and get fixed with them and does not affect the environment.

Gen. ToR 3(v) other chemicals and materials required with quantities

and storage capacity.

In addition to above stated major Raw material following materials will also be required.






5 LDO/HSD LTR 10,015

LDO & HSD are coming under Petroleum Class B. No license needed for transport or

storage of Petroleum Class ‘B’ (Non-Bulk) in quantity not exceeding 2500 ltrs. And in

container not exceeding 1000 ltrs.

Additional ToR 17 Details on environmentally sound technologies for

recycling of hazardous materials as per CPCB guidelines may be

mentioned in case of handling scrap and other recycled materials.

The project will use heavy building scrap materials so as to avoid generation of dioxins

and furans from residual paints of scrap. The hazardous materials like used oil, oily

cotton waste, used lead cells, spent resins are generated from the process will be sold




to authorized recyclers.BF dust & sludge contains toxic trace elements along with C & Fe

so it will be used up in Sinter which otherwise could have affected environment.

3(viii) The project proponent shall furnish the requisite documents

from the contract authority in support of drawl of ground water and

surface water and supply of electricity.

2.6.4 WATER REQUIREMENT

3(vii) Requirement of water, power,with source of water, status of

approval,water balance diagram, manpower requirement

Additional ToR 18 Details on requirement of energy and water along

with its source and authorization from the concerned department.

Location of water intake and outfall points(with co-ordinates)

Water will be required to control temperature rise in various process. There will be

circulating water in close or open circuit. Non-contaminated water will be reused in the

process after cooling. Contaminated water will be settled, treated, filtered and reused

and there by fresh water requirement will be reduced. Loss of water as non-recoverable

waste water and through evaporation are to be made up to circulating circuit as fresh

make up water.

Table 2.3 Water Requirement

Sl. No Facilities Make up water

requirement

Cum/day

1 4 X 500TPD, 4 X 350 TPD, DRI plant 255

2 Captive power plant 205 MW 6,150

3 Blast Furnace 2,300

4 Coke Oven Batteries 108

5 EAF & IF (1 MTPA) 2,200

6 Sinter Plant 1x60m2 1,125

7 Water for drinking & Sanitation purpose(domestic) 200

8 Compensation for losses in soft water circuit 100

9 Contingency requirement 100

9 Total Make up water 12,538

10 Losses at plant water balancing , reservoir & raw

material plant

627

Total Raw water requirement from river 13,165




Although fresh make up water requirement will be about 12,538m3/day to meet losses

during transportation and storage, and provision for contingency taken into consideration

water drawl from river will be 13,165m3/day.

The probable source of supply of raw water for the project shall be Kangsabati river.

Water intake facilities at source and conveying main shall be provided for ensuring raw

water supply to plant on a continuous basis. The capacity of plant water balancing

reservoir, catering to plant make –up water needs, is considered to provide for a

contingent storage of seven days. This capacity is arrived at on the assumption that raw

water supply to plant shall be made possible on a continuous basis.

2.6.4.1 Water management &balance diagram

Fig 2.6 Water Balance Diagram

Specific ToR(viii) The plant shall be to zero liquid discharge




Waste water generated from various units will be about 6,387 m3/day and domestic

waste water will be about 270 m3/day. This will be treated in Neutralization tank, filtered

through sand/gravel bed and will be used for toilet flushing, dust suppression, road and

vehicle washing and green belt.

There will be Zero discharge outside project boundary.

2.6.4.2 Location of water intake and outfall points (with co-

ordinates)

Water for the project of M/s BEL will be sourced from river Kangsabati. Two intake wells

at the river, one at Jinsar 220 23’ 34.42” N and 870 21’ 49.32” E and other at Uttershimla

220 23’ 19.30” N and 870 23’ 05.03” E has been set up. Transportation of water from

river to project site will cover a pipe length of 23.7km and cross canal, NH-6, Howrah-

Kharagpur Rly. Line and pass along the length of NH-60, and outfall at 220 14’ 45.48” N

and 870 23’ 23.08” E. Permission has already been from Government of west Bengal, SE

Rly etc. This water project is to supply 10 MGD i.e. 40,920 m3/day and part of job has

already been completed.

Permission exists for drawl of 14,400 m3/day of water from Kangsabati River.The water

permission letter is attached as annexure III




2.6.5 POWER REQUIREMENT& GENERATION

The requirement of power for project will vary with stages of development. Even after

the commissioning of the captive powers, grid support will be required.

Construction power would be taken from available 132KVA/220KVA line for which

discussion is under progress with WSEB. Construction power required for the proposed

plant will be about 500kVA.

Power requirement for the project after expansion are estimated as follows:

Unit Power requirement in

MW(approx.)

1,2 MTPA Coke oven 03.00

4x500 TPD & 4x350 TPD DRI Kilns 12.00

2x320m3 MBF 11.00

1x60m2 Sinter Plant 05.50

2x80T EAF with LF& CCM 64.00

3x20T IF with LF 21.00

ASU 02.00

Lighting & domestic use 01.50

A/c& ventilation, Air compressor, Water

Pumping system etc.

12.50

Power Plant internal consumption 20.50

Total 153.00

Air conditioning

Package air conditioning units will be provided for the following areas.

1. Coal handling control room

2. Ash handling control room

3. ESP control room

4. DM Plant control room

5. Switchyard control room

6. Administration Building

Split air conditioning units will be provided for the following areas:

1. Conference room

2. Laboratory

Ventilation system

The ventilation system envisaged for the plant will achieve the following.

Scavenging out structural heat gain and heat load from various equipment, hot

pipes, lighting etc.




Reduction of air pollution due to generation of obnoxious gases / aerosol

contaminants like acid fumes, dusts etc.

Following areas are proposed for ventilation

Turbine building

Coal mill building

ESP building (equipment room)

Air compressor room

AC plant room

DM plant MCC room

Raw water pump house

Clarified water and fire water pump house

CW pump house

Chlorination Room

Miscellaneous rooms in powerhouse building like cable spreader room,

electrical switchgear room, battery room, toilet, elevator machine

room etc.

Battery room in Switchyard

DG set building

Workshop

Captive Power generation

Source Power generation in MW

WHRB of Coke Oven gas 80

WHRB of DRI Kilns 90

AFBC utilizing dolchar 24.5

CDQ & TRT system 10.5

Total 205

Generation 205 MW

Consumption 153 MW

Surplus Power 52 MW

About 8.0 MW power will be generated from dry coke quenching system & 2.5 MW power

will be generated from TRT of Blast furnace; totaling 10.5 MW, hence AFBC generation

will be reduced by same amount, so that pollution load will be reduced.

There will be Infrastructure to draw power from grid during construction period; same

infrastructure will be utilized for supply of balance power to state grid.

Specific ToR (x) Project proponent shall plan for solar light system for

all common areas, street lights, villages, parking around the project

area.

Specific ToR (xi) Project proponent plan for LED lights in their offices

and residential areas.

Following power saving measures shall be taken up for the project.




1) LED lights in control room and working area

2) Solar light system for internal roads, street lights, village lighting etc

3) Variable Frequency drive for ID fans and blowers.

4) Capacitor back to improve power factor.

5) MBF top gas pressure recovery turbine to be set up to generate atleast 35

KW/ton of hot metal produced

Emergency DG Set

No. 2000 kVA emergency DG set will be provided to cater the loads during emergency

conditions. The DG set will be sized considering the essential loads like steam turbine

lube oil system, generator seal oil systems, Air pre-heaters, turning gear motor, jacking

oil pumps, lifts, battery chargers, emergency AC lighting, etc. during any emergency

condition. The DG Set will be started automatically in case of failure of AC Power. Manual

starting facility from Central Control Room will also be provided in addition to automatic

starting.

2.6.6 SOLID WASTE GENERATION

Specific ToR(xii)& Additional ToR 8 Proponent shall submit plan for

solid waste management. Plan for slag utilization.

Additional ToR 12 Trace metals in waste material especially slag .

Additional ToR 19 Details on toxic metal content in the waste material

and its composition and end use (particularly slag).

Additional ToR 20 Details on toxic content( TCLP), composition and

end use of slag.

Total solid waste generation and its management has been given in table 2.4

below

Table 2.4 Solid Waste Generation

Solid waste Quantity

in TPA




DRI Dolchar 2,72,000 Use in AFBC to generate steam for power

generation

Power plant Fly ash 1,50,750 Sold to Gava Ecocrete Pvt Ltd

DRI ash & dust 5,75,600 Land feel and dump in abandoned coal mines

for which permission to be sought

BF slag 1,84,760 To be used in sinter plant & balance to be Sold

to ASO Cement Ltd as per MOU 20.09.2018

BF sludge + dust 2,93,670 To be used in sinter plant & balance to be Sold

to ASO Cement Ltd as per MOU 29.09.2018




Power plant Bottom

Ash

1,00,500 Sold to Gava Ecocrete Pvt Ltd, MOU 30th August,

2018

Composition of BF dust/Sludge

Component Concentration in BF dust/sludge in % (w/w)

C 24–40

Fe 15–40

Ca 1.4–5.7

Zn 0.1–0.5

Pb 0.02–0.07

Na 0.02–0.47

K 0.20–0.80

S total 0.20–1.3

BF slag & dust contains C & Fe in substantial amount it will be used in sinter making and

used as raw material in MBF. Flue dust from IFs & EAF will also be used in sinter making.

Composition of EAF & IF Slag

Similarly IF and EAF slag only contains Fe and Silica. Fe is recovered by magnetic

separation and is used as substitute of slag

So, TCLP test is not envisaged as toxic trace elements are not present.

Hazardous waste management

Hazardous waste generated from the project are Resins from DMplant, spent oils which

are to be handed over to authorized dealers/suppliers.

2.6.7 MANPOWER REQUIREMENT

Based on the unit operations & services, it is estimated that the total requirement of

manpower for the facilities proposed will be about 1,355 persons and a summary of

manpower is given below:-

Table 2.5 Summary Of Manpower Requirement

Department

/ Section

Shifts Total per

week

day

Total on

Pay Roll General I II III

Coke Oven

Plant

20 60 60 60 200 230

Sponge Iron

Plant

15 100 100 100 315 325

BF 10 30 30 30 70 75

EAF & IF 10 75 75 75 235 250

Captive Power

Plant

15 50 50 50 165 175

Sinter Plant 5 20 20 20 65 70

Maintenance,

Adminstration,

30 40 40 40 170 175




marketing of

product &

procurement

of Raw

material

Quality

Assurance and

Lab

5 15 15 15 50 55

Total 110 390 390 390 1280 1355

Table 2.6 Category-wise break-down of manpower

Category Total

Management personnel 65

Technical specialist 150

Supervisory staff 185

Highly skilled staff 225

Skilled 535

Semi-skilled staff 167

Office staff 28

Total 1,355

Gen. ToR 3(i) Cost of Project and time of completion

2.6.8 TOTAL CAPITAL COST

The total capital cost include cost of plant & machinery, Pre-operative expenses and

others.

Table 2.7 Total capital cost of Project

Units Cost in Rs.

Crore

Land & Site development 40.00

Infrastructure development 200.00

Civil and structural steel work 1,000.00

Mechanical & electrical equipment (as erected) 2,481.90

CER activities as per PH issues 18.10

Design, engineering & consultancy 160.00

Plant cost 3,900.00

A Plant Cost 3,900.00

B Other fixed Investment




Preliminary expenses: 58.50

Preoperative expenses 39.00

Sub total (B) 97.50

C Contingency: 195.00

D Interest during construction 250.00

E Margin money for working capital: 500.00

Total Capital Cost: A+B+C+D+E = 4942.50 ~4943.00 Crores

Capital Cost , Rupees - Crores 4,943.00

Equity 1,482.90

Borrowing 3,460.10

2.6.9 PROJECT COMPLETION TIME

Estimated time of implementation of the project is 36 months, the breakup of time

schedule is as follows:

Railway siding construction work will take approximately 12 months. It is envisaged that

certified equipment data required for design of equipment foundations will be made

available by equipment suppliers within the shortest possible time form the date of

placement of firm orders on them.

The total duration of structural steel work is estimated at 10 to 30 months

Equipment manufacture and delivery

Manufacturing and delivery of major equipment for proposed plants is to be made

available within a period from ‘Placement of Order’ date as follows:

IF and EAF: 15 months

DRI: 15 months

CPP: 18 months

BF: 12 months

SP: 12 months

Erection of equipment for the plant facilities will commence after availability of civil &

structural fronts as well as receipt of equipment at site to match the sequence of

erection

Erection of equipment is to be completed by 9 and 10 months from the

commencement of erection work for coke oven.

Erection of equipment for captive power plant is to be completed by 8

to 10 months from the commencement of erection work for CPP.


commencement of erection work for DRI kilns 1 to 4 respectively


commencement of erection work for DRI kilns 5 to 8 respectively

Erection of equipment is to be completed by 7 - 9 months from the

commencement of erection work for Blast Furnace.

Erection of equipment is to be completed by 7-9 months from the

commencement of erection work for Sinter Plant




Erection of equipment is to be complete by 11 months from the

commencement of erection work for steel melt shop.

Trial run and commissioning

After completion of erection of equipment for plants, commissioning activities will be

taken up sequentially. This will consist of cold run; hot run and performance guarantee

tests. Commercial production will commence after completion of all performance tests.

Test, trial run and commissioning of different plants are scheduled for completions from

“Placement of Order” are given here-under:

Power Plant: 21 months

DRI Plant: 18 months

Blast Furnace: 12 months

Sinter Plant: 12 months

IF and EAF: 12 months

2.7 DESCRIPTION OF MITIGATION MEASURES INCORPORATED INTO THE

PROJECT TO MEET ENVIRONMENTAL STANDARDS, ENVIRONMENTAL

OPERATING CONDITIONS OR OTHER EIA REQUIREMENTS (AS PER REQUIRED

SCOPE)

Following pollution mitigation measures have been proposed to be incorporated into the

project to meet environmental standard of air, water, noise and soil.

Air

a) DSC, ABC, ESPs with ID fans and high stack for DRI Kilns

b) ESP & high stack for Sinter plant & power plant

c) Bag Filters with ID fans and high stacks for: 1) IFs

2) EAFs

3) Raw material Handling Plant

d) Dust catchers with Ventury Water scrubbers: MBFs

e) Green belt covering entire boundary line as dust sink for the project

f) WHRB for DRI kilns and Coke oven plant to avoid thermal pollution of air.

Water

a)Domestic water treatment STP

b) Industrial water treatment ETP

c) Recycle/Reuse of treated water and Zero waste water discharge out side project

boundary.

d) Dry quenching of red hot coke to avoid waste water generation

Noise

a) Procurement of low noise making, silent type machinery for installation

b) Acoustic enclouser for sound producing machines

c) Green belt development surrounding project area




d) Providing ear guards to working personnel and air tight control rooms.

Soil

a) Storing of Raw material and solid waste on impervious floor and under shed.

b) Utilisation/disposal soon as possible

c) Avoiding use of polythene. M/s BEL is a polythene free industry.

Detail mitigation measures have been given in Ch-4

2.8 ASSESSMENT OF NEW & UNTESTED TECHNOLOGY FOR THE RISK OF

TECHNOLOGICAL FAILURE.

M/s Bengal Energy Limited has proposed steel production through well proven DRI-MBF-

EAF/IF technology. No untested or new technology has been proposed.

CONCLUSION

This chapter has given an elaborated description about the type, need, location

environmental sensitivity, magnitude of the project and technology, process description,

along with requirement of raw material, water, power, manpower etc.

Being a red category polluting industry, it is likely to have environmental impacts on the

local ecology (Air, Water, Noise, Soil, Vegetation, animal & Human being). Therefore

there is need for present base line study of project area, which will be influenced due to

emissions & effluents from project.

Socio economy, geology, hydrogeology, flora & fauna of the area surrounding project

need to be studied which may be affected due to the project this will also help in

quantifying the impact caused due to the expansion project. In order to ascertain the

impact of proposed project on the environment it is essential to study the baseline

environment of the surrounding area. In the forth coming chapter the baseline study has

been carried out.




CHAPTER-3

DESCRIPTION OF EXISTING ENVIRONMENT

3.0 INTRODUCTION

This chapter describes the existing environmental baseline status of M/s Bengal Energy

Ltd. at Dauka, PO- Tentulimuri, P.S-Naraingarh, in the district of Paschim Medinipur, WB

and its surrounding areas. It includes the physical environment (comprising

meteorology, air, water and land components), biological components and socio-

economiy, which may get affected due to the expansion of M/s Bengal Energy Ltd, as an

integrated steel plant.

“Environment “in EIA context mainly focuses on , but not limited to physical, chemical,

biological, geological, social, economic and aesthetic dimensions along with their

complex interactions which affects individuals, communities and ultimately determines

their forms, character, relationship and survival.

The major purposes of describing the environmental settings of the study area are:

To understand the project need and environmental characteristics of the area.

To assess the existing environmental quality.

To identify environmentally significant factors or sensitive geographical and

biological locations.

3.1 STUDY AREA, PERIOD & COMPONENTS

M/s Bengal Energy Ltd has its existing Coke oven and power Plant at Dauka, Tentulmuri

in Paschim Medinipur district of West Bengal. The project site extends from 220 15’

22.03’’ N to 220 14’ 26.31’’ N and 870 22’ 53.38’’ E to 870 23’ 10.63’’ N with Average

altitude of 32 m

3.1.1 STUDY AREA

The study area comprises three parts for the generation of baseline data collection:

Core zone – The plant site where the proposed expansion will be under taken.

Buffer zone- It consist of 10 km aerial coverage around the core zone.

Environmental Sensitive zone- it extends up to 15 km aerial coverage around the

project site.

The brief description of the present environmental scenario obtained from primary

(monitored) data and partly from the secondary source (Govt. offices) the description

covers the major environmental components like.

1) Physio-chemical (air, water, soil, noise etc.),

2) Biological (flora, fauna & ecology),

3) Human (Socio-economic) &

4) Aesthetics

3.1.2 STUDY PERIOD

Base line study period of core and buffer zone of project site was winter, from 1st

November, 2017 to 31st January 2018.




3.1.3 COMPONENTS

SITE DESCRIPTIONS

The location of the site in the Indian Map of 1: 10, 00, 000 scale followed by 1: 50, 000

for the preparation of 10 Kilometers of terrain features with 100/200 meter contour to

generate the 3 dimensional view of the project site all these explain physio-geographical

condition of the study area.

SITE CONNECTIVITY

The location is well connected by road and Rail. NH-16 connecting to Balasore–

Kharagpur is only 0.6 Km away from the project site & Balasore-Kharagpur railway line

is passing only at 0.5 Km away from the site. River Kangsabati is flowing 15 Km away

from the location

Fig 3.1 Location of Site




3.2 PHOTOGRAPHS OF PROJECT SITE

Gen.ToR 4(vi) Photographs of the proposed and existing (if

applicable) plant site. If existing, show photographs of

plantation/green belt in particular.

Some photographs of the project site showing existing plant & vacant space for

expansion.

3.3 TOPOGRAPHY

The land surface of the area is characterised by hard rock uplands, lateritic covered area,

and flat alluvial and deltaic plains. Extremely rugged topography is seen in the western

part of the area and rolling topography is experienced consisting of lateritic covered

area. These rolling plains gradually merge into flat alluvial and deltaic plains to the east

and south east. The soil is fairly fertile. Kangsabati, Silabati, Subarnarekha, Keleghai and

their tributaries are the main rivers of the area.

The soil is fertile alluvial and the area is flat. To the west, the Chota Nagpur

Plateau gradually slopes down creating an undulating area with infertile laterite rocks/

soil. The landscape changes from dense dry deciduous forests in the west to marshy

wetlands in the east.

The alluvial portion may be further subdivided into two divisions. First, it is a strip of

purely deltaic country nearer to the Hooghly and the Rupnarayan, intersected by

numerous rivers and watercourses subject to tidal influences.

3.3.1 LAND USE PATTERN OF BUFFER ZONE

Tor 5 (ii) Land Use Map Based on High Resolution Satellite Imagery

LAND USE PATTERN OF 10KM BUFFER ZONE OF PROJECT SITE

LAND USE

Area

(Sq. km)

Area (%)

Canal 1.49 0.4

Crop land 243.91 66.0

Dense forest 11.58 3.1

Groves 0.23 -

Industry 2.70 0.7

Institution 5.56 1.5

Open forest 6.96 1.9

Plantation 3.96 1.0

Quary 0.14 -

Railway 1.10 0.3

Reservoir 0.27 -

River 1.51 0.4

Road 4.37 1.2

Scrub forest 5.57 1.5

Scrub land 3.11 0.8

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chota_Nagpur_Plateau

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chota_Nagpur_Plateau




Settlement 61.07 16.5

Tank 10.00 2.7

Urban area 6.66 1.8

Total 370.19 100

Out of the total study area, major portion is agricultural land which covers 66%,

Settlement contributes 16.5% and forests land 4.6%. So, agricultural products become

the main source of income of the local people.

The study area can be classified as given below;

Crop Land (243.91 Sq Km) : The major portion of the study area is covered by crop

land, the major crop grown is Paddy and is grown throughout the year. The area is not

well connected with canal irrigation system mostly deep borewell is dended for irrigation

purpose.

Farmers to be encouraged for adopting farming of crops by using modern techniques,

dairy farming to meet the need of the industrial population.

Forest (28.3 Sq Km): Total forest area is fairly well. The scrub land present can be

converted to plantation purpose which may increase the forest cover.

Industry (0.27 Sq Km.) : Industry is negligible in the study area.

River & Canals (3.0 Sq Km.) River Kanshabati is the main river flowing beside the

study area. Canal irrigation system needs to be increased looking into the crop land and

fertility of the soil in this area.

Tank & Resirvoir (10.27Sq km): Both are considered as wetlands are a good sign of

ecological importance, but the pollution parameters are to be checked regularly.

The major land use pattern is crop land, it means majority of the people depends on

agriculture. Settlement is in 61.07 sq.km area. Forest land covers around 10% of total

land. Average Rain fall in the area is 1400 mm and there is potentiality of good crop.

Industry covers only 2.3% of 10km radius study area.

Tor 4(viii) List of Industries with name and type within study area

Sl.

No. Name of Industry

Type Distance

in km

Direction

w.r.t

project

1

Essen Fabricators Pvt Ltd (Heavy

Engineering Division)

Steel foundary 9.17 NW

2 Supreme Industries Ltd

Plastic

Manufacturing

7.13 S

Tor 5(i) Permission and approval for use of Forest Land if any and

recommendation of the status forest deparment (if applicable)




The project area does not have any forest land. The entire land has been has been

converted to Industrial land. Hence forest clearance is not applicable.

Tor-5(iii) Status of application submitted for obtaining the stage I

forestry clearance along with latest status shall be submitted.

The proposed project does not have forest land and the expansion is intended to be

carried out within the existing premises. So, stage I forest clearance is not applicable.

Tor-5(iv) The Projects To Be Located Within 10km Of The National

Parks, Sanctuaries, Biosphere Reserves, Migratory Corridors Of Wild

Animals The Project Proponent Shall Submit The Map Duly

Authenticated By Chief Wildlife Warden Showing These Features Vis-

À-Vis The Project Location And The Recommendations Or Comments Of

The Chief Wildlife Warden-Theoren.

There is no such National Parks, Sanctuaries, Biosphere Reserves, Migratory Corridors of

Wild Animals within the 10 Km radius of the project. So, map duly authenticated by

Chief Wildlife Warden is not envisaged.

Tor-5(v) Wildlife Conservation Plan Duly Authenticated By The Chief

Wildlife Warden Of The State Government For Conservation Of

Schedule I Fauna , If Any Exists In The Study Area

Not applicable

Tor-5(vi) Copy Of Application Submitted For Clearance Under The

Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972 To The Standing Committee Of The

National Board For Wildlife

Not Applicable

Additional ToR 3 For large ISPs s 3-D view i.e DEM(Digital Elevation

Model) for the area in 10 km radius from the proposal site.

3-D view i.e DEM (Digital Elevation Model) of buffer zone of 10km radius has been given

below.

The digital elevation map of the study area depicts that the high elevation is 61.1m in

the North West region of the area and 10.5m in South West and eastern part. It shows

there is a slope gradient towards SW from NW.

3.4 ESTABLISHMENT OF BASELINE FOR VALUED ENVIRONMENTAL

COMPONENTS AS IDENTIFIED IN THE SCOPE WITH METHODOLOGY ADOPTED.

BASE MAP OF ALL ENVIRONMENTAL COMPONENTS.

To quantify and interpret the additional impacts due to air emissions, effluent discharge,

solid waste dumping and noise propagation due to expansion of Steel plant at a later

date, it is necessary to know the present quality of environment with respect to various

attributes considered under impact identification. The environmental factors include air,

water, noise, soil, land use, flora & fauna, socio-economic and demographic pattern in

order to understand the base line environment quality a monitoring schedule covering

Post-Monsoon season of the year was carried out from the month of November 2017 to




January 2018.The impact identification started with collection of baseline data such as

ambient air quality, quality of ground water, surface water, soil, noise and

meteorological parameters like temperature, humidity, wind speed and direction, cloud

cover etc. The field studies/ site survey/ interaction with different government agencies

was carried out to collect data/ information pertaining to flora & fauna, climate, socio-

economic and demographic factors, land use pattern, forests, geology, geomorphology,

hydrology, hydro-geology, soil and agriculture, mineral resources etc. This chapter

describes the existing baseline environmental condition in of the 10km radius area of M/s

Bengal Energy Ltd. Project site study area.

3.5 BASELINE STATUS OF STUDY AREA

3.5.1 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS OF THE STUDY AREA

The climate in the study region is generally hot and humid and is characterized with

seasonal variations of temperature, humidity, rainfall etc. The year is mostly divided into

following season.

Sl. no. Season Month

1 Winter December to February

2 Summer March to May

3 South west

Monsoon

June to September

4 Post Monsoon October and November

The climate setting of the area has been arrived by generation of primary data to

ascertain the values and validating with the existing secondary data from the nearest

IMD station at Midnapore.

Temperature

The temperature profile of this region is presented in the following table.

Table-3.2: Temperature Profile of the study area

Sl.

No.

Description Minimum

Temperature (0C)

Maximum

Temperature (0C)

1 Summer Season 24.0 41.0

2 Winter Season 14.0 30.0

3 Monsoon season 22.0 38.0

Humidity

The maximum and minimum humidity values of the region are given below.

Table-3.3: Maximum and Minimum Humidity of the Study Area

Maximum humidity 66%

Minimum humidity 53%




Rainfall

The area receives fairly good amount of rainfall from the southwest monsoon during

June to September. Light showers occur during the months of October and November.

The average annual rainfall of the study area is 1440 mm. The rainfall characteristics of

the region are given in the following Table-3.4.

Table-3.4: Rainfall Pattern in the Region

Predominant rainy season (monsoon) July to September

Average annual rainfall (mm) 1440

Most rainy Month July, August

Soil

The soils of the study area are mainly red earth comprising loamy sands, sandy loams

and clay loams. The soils of Paschim Medinipur district are predominantly red laterite

and alluvial.

3.5.2 METEOROLOGICAL CONDITIONS DURING STUDY PERIOD.

Meteorology of the study area plays an important role in air pollution dispersion. The

prevailing micro-meteorological conditions at the site regulate the dispersion and the

dilution of air pollutants in the atmosphere. The predominant wind speed at the core

zone will decide the direction and the distance of the most affected area from the

proposed activity. Regional meteorological scenario helps to understand the trends of the

climatic factors. It also helps in determining the sampling stations in predicting the post

project environmental scenario. Meteorological perameters exerts a critical influence on

Air Quality as the pollution arises from the interaction of atmospheric contaminants with

adverse meteorological conditions such as temperature inversions, atmospheric stability

and topographical features like hills, canyons and valleysplays a major role.

The critical weather elements that influence air pollution are wind speed, wind direction,

temperature, which together determines the atmospheric stability.Hence it is an

indispensable part of any Air Pollution Studies and required for interpretation of baseline

information.

Monitoring Period

Meteorological data was collected for the study period of three months (November 2017

to January 2018). The data collected during the monitoring period represents the winter

season.

In order to determine the micrometeorological conditions of the study area a temporary

micro-meteorological monitoring observatory was set up near the site. The following

parameters were recorded at hourly intervals continually during the study period.

Wind speed

Wind direction

Relative humidity

Temperature

Cloud cover




Wind speed and direction are measured by anemometer; air temperature by

thermometer, relative humidity is measured by hygrometer and cloud cover recorded

through visual interpretation. The localized data generated in the study area have been

compared with the data compiled from the nearest IMD observatory at Midnapore. At the

meteorological station wind speed & direction, temperature, relative humidity and cloud

cover were recorded at hourly intervals throughout the monitoring period. Total rainfall

for the entire monitoring period was also recorded. The summarized meteorological data

is given in Table-3.5.

Wind roses on eight-sector basis (N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, NW) have been drawn for 00-

24 hours. From the analysis of data the overall predominant wind direction has been

from North to South followed by North-East to South-West. The average wind velocity is

3.72 m/s and the calm period is 34.83%. Details of the overall wind frequency

distribution during the study period at the site is given in Table 3.5. The Wind Rose

diagrams for winter season are given as Fig-3.2, Fig-3.3, Fig-3.4 , Fig-3.5 and Fig-

3.6.

Table-3.5: Summarized Meteorological Data at site.

Temperature

The mean maximum and the mean minimum temperatures recorded during the study

period are 10.0ºC and 33.0ºC respectively. The relative humidity varied between 55% to

66% during the study period.

Rainfall

No rainfall was recorded during the study period and there was clear sky.

Station ID: 42803 Run ID: Dauka

Year: 2017-2018

Date Range: November 1st. - January 31st.

Time Range: 00:00-23:00

Table-No. 3.6: Overall Wind Frequency Distribution

Period

Wind Speed

(Km/Hr)

Temperature

(oC)

Relative

Humidity (%) Rainfall Cloud

cover

(Oktas)

Mean Max Min Avg Max Min Avg Max Min Avg

24 hr

Max

(mm)

Total

(mm)

Nov.-

2017

12.8 0.3 3.1 32 14 15 66 62 63 Nil Nil 0

Dec.-

2017

12.7 0.4 3.0 30 11 12 65 56 61 Nil Nil 1

Jan.-

2018

12.9 0.3 2.9 33 12 10 63 55 60 Nil Nil 0




Wind Direction 0.5 - 2.1 2.1 - 3.6 3.6 - 5.7 5.7 - 8.8 8.8 - 11.1 >= 11.1 Total

348.75 - 11.25 0.195592 0.028581 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.224174

11.25 - 33.75 0.000344 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000344

33.75- 56.25 0.153926 0.012741 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.166667

56.25-78.75 0.016529 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.016529

78.75-101.25 0.051309 0.006543 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.057851

101.25-123.75 0.008953 0.000689 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.009642

123.75-146.25 0.025482 0.002755 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.028237

146.25-168.75 0.024449 0.003444 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.027893

168.75-191.25 0.023760 0.005510 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.029270

191.25-213.75 0.003788 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.003788

213.75-236.25 0.039945 0.002755 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.042700

236.25-258.75 0.006198 0.000344 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.006543

258.75-281.25 0.010675 0.002066 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.012741

281.25-303.75 0.002410 0.000689 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.003099

303.75-326.25 0.017906 0.000689 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.018595

326.25-348.75 0.001033 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.001033

Sub-Total: 0.582300 0.066804 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.649105

Calms: 0.350895

Missing/Incomplete: 0.000000

Total: 1.000000

Frequency of Calm Winds: 34.83%

Average Wind Speed: 3.72 m/s




3.5.3 AMBIENT AIR QUALITY

The ambient air quality in one locations in core zone and eight locations in impact

(Buffer) zone i.e. 10 Km radius of the study area around the proposed project site as the

center taken to form the baseline information over which the predicted impacts has been

superimposed to find out the net impacts on the air quality of the surrounding

environment of the project area. The design of the network of ambient air quality

monitoring stations in the study area was done based on the following criteria.

Meteorological conditions on a synoptic scale & predominant wind direction

derived from plotted wind rose

Topography of the study area

Representation of the regional background levels

High population area

Air pollution in the project area is not bad . The prominent sources of air pollution in the

study area are due to emission from, vehicular movement and domestic fuel as coal

burning in some parts of the study area.

The pollutants of concern area are Particulate Matter (PM10 and PM2.5), SO2, NOX and CO.

Ambient air quality monitoring in the study area was carried out for the pollutants of

concern as per the project requirement. The selected sampling locations for air quality

study are shown in Fig-3.7. Air quality monitoring stations were selected. All the

ambient air quality monitoring stations were installed on flat roof, at least 3m above the

ground level with no obstructions and ensuring free flow of the wind.

Duration of sampling

The Duration of Sampling of Particulate Matter (PM10), Particulate Matter (PM2.5), SO2,

NOX, was each twenty-four-hourly continuous sampling per day and CO was sampled for

8 Hours continuous thrice in 24-hour duration monitoring. The Monitoring was conducted

for two days in a week for four months. This was to allow a Comparison with the present

revised standards mentioned in the latest gazette notification of MoEFCC 2009.

Sampling Frequency

The Ambient Air Quality Parameters along with their Frequency of Sampling are given

below

Table 3.7 Monitored parameters and frequency of sampling

Parameters Sampling Frequency

Particulate Matter (PM10) 24 Hourly Sampling twice a week for 3 months

Particulate Matter (PM2.5) 24 Hourly Sampling twice a week for 3 months

Sulphur Dioxide (SO2) 24 Hourly Sampling twice a week for 3 months

Oxides of Nitrogen (NOX) 24 Hourly Sampling twice a week for 3 months

Carbon Monoxide (CO) 8 Hourly Sampling for 24 Hour twice a week for 3

months




Instrument Used for Sampling

Respirable Dust samplers (APM 460BL, FPS 550) have been used for monitoring

Particulate Matter (PM10, PM2.5). Gaseous Pollutants like SO2, NOX, were collected in the

impinger of attachment box (APM - 411) connected with RDS.

In General, the following points were taken in to consideration during sampling

Height of the sampler inlet 3 – 10 m above the ground level.

The Sampler more than 20 m away from large trees.

Distance of the sampler to any air flow obstacle i.e. buildings, more than two

times the height of the obstacle above the sampler.

There was unrestricted air flow in three of four quadrants.

Table 3.8 Techniques used for ambient air quality analysis

Sl. No. Parameter Technique Technical Protocol

1 Particulate Matter (PM10) Respirable Dust Sampler

(Gravimetric Method)

IS: 5182 Part IV

2 Particulate Matter (PM2.5 ) FP Sampler (Gravimetric

Method)

IS: 5182 Part IV

3 Sulphur Dioxide Modified West and Gaeke

method

IS: 5182 Part II

4 Oxides of Nitrogen Jacob & Hochheiser

method

IS: 5182 Part VI

5 Carbon Monoxide NDIR IS: 5182 Part X

Table-3.9: National Ambient Air Quality Standards as per MoEF Notification

under Schedule-VII, Rule- 3(3B). dt 18.11.09

Sl. No.

Pollutant (in µg/m3)

Time

Weighted Average

Concentration in Ambient Air

Industrial,

residential, Rural and Other Area

Ecologically

Sensitive Area (Notified by Central Govt.)

Methods of Measurement

1 Sulphur Dioxide (SO2) (µg/m3)

Annual * 24 hours **

50 80

20 80

- Improved West and Gaeke - Ultraviolet fluorescence

2 Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2) (µg/m3)


40 80

30 80

- Modified Jacob & Hochheiser (Na-Arsenite)

3

Particulate Matter (size less than 10µm) or PM10

(µg/m3)


60 100

60 100

- Gravimetric -TOEM - Beta attenuation

4

Particulate Matter (size less than

2.5µm or PM2.5) (µg/m3)

Annual *

24 hours **

40

60

40

60

- Gravimetric - TOEM

- Beta attenuation

5 Ozone (O3) (µg/m3) 8 hours ** 1 hour **

100 180

100 180

- UV photometric - Chemilminescence -Chemical Method

6 Lead (Pb) (µg/m3) Annual * 24 hours **

0.50 1.0

0.50 1.0

- AAS/ICP method after sampling on EPM 2000 or

equivalent filter paper




- ED-XRF using Teflon filter

7

Carbon

Monoxide (CO) (mg/m3)

8 hours ** 1 hour **

02 04

02 04

- Non dispersive Infra Red (NDIR) spectroscopy

8 Ammonia (NH3) (µg/m3)


100 400

100 400

- Chemiluminescence - Indophenol blue Method

9 Benzene (C6H6) (µg/m3)

Annual * 05 05

- Gas chromatography based

continuous analyzer - Adsorption followed by GC analysis

10 Benzo(a)Pyrene (BaP) – particulate

phase only(ng/m3)

Annual * 01 01 - Solvent extraction followed by HPLC/GC analysis

11 Arsenic (As)

(ng/m3) Annual * 06 06

- AAS/ICP method after sampling on EMP 2000 or equivalent filter paper

12 Nickel (Ni) (ng/m3) Annual * 20 20

- AAS/ICP method after sampling

on EMP 2000 or equivalent filter paper

* Annual arithmetic mean of minimum 104 measurements in a year at a particular site taken

twice a week 24 hourly at uniform intervals.

** 24 hourly or 08 hourly or 01 hourly mentioned values, as applicable, complied with 98 % of

the time in a year, 2 % of the time; they may exceed the limits but not on two consecutive days

of monitoring.

ToR-6(ii) AAQ data at 8 locations for PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx, CO and

other parameters relevant to the projects shall be collected.

Table- 3.10 A: Details of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations

Sl.

No.

Locations Distance

(Km) Direction Type of area

1 Keshariya 7.0 NW Plantation Area

2 Bargopal

4.7 SE Rural & Residential

Area

3 Daharpur 5.89 S Proximity to Industries

4 Nutandih

5.54 SW Rural & Residential

Area

5 Silti 5.7 SW Residential Area

6 Belti 6.8 SW Residential Area

7 Shalkha

7.0 N Rural & Residential

Area

8 Mirjapur

5.1 E Rural & Residential

Area

Source: Monitoring, Period: Nov’2017 to Jan ‘2018, Site Specific AAQ Data

Selection Criteria: The AAQ monitoring location were selected in the down ward

movement of air in that particular season, which was dectected by running windrose

with monthly micrometerological data of that area.

The sampling locations are given in Fig 3.12.



Table 3.10 B Summary of Ambient Air Quality Result

Location Code

Location Name

PM10 (µg/m3) PM2.5 (µg/m3) SOX (µg/m3) NOx(µg/m3) CO (µg/m3)

Max Min 98th perc

Max Min 98th perc

Max Min 98th perc

Max Min 98th perc

Max Min 98th perc

A1 Keshuriya 80.2 68.1 80.2 35.3 30.0 35.2 9.6 8.2 9.6 12.6 11.2 12.6 465 395 465.0

A2 Bargopal 79.8 62.8 79.7 35.7 27.6 35.5 9.4 6.1 9.4 12.6 10.5 12.6 431 372 430.5

A3 Daharpur 92.3 66.8 85.8 43.5 29.4 39.5 9.6 6.2 9.5 18.9 14.7 18.2 417 357 415.6

A4 Nutandihi 76.3 61.9 74.2 33.6 27.2 32.6 7.6 6.2 7.0 17.5 14.2 17.3 473 384 459.7

A5 Silti 77.4 65.7 77.1 36.4 30.9 36.3 8.4 6.1 8.4 16.3 13.8 16.3 403 342 401.2

A6 Belti 75.8 64.8 74.8 33.3 28.5 32.9 9.1 7.8 9.0 15.8 13.5 15.6 409 350 403.9

A7 Salkha 77.5 64.3 76.4 34.1 28.3 33.8 8.8 7.3 8.7 15.2 12.2 15.0 450 373 443.7

A8 Mirjapur 75.8 65.4 75.8 33.4 28.8 33.4 8.2 7.1 8.2 17.5 15.1 17.5 413 357 413.0

Range Value 92.3-61.9 43.5-27.2 9.6-6.1 18.9-10.5 473-342

NAAQS (Nov 2009) 100 (24 hours) 60 (24 hours) 80 (24 hours) 80 (24Hourly)

1 hour average : 4000 µg/m3 8 hour

average : 2000µg/m3

INSTRUMENT USED AND METHODS OF

MEASUREMENT

Fine Particulate Sampler SLE- 105 and

Gravimetric

Attachment SLE-133 Spectro photometric analysis (West-Geake

method)

Attachment SLE-133 Spectro photometric analysis (West-Geake

method)

Improved West and Gaeke

Non dispersive Infra Red (NDIR)

Spectroscopy

PROTOCOLS IS-5182 (Part-23) 2006,

Gravimetric EPA Guideline

IS-5182 (Part-2) 2001, West & Gaeke

IS-5182 (Part-6) 2006, Jacob & Hieocher

IS- 518 2 (Part 10 )2006

PM10 & PM2.5 concentration was maximum around the main gate area of the plant, as transport vehicles to and fro from the plant was

more on 17.11.17. In Daharpur also the AAQ concentration was high because of burning of paddy fields on dt. 12.01.18.




Out of the eight locations in the study area, the maximum concentration for PM10 of 92.3

g/m3 was recorded at Daharpur and the minimum concentration of 61.9 g/m3 at

Nutandih Village. The 98th percentile values ranged between 93.6 – 61.9 g/m3 at all the

locations of core as well as buffer zone are below the CPCB norms. The 98 percentile

values for Daharpur village in buffer zone has high variation, due to its proximity to

Supreme Industries Pvt Ltd. The vehicular movement contributes to maximum pollution

in the area.

Out of the eight locations in the study area, the maximum concentration for PM2.5 of 43.5

g/m3 was recorded at the Daharpur. Location with the minimum concentration of 27.2

g/m3 was recorded at Nutandih. This is due to the fact that these locations are still

virgin in their nature owing low disturbance of the surrounding environment and the

existing physiography. This observable concentration values are a result of existing

“kaccha” village roads. Daharpur sampling location was located nearer to a plastic




Industry and hence a higher value for PM 2.5 compared to other location was observed

here.

Out of the eight locations in the study area, the maximum concentration for SO2 of 9.6

g/m3 was recorded at Keshariya & Daharpur area with the minimum concentration of

6.1 was recorded at Bargopal & Silti monitoring locations. The 98th percentile values

ranged between 6.1-9.6µg/m3 at all the locations are within NAAQS.

Out of the eight locations in the study area, the maximum concentration for CO of 465

μg/m3 was recorded at Keshariya Observation site with the minimum concentration of

362 μg/m3 recorded at Silti Location. The 98 percentile values (in the range of 371-230

μg/m3) at all the locations are below the CPCB norms.

Due to the undisturbed physiography of the study area along with the low veichular

mobility in this area, the CO concentration was well within the limit prescribed as per

NAAQS standard and except for the Keshuriya location where concentration of CO is on a




comparably higher side due to veichular movement and presence of small and cottage

industries.

The maximum concentration for NOx of 18.9 g/m3 was recorded at Daharpur Village

with the minimum concentration of 10.5 g/m3 at Bargopal. The 98 percentile values at

all the locations are within NAAQS standards.

ToR-6(iii) Raw data of all aaq measurement for 12 weeks of all

stations as per frequency given in the naqqm notification of nov. 2009

along with-min.- max. Average and 98% values for each of the aaq

parameters from data of all aaq stations should be provided as an

annexure to the eia report.

Raw AAQ data is attached as Annexure IV

Additional ToR 5 PM present in ambient air must be analysed for

source analysis/RSPM generated from plant operation

Table 3.10A: Chemical characterization of RSPM (PM10)

RSPM µg/m3 Keshariya Daharpur

Calcium as Ca µg/m3 1.45 1.41

Magnesium as Mg µg/m3 0.25 0.11

Sodium as Na µg/m3 0.02 0.01

Potassium as K µg/m3 0.02 BDL

Chromium as Cr µg/m3 BDL BDL

Aluminum as Al µg/m3 0.11 0.11

Silica µg/m3 0.01 0.01




Lead as Pb µg/m3 BDL BDL

Zinc as Zn µg/m3 0.01 BDL

Iron as Fe µg/m3 0.02 0.01

Poly-aromatic hydrocarbon µg/m3 BDL BDL

PAH at all the monitoring stations is in low proportionate to have any impact on

From the ambient air quality monitoring carried out for three months (Nov 2017 to Jan.

2018) during the study period, it is found that the critical pollutants like PM10, PM2.5, SO2,

NOX and CO in buffer zone are within the permissible limits. Ambient Air Quality in the

study area may be attributed due to vehicular traffic on the State highway which is

adjacent to the BEL and vehicular rush on NH 16, the railways diesel engines, and

unchecked domestic fuel burnings etc in the study area.

MIXING HEIGHT

ToR-6(i) Determination Of Atmospheric Inversion Level at The Project

Site and Site-Specific Micro-Meteorological data using Temperature,

Relative Humidity, Hourly Wind Speed and Direction and Rainfall.

Mixing Height or Mixing Depth is used by meteorologist’s to quantify the vertical height

of mixing in the atmosphere. The concept ofmixing height (MH) is based on the principle

that when the atmosphereis heated from below due to the solar radiation, it becomes

unstable andgives rise to vertical motion and mixing. Mixing height is thus, defined asthe

top of a surface based layer in which vertical mixing is relatively vigorous and the lapse

rate is approximately dry adiabatic. These conditions are normally seen during cloudless

condition during day time.In the case of a ground based inversion, the mixing height is

zero or absent. Forecasting of mixing height is done with the aid of the vertical

Temperature profile. A radiosonde is sent aloft and temperatures atvarious altitudes are

radioed back. The altitude at which the dry adiabatic line intersects the radiosonde

measurements is taken as themaximum mixing depth (MMD). The MMD is a function of

stability. Inunstable air, the MMD is higher while it is lower in stable air. There is

aseasonal variation of mixing height. During summer daylight hours, MMDcan be a few

thousand meters, where it can be a few hundred meters inwinter. It also varies during

the course of a day. It is lowest at night andincreases as the day progresses. With a

measure of both MMD and windspeed with respect to height, we get a good idea of the

amount of pollutant dispersion. The mixing height shows increasing trend during the day

with theincrease of surface air temperature, achieving maxima around the timeof

maximum surface temperature and later in the afternoon over rural /open areas in fair

weather situation. However, it is more likely to remainpersistent to heights of roughly a

hundred meters or so over urban areasowing to slower cooling than rural / open areas.

Inversion height is used to quantify the vertical height of mixing in the atmosphere. The

concept of inversion height is based on the principle that when the atmosphere is heated

from below due to the solar radiation, it becomes unstable and gives rise to vertical




motion and mixing. It is thus defined as the top of a surface based layer in which vertical

mixing is relatively vigorous and the lapse rate is approximately dry adiabatic.

For project region as can be seen from mixing height curve in winter, given below the

minimum height is at 6-7AM and maximum 1-2 PM

As can be seen from data given by IMD, Delhi the minimum mixing height at M/s BEL

project area is 40-80m and maximum mixing height is 1000-1150m.




ToR-4(ix) Geological features and Geo-Hydrological status of the Study Area

shall Be Included

3.5.4 GEOLOGY OF THE STUDY AREA

The parent rock of Midnapore district is a mixture of metamorphic rocks of sedimentary

origin and igneous rocks both basic and acidic. Laterite, the characteristic formation of

the district, occupies a large tract. The thickness of the laterite varies from place to place

but is not known to exceed 15 m in this area. The sandy loam and loamy soil of reddish

or reddish-brown color covers the upper layers of almost the whole area. Three litho-

units are identified in study area:

(i) Laterite by its bluish red tone with coarse texture

(ii) Older Alluvium by its reddish tone with fine texture

(iii) Newer Alluvium

The rock is composed of disconnected vesicles. Multi-dimensional fractures may serve as

infiltration path for ground water replenishment, but not suitable for bulk supply of

water. The older alluvium formation consists of an intercalation of sandy and clayey

layers. Grain size varies from extremely coarse angular pebbles to fine sand and silt,

which have a good ground water bearing capability. The newer alluvium formation, on

the other hand, consists of a succession of clay and sand layers. Coarse sand bodies are

somewhat extensive and can act as excellent aquifers.

About 80% of the state's landmass is underlain by pre-cambrian rocks, the oldest rocks

in the earth's crust. The remaining area is composed of rocks belonging to Gondwanas,

Quarternary & Recent formations. The geological set up of the state is not only

favourable for discovery of wide variety of valuable ores and minerals but there is

distinct possibility of substantial increase in the resources.

The study area is not a compact unit and consists of widely, dissimilar tracts of

expansive and fairly open country, dotted with isolated peaks, inaccessible forests, river

valley and mountainous terrain. Broadly speaking it is an undulating table-land of

different elevations broken up by rugged hill ranges and cut off by torrential hill streams

and the river Kansabati. Varied landforms characterize the physiographic set-up of the

area. The area presents conspicuous physiographic variations marked by hills with

intervening intermontane valleys, isolated hillocks and flat to gently undulating plains.

The area is drained by the Kansabati river and its tributaries. The drainage pattern of the

area is dendritic. The general slope of the district is from north to south.

3.5.5 GEOMORPHOLOGYOF THE STUDY AREA

The geological map depicts 80% of geological formation is alluvium with sand silt and

clay, 10% Alluvium with fine sand, silt & clay and rest 10% in the North West of the area

is Lateritic soil.

The general topography of the study area is gradually undulating to flat where the area

is sloping from North and South. It is marked by low isolated hill ranges or hillocks.

Broadly speaking it is an undulating table-land of different elevations broken up by




rugged hill ranges and cut off by torrential hill streams and the river Kansabati. Because

of this undulating, hilly and sloping nature of landscape, the area is subject to rapid

runoff leading not only to soil erosion but also to scarcity of water for both agriculture

and drinking purpose. These are generally in the form of boulders or rocky knobs. The

direction of these hill ranges is from North West to South East. There are patches of

sheet rocks scattered all over the area with very little natural vegetative cover. The

average ground level of the study area is about 32 m above the MSL.

3.5.6 WATER ENVIRONMENT:

Hydrogeology

The spatial distribution of groundwater is not uniform, area has very shallow (1.5 m bgl)

to very deep (9.2 m bgl) water table. Deep water table occurs adjacent to the foot hill.

Higher well yields indicate relatively greater groundwater availability than areas with low

well yields.

Ground water in the area occurs under unconfined conditions in the top most weathered

mantle (5-22 m thick) of the different lithological units present in the region. The

occurrence and movement of groundwater in the deeper zones are controlled by

secondary porosities like joints, fractures, faults etc and also by the bedding planes in

the Gondwana sedimentary rocks. Ground water in the sedimentary rocks also occurs in

the primary porosity offered by interconnected joints in coarse grained sandstones, etc.

The faults and dykes present in the area are of particular significance as the faults

provide natural plane of seepage, while dykes have a tendency to impound water along

its gradient direction. The quality of ground water is, in general, good and is suitable for

domestic, industrial and irrigational purposes except in some cases where it is

contaminated with minor seepage water from the nearby coal mines, when it becomes

bacteriologically unsatisfactory.

Depth of Groundwater and Variations

Dug wells are more common in the study area. Nearly 30% of the wells are shallow type

and water table is within 8m depth. The deep dug wells are up to a depth of 17m. The

study of fluctuation in ground in groundwater levels by the groundwater board (CGWB)

reveals that the fluctuation is in the order of 1.85m to 3.90m during post-monsoon and

4.29m to 8m during pre-monsoon.

Surface Water

The main drainage network of the study area includes River Kansabati and its tributaries

in the form of canals and streams. The directions of flow of most of the rivers are

controlled by slope which in general is towards North to South East as it was evident

from the flow of the rivers in the study area and the availability of groundwater in the

region (Figure-3.14). Kansabati river is of high significance in the region as it caters to

the water requirements to most of the villages and the majority of the industrial units in

the region. Besides Kansabati river, other steams and the few tanks and small reservoirs

in the study area constitute the drainage in the study area.




ToR 4(x) Details of the drainage of the project up to 5 km radius of

study area. If the site is within 1km radius of any major river, peak

and lean season river discharge as well as flood occurrence frequency

based on peak rainfall data of the past 30 years. Details of the flood

level of the project site and maximum flood level of the river shall all

so be provided. (Mega green field projects)

Kangsabati river is about 16.7 km away from the project site. The HFL is 16.5 km from

the project site.In 1978, the area was slightly affected by flood but no flood hazard was

observed in the project site.

The drainage map in the study area shows the drainage pattern is from North West

uplands to Sowth East low lands, there are numerous water bodie and no measure River

flows within the study area, a small River called as Kalighai passing in the western part

of the area.

A number of water samples from river, pond, dug well & bore well were collected from

different locations within study area as shown in Figure- 3.12.The water samples were

collected and analyzed for physical, chemical and microbiological characteristics as per

CPCB guidelines and approved methods. The sampling station location is given in Table-

3.12 and the analysis results of surface and groundwater are given in the Table-3.12A &

3.12B

Gen. ToR 6 (iv) Surface water quality of nearby river (60m upstream

and downstream) and other surface drains at 8 locations as per

CPCB/MoEFCC guide line.

Gen.ToR 6 (vi) Ground water monitoring at minimum 8 locations shall

be included.

Surface water and Ground water are the essential elements of life process, Water plays

an important role in the world economy. Approximately 70% of the freshwater used

by humans goes to agriculture and rest 30% for domestic use. Water moves continually

through the water

cycle of evaporation, transpiration (evapotranspiration), condensation, precipitation,

and runoff.

So in the ecological point of view it an abiotic component which interacts with the life

forms for their existence (Human & Animals), so water parameters are taken for analysis

prior to setting of any industry, which can there after be evaluated wheter there is any

change in the water quality, if so then the source can be identified, and remediation can

be taken.

Table- 3.12: Surface and Groundwater Sampling Locations

Sl.

No. Code Location

Distance

(KM) Direction

W r t proposed plant

site

Surface water

1 SW1 60m Upstream of Kangsabati

River 16.9 N

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/World_economy

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Humans

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Agriculture

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Water_cycle

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Water_cycle




2 SW2 60m downstream of

Kangsabati River 16.6 N

3 SW3 Pond water of Nutandih 5.5 SW

4 SW4 Pond water of Dauka 1.04 E

5 SW5 Pond water of Rampura 0.7 S

6 SW6 Pond water of Bagberia 2.2 W

7 SW7 Pond water of Banspukuria 1.8 S

8 SW8 60m downstream of Kalighai

River 4.7 E

Groundwater

1 GW1 Dug well of Daharpur 5.89 S

2 GW2 Tube well of Nutandih 5.54 SW

3 GW3 Tube well of Silti 5.7 SW

4 GW4 Dug well of Keshariya 7.0 NW

5 GW5 Dug well of Bargopal 4.7 SE

6 GW6 Tube well of Belti 6.8 SW

7 GW7 Tubewell of Shalkha 7.0 N

8 GW8 Tubewell of Mirjapur 5.1 E

The analysis report of surface water and ground water is given in Annexure B and

Annexure C respectively.

Site selection criteria

Surface water: Nearest water bodies like pond, stream, were selected which are falling

into rivers during monsoon, so sampling points were taken adjacent to the plant for

surface water analysis.

Ground Water: Bore wells were selected in nareby villages with close proximity to the

industry.

Add Tor 13 Trace Metal in Water



Table 3.12 A Ground Water analysis result

PARAMETERS Unit Daharpur Nutandihi Silti Kesharuiya Bargopal Belti Salkha Mirjapur

Desirable Limits

Permissible Limit

Protocol

A. PHYSICAL

1 Colour (apparent) Hazen < 1.0 < 1.0 < 1.0 < 1.0 < 1.0 < 1.0 < 1.0 < 1.0 5 25 IS3025:PART04:1983

2 Odour

-- Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable

UO IS3025:PART05:1983

3 Taste

Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable

Agreeable

IS 3025:PART7&8:1984

4 Turbidity NTU 0.2 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.1 0.3 0.2 5 10 IS 3025:PART10:1984

5 pH -- 7.1 7.3 7.1 7.2 7.5 7.1 7.2 7.4 6.5-8.5 IS3025:PART11:1983

6 Electrical Conductivity (EC) μS/cm

532 588 580 609 626 547 592 549

7 Total Suspended Solids (TSS) mg/l

< 0.4 < 0.4 < 0.4 < 0.4 < 0.4 < 0.4 < 0.4 < 0.4

8 Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) mg/l

294 322 320 334 342 300 324 302 500 2000 IS 3025:PART10:1984

B. CHEMICAL

9 Calcium Hardness as CaCO3 mg/l

60 64 56 72 100 64 76 56 IS 3025:PART40:1991

(Reaff 2003)

10 Magnesium Hardness as CaCO3 mg/l

32 36 32 32 16 40 20 36 IS 3025:PART46:1994

11 Total Alkalinity as CaCO3 mg/l 74 80 70 84 94 82 78 74 200 600 IS 3025:PART23:1986

12 Total hardness Mg/l 92 100 88 104 116 104 96 92 200 600 IS 3025:PART21:2009

13 Residual Chlorine mg/l < 0.04 < 0.04 < 0.04 < 0.04 < 0.04 < 0.04 < 0.04 < 0.04 0.2 1 IS 3025:PART 26

14 Phenolic compound as C6H5OH mg/l

< 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001 0.001 No

Relaxation IS 3025:PART43:1992

15 Sulphate as SO4 mg/l 35.4 32.4 24.2 26 28.6 38.6 21.4 46.4 200 400 IS 3025:PART24:1986

16 Chloride as Cl mg/l 32 36 32.6 31.4 28.4 26.4 34.5 32.2 250 1000 IS 3025:PART32:1992

17 Cyanide as CN mg/l

< 0.01 <0.01 < 0.01 <0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 < 0.01 0.05 No


18 Selenium as Se mg/l

<0.005 < 0.005 <0.005 <0.005 <0.005 <0.005 <0.005 <0.005 0.01 No

Relaxation IS3025:PART 56:1988



19 Ammonia(as total ammonia-N), mg/l, Max mg/l

< 0.3 < 0.3 < 0.3 <0.3 < 0.3 < 0.3 < 0.3 < 0.3 0.5 No

Relaxation IS 25:PART:34:1988

20 Mineral oil mg/l

< 0.025 <0.025 < 0.025 < 0.025 < 0.025 < 0.025 < 0.025 < 0.025 0.5 No

Relaxation Clause 6 of IS 3025(Part 39)

21 Fluoride F- mg/l 0.08 0.28 0.29 0.29 0.28 0.28 0.31 0.32 1.0 1.5 IS 3025 (PART 60)

22 Calcium as Ca2+

mg/l 24 25.6 22.4 28.8 40 25.6 30.4 22.4 75 200 IS 3025:PART40:1991

23 Magnesium as Mg2+

mg/l 7.78 8.75 7.78 7.78 3.89 9.72 4.86 8.75 30 100 IS 3025:PART46:2008

24 Iron (Fe) mg/l

0.1 0.12 0.11 0.13 0.21 0.21 0.11 0.09 1 No

Relaxation IS 3025 (Part 53) : 2009

25 Nitrate mg/l

1.8 2.8 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.5 2.4 45 No

Relaxation IS 3025 (Part 34) : 2009

26 Copper (Cu) mg/l < 0.02 < 0.02 < 0.02 < 0.02 < 0.02 < 0.02 < 0.02 < 0.02 0.05 1.5 IS 3025:PART42:1991

27 Manganese (Mn) mg/l < 0.05 < 0.05 < 0.05 < 0.05 < 0.05 < 0.05 < 0.05 < 0.05 0.1 0.3 IS 3025:PART46:1994

28 Arsenic (As) mg/l 0.001 0.003 0.0025 0.0035 0.004 0.0018 0.0013 0.0011 0.1 IS 3025:PART37:2003

29 Lead (Pb) mg/l

< 0.005 < 0.005 < 0.005 < 0.005 < 0.005 < 0.005 < 0.005 < 0.005 0.01 No


30 Zinc (Zn) mg/l 0.012 0.06 0.015 0.015 0.025 0.012 0.016 0.01 5 15 IS 3025:PART49:2006

31 Chromium (Cr) mg/l

< 0.02 < 0.02 < 0.02 < 0.02 < 0.02 < 0.02 < 0.02 < 0.02 0.05 No

relaxation IS 3025:PART52:1988

32 Nickel as Ni mg/l

<0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 0.02 No


33 Mercury (Hg) mg/l

<0.0005 < 0.0005 <0.0005 <0.0005 <0.0005 <0.0005 <0.0005 <0.0005 0.001 No


34 Cadmium (Cd) mg/l

< 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001 0.003 No


35 Aluminium (Al) mg/l

< 0.02 <0.02 < 0.02 < 0.02 < 0.02 < 0.02 < 0.02 < 0.02 0.03 0.2 IS

3025:PART55:2003

36 Anionic Detergents as(IMBAS) mg/l

<0.1 < 0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 0.2 1.0 Annex KIS 13428

37 Boron (B) mg/l < 0.1 < 0.1 < 0.1 < 0.1 < 0.1 < 0.1 < 0.1 < 0.1 0.5 1.0 IS 3025:PART57:1992

C. BACTERIOLOGICAL

38 Total Coliform at 370C

MPN index / 100ml

Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent 10 50 IS 1622:1981 (Reaff 2003)




6.9

7

7.1

7.2

7.3

7.4

7.5

7.6

pH

Description

The analytical results of ground water samples at different location for various

parameters reveal that all the parameters comply with IS: 10500 standards indicating

their suitability for drinking and other purposes

Deliberation:

pH: pH of Groundwater in the area is neutral; alkalinity is primarily a measure of

dissolved bicarbonate and carbonates.The geological findings shows that lime stine

strata in not so well defined.

Electrical Conductivity: Electrical Conductivity depends on the amount of dissolved

solutes in the ground water; Water with high conductivity may have objectionable taste,

cause staining, and precipitate scale in pipes and containers. EC of water was between

532-626μS/cm

Total dissolved solids: (TDS) is the portion of total solids that has passed through a

filter, and the remaining water then evaporated, leaving the TDS residue. TDS is often

used as an indicator of the suitability of that groundwater for various uses. Total

dissolved solids values typically increase with sample depth or the distance that

groundwater has traveled from recharge area to sample site & anionic salts present. TDS

in the area is between 294-342 mg/l which fairly below the standard.

Heavy Metals: Metals are inorganic substances consisting of positive ions and

containing no carbon. Heavy metals, which may be found in groundwater, have a specific

gravity at least five times that of water. Ground water of that area have very less

concentration of heavy metals which is below the limits.




Hardness: hardness is defined as the concentrations of dissolved calcium and

magnesium expressed as an equivalent amount of calcium carbonate,iron also partially

responsible for hardness in water, Total hardness of ground water in that area was in

between 88-116 mg/l. wchich is morerately hard but suitable for consumption.



Table 3.12 B Surface Water analysis result

Sl. No.

Characteristics Unit IS:2296-1982

Class ‘C’ Limits

RiverKansabati U/s

River Kangsabati

D/s Nutandihi Dauka Rampura Bagberia

Banspukuria

River Kalighai

D/s Protocol

1 pH - 6.5-8.5 7.23 7.32 7.51 7.62 7.31 7.53 7.34 7.64

IS 3025:PART11:1983 (Reaff 2002)

2 DO mg/l 4 6.8 6.2 5.2 5.2 4.8 5.8 5.2 5.2 IS 3025:PART58:2006

3 BOD mg/l 3 5 8.4 6.8 8.2 8.8 8.2 8.2 7.4 IS 3025:PART44:1993

4 COD mg/l -- 28 32 18 20 25 22 24 32

APHA-23rd

Edition (5220 B):2017

5 Total Coli form

MPN/100 ml

5000 >1600 >1600 >1600 >1600 >1600 >1600 >1600 >1600 IS 1622:1981 (Reaff 2003)

6 Colour

True Colour Units

300 1 1.2 1.8 1.4 1.4 5.2 8.3 1 IS 3025:PART04:1983 (Reaff 2002)

7 Conductivity µS/cm -- 583 622 350 414 428 421 429 317

APHA-23rd

Edition (2510A):2017

8 Fluoride (as F) mg/l 1.5 0.32 0.31 0.33 0.29 0.34 0.38 0.36 0.24 IS 3025:PART60:2008

9 Cadmium mg/l 0.01 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 < 0.001 IS 3025:PART41:1992

10 Chloride (as Cl) mg/l 600 22.3 28.4 5.2 4.6 5.4 7.5 24.2 15.1 IS 3025:PART32:1988

11 Chromium (as Cr+6

) mg/l 0.05 <0.05 < 0.05 <0.05 < 0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 IS 3025:PART52:2003

12 Cyanide (as CN) mg/l 0.05 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 < 0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 IS 3025:PART27:1986

13 Total Dissolved Solid

mg/l 1500 334 386 236 228 265 230 236 148 IS 3025:PART15:1984 (Reaff 2002)

14 Selenium mg/l 0.05 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 IS 3025:PART56:2003

15 Sulphate (as SO4) mg/l 400 22.2 4 26.1 34.7 34.6 29.8 35.1 5.1 IS 3025:PART24:1986

16 Lead mg/l 0.1 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 < 0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 < 0.01 IS 3025:PART47:1994

17 Copper mg/l 1.5 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 < 0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 IS 3025:PART42:1992

18 Arsenic mg/l 0.2 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 < 0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 < 0.01

IS 3025:PART37:1988 (Reaff 1999)

19 Iron mg/l 50 0.52 1.22 0.06 0.12 0.09 0.08 0.2 0.32 IS 3025:PART53:2003



20

Phenolics compounds (as C6H5OH)

mg/l 0.005 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 IS 3025:PART43:1992

21 Zinc mg/l 15 0.026 0.07 0.11 0.1 0.01 0.1 0.2 0.06

IS 3025:PART49:1994 (Reaff 2003)

22 Anionic detergents (as MBAS)

mg/l 1 < 0.1 <0.1 <0.1 < 0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 < 0.1 Annex K of IS 13428:2005

23 Oil & grease mg/l 0.1 <0.025 < 0.025 <0.025 <0.025 <0.025 <0.025 <0.025 < 0.025 IS 3025:PART39:1991

24 Nitrate (as NO3) mg/l 50 3.6 1.32 2.4 1.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 2.3 IS 3025:PART34:1988




The analysis result of Surface Water:

Discussion

Heavy Metals: Heavy metals, which may result from chemical leaching of bedrock, water

drainage, and runoff from banks, the discharge of urban industrial and rural agricultural

wastewaters, are widely present in water and sediments. Heavy metals like Zn, Mg, Cu, Fe

are essential for the aquatic life process in low concentration, but metals like As, Hg, Cd are

not required even in low concentration. Except Iron in Teesta river iron was found to be high

may be due to mining activities of industries situated in the upstream, all other metal

concentration is below the prescribed limit.




Discussions

Nitrates in streams, ponds, and estuaries causes eutrification and damage to aquatic

life. Sulfates can be naturally occurring or the result of municipal or industrial discharges

water passing through rock or soil containing gypsum and other common minerals, or of

atmospheric deposition.Chlorides are not usually harmful to people; however, the

sodium part of table salt has been linked to heart and kidney disease. Sodium chloride

may impart a salty taste. rocks containing chlorides, agricultural runoff, wastewater from

industries,oil well wastes,effluent wastewater from wastewater treatment plants, road

salting, rocks containing chloride, agricultural runoff, wastewater from industries,oil well

wastes, effluent wastewater from wastewater treatment plants road salting. Most of the

pareameters are within the limit and within the norms of IS: 2296 Class ‘C’.except BOD




Dissolved Oxygen & Biochemical Oxygen demand

DO is the amount of gaseous oxygen dissolved in the water. Oxygen enters the water by

direct absorption from the atmosphere, by rapid movement, or as a waste product of

plant photosynthesis. Water temperature and the volume of moving water can

affect dissolved oxygen levels.Aquatic organisms need dissolved oxygen to respire It is

necessary for the survival of fish, invertebrates, bacteria, and underwater plants. DO is

also needed for the decomposition of organic matter.The DO content in all the locations

are between 4.8-6.8 mg/l, Rampura pond was a stagnant water pond so the DO

concentration was low i,e 4.8 mg/l.

BOD Biochemical Oxygen Demand is the amount of dissolved oxygen needed by

aerobic biological organisms to break down organic material present in a given water

sample at certain temperature over a specific time period.is the amount of oxygen

required to reduce the organic carbon present, BOD in the samples were between 5.0-

8.4 which is higer than the limit mostly because of discharge of sewage in to the surface

water.

Gen.ToR6 (v) whether the site falls near to polluted stretch of river

identified by CPCB/MoEFCC

Discussions

No stretch of river length has been identified as polluted stretch.

3.5.7 SOIL CHARACTERISTICS

Introduction

Soil analysis is done in the apprehension that if there is any threat to soil fertility, soil

erosion or change in land use after commissioning of the plant like spillage of oil,

hazardous materials, high surface runoff, escavation of top soil.




Agriculture is the main occupation in the study area. Hence it is essential to determine

the agriculture potential of the soil from the area and identify the impacts of urbanization

and the industrialization in the area.

Methodology

For studying the soil profile of the region 6 soil sampling points were selected to assess

the existing soil conditions in and around the project area. Soil samples were collected

during the winter season which was analyzed for physical and chemical properties. Soil

samples were collected from three different depths, 5-10 cm, 10-20 cm and 20-30 cm

below the surface. The samples were homogenized and the quantity was reduced by

coning and quartering method. The samples were packed in polyethylene bags and sent

to lab & analyzed.

West Bengal state represents a wide variety of geological, climatic, vegetational and

physiographic features that have an impact on the soil formation and various types of

soil. These soils have direct distinct morphological and physico-chemical properties that

influence the plant growth and the cropping pattern in the region.

Soil Types

The prevailing soil types in the study area are mostly alluvial and lateritic in nature. The

general characteristics of these soils are given below.

Alluvial soil

High in fertility

Newly formed alluvial soils are called ‘ Khader’ and old soils are ‘Bhanger’

Found mostly in flood plain and deltas of river Damodar and its tributaries.

Laterite soil

Very low in fertility

Formed in the monsoon climatic regions

Mixture of clay and red soils

Thus the sampling locations are decided based on one or more criteria listed below:

To determine the existing soil characteristics of the study area

To determine the impact on soil characteristics due to the activities of the existing

industries located in the study area

To determine the impact on agricultural productivity of soil due to the proposed

activity

Mojor land mass in the centre vertical area is covred by Fine Vertic Ochraqualfs in the

western position Fine Loamy coarse lomy soil is covered, in the extreme Eastern area

Fine Typic Haploquipts soil is found.

The details of the soil sampling locations are given in Table- 3.13.

Tor-6(viii) Soil Characteristics As Per CPCB Guidelines.

Soil samples were collected from agricultural fields, pasure lands within the buffer zone.

As maximum land use is for agricultural use so Soil samples were mostly collected from

crop fields.

Table- 3.13: Details of Soil Quality Monitoring Locations

Station

Code

Location Distance(Kms) Direction Land Use

(w.r.t project site)




S1 Project site -- --

S2 Nutandih 5.54 SW Crop Land

S3 Silti 5.5 SW Crop Land

S4 Keshariya 7.0 N Grass

Land/Grazing field

S5 Bargopal 4.6 SE Crop Land

S6 Belti 6.8 SW Crop Land

The analytical results of the soil samples collected during the study period are

summarized in Table 3.13 A.



Table 3.13 A Soil Analysis Results

Sl.No Parameter Project site Nutandihi Silti Kesharuiya Bargopal Belti

1 Colour Yellowish Grey Yellowish Grey Yellowish Grey Yellowish Grey Yellowish Grey Yellowish Grey

2 Texture Silty Clayey Loam Silty Clayey Loam Silty Clayey Loam Silty Clayey Loam Silty Clayey Loam Silty Clayey Loam

3 Water holding capacity % 46.4 46.8 45.8 46.3 45.7 47.1

4 pH 7.21 7.23 7.41 7.28 7.96 7.12

5 Electrical conductivityµmhos/Cm

389 387 378 394 401 388

6 Co-efficient of permeability m

3/Sec. At

20OC

1.2x10-3 1.2x10-4 1.2x10-3 1x10-4 1.1x10-4 1.2x10-3

7 Bulk Density Gm/cc 1.16 1.13 1.21 1.2 1.2 1.3

8 Porosity % 23 22 24 22 21 25

9 Organic carbon % 1.13 1.14 1.12 1.19 1.13 1.17

10 Calcium % 2.5 3.6 3.7 0.87 1.02 0.98

11 Organic matter % 2.02 2 1.98 5.05 4.95 5.23

12 Phosphate (PO4) mg/Kg 0.019 0.018 0.016 0.014 0.007 0.015

13 Iron Fe mg/Kg 1258 1728 1087 12580 13258 11782

14 Manganese mg/Kg 1174 1392 1204 1274 1328 1167

15 Chromium mg/Kg 0.01 0.02 0.022 0.01 0.02 0.022

16 Potassium % 0.08 0.07 0.06 0.04 0.06 0.08

17 Total Nitrogen % 0.019 0.022 0.023 0.095 0.088 0.079

18 Texture

I Sand %w/w 29 32 30 27 25 28

Ii Silt %w/w 38 39 41 44 45 48

iii Clay %w/w 23 29 29 29 30 24

Test Method A text Book Of Soil Analysis By T.C.Baruah & H.P.Barthakur



0

2000

4000

6000

8000

10000

12000

14000

in m

g/kg

Iron

Manganese

Chromium

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

Porosity

Co-efficient of

permeability

Bulk Density




Discussion

Porosity: is a measure of how much open space is there inbetween soil particles, this

space can be between grains or within cracks or cavities of the rock. Porocity in the area

varies from 21%-23% which is moderately porous.

Permeability: is how ease can water pass through the pores, here in the analysis

report permability is very low as because clay percentage is more and alluvium deposit is

more. Permwbility is low and is between 1x10-4 to 1.2x10-3 as the soil texture is clayey.

Nitrogen Potassium Phosphorus: Nitrogen in soil comes through physical

(atmospheric nitrogen fixation), biological fixation and through biological process from

bacteria & blue green algae. Nitrogen range is between 0.019% to 0.095%.

Phosphorous: Phosphorous is mainly derived from rocks and bones as natural source.

Phosphorous percentage ranges between 0.007% to 0.019%.

Potassium:It is mainly derived from rocks, mineral surface and animal

wastes.Potassium ranges between 0.04% to 0.08%.

These three element plays a vital role in plant growth, generally all these elemets are

supplemented artificially to the crop fields, the area has level of phosphorus,

monoculture of a crop has resulted in depletion of natural minerals in that area.

The soil fertility can be increased naturally by growing multiple crops and intercropping

ang growing leguminous plants.

The soils of the study area are predominantly yellowish gray in colour and Silty loamy in

Texture and also slightly alkaline/neutral in nature. The analysis results of the soil

parameters are within limits. The bulk density of the study area ranges from 1.13 to

1.3gm/cc. The other nutrient contents like nitrogen, potassium and phosphate content of

the soil is very low.

3.5.8 NOISE ENVIRONMENT:

Tor-6(vii) Noise Levels Monitoring At 8 Locations Within The Study

Area.

The physical description of sound concerns its loudness as a function of frequency. Noise

in general is an unwanted sound, which is composed of many frequency components of

various types of loudness level distributed over the audible frequency range. Sound

Pressure Levels (SPL’s) are measured in decibels on the A-weighted scale, dB (A), where

the A-weighting scheme accounts for the sensitivities of the human ear over the audio

spectrum.

Reconnaissance Survey and Identification of Sampling Locations

A preliminary reconnaissance survey was undertaken to identify the major noise

generating sources in the area. The noise at different noise generating sources based on

the industrial activities, commercial activities, traffic, noise at sensitive areas like

hospitals and schools have been identified. The noise monitoring has been conducted at

all the identified location in the study area once in a season during the study period and

Measured noise levels, displayed as a function of time, is useful for describing the

acoustical climate of the community. Noise levels recorded at each station with a time

interval of about 60 minutes are computed for equivalent noise levels. Equivalent noise

level is a single number descriptor for describing time varying noise levels. The

equivalent noise level is defined mathematically as




Leq = 10 Log L / T∑ (10Ln/10)

Where, L = Sound pressure level at function of time dB (A)

T = Time interval of observation

Noise levels during the night time generally drop, therefore to compute Equivalent noise

levels for the night time, noise levels are increased by 10 dB (A) as the night time high

noise levels are judged more annoying compared to the day time. Noise levels at a

particular station are represented as Day Night equivalents (Ldn). Day Night equivalent

is the single number index designed to rate environmental noise on daily / 24 hourly

basis.

Mathematically Ldn is given by

Ldn = 10 Log {1/24 (16 x 10(Ld/10) + 8 x 10(Ln/10)}

Where Ld = A weighed equivalent for day time period (6am-10 pm)

Ln = A weighed equivalent for night time period (10 pm to 6 am)

Assessment of Noise Levels

The main objective of noise level assessment is to identify all the sources acceptable and

unacceptable to the study region. The acoustical environment varies dynamically in

magnitude and character throughout most communities. The noise level variation can be

temporal, spectral and spatial. The maximum impact of noise is felt on urban areas,

which is mostly due to the commercial / industrial activities and vehicular movement

during peak hours of the day.

The assessment of noise pollution in the study area has been carried out keeping the

above said considerations. The existing status of noise levels within the study zone has

been undertaken through reconnaissance, identification of existing noise sources, land

use pattern for monitoring of baseline noise levels.

Sources of Noise

An inventory was conducted for evaluating the sources of noise generation in the study

area. It was observed that the major sources of noise generation in the study area were

from the Industries, Commercial activities and vehicular movements etc.

Typical considerations in environmental noise assessment can be divided into two

separate categories, one related to noise sources and other related to potential

receivers. Two quantities are needed to describe completely the strength of the source.

1- Sound Power Levels

2- Directivity

Sound Power levels measure the total sound power radiated by the source in all

directions and directivity is a measure of the difference in radiation with direction. The

concept of sound power level and directivity index makes it possible to calculate the

sound pressure level (BSPL) created by source. The impact of noise sources on

surrounding community depends on:




Characteristics of noise sources (instantaneous, intermittent or continuous in

nature). It is well known that a steady noise is not as annoying as one that is

continuously varying in loudness.

The time of the day at which noise occurs, for example, loud noise levels at night

in residential areas are not acceptable because of sleep disturbance.

The location of the noise source, with respect to noise sensitive land use, that

determines the loudness and period of noise exposure.

The environmental impact of noise can have several effects varying from Noise Induced

Hearing Loss (NIHL) to annoyance depending on loudness of noise levels. The

Environmental Impacts of noise from the plant activities is carried out by taking into

consideration the various factors:

Potential damage to hearing

Annoyance

Potential physiological responses

General community responses

Noise Levels in the Study Area

Nine noise monitoring stations were identified for the assessment of the existing noise

levels keeping in view the nature of the monitoring location i.e. residential areas in

villages, schools, bus stations etc. The distance and the direction of the noise monitoring

locations with reference to the Project site is given in the Table -3.14.

Eight locations were selected within one km radius around the plant boundary so that

immedeate impact can be measured.

Station

Code

Location Direction Distance (kms) Description of

Location

(w.r.t project site)

N1 Boundary wall of NE side - 0 Proximity to NH

16

N2 Boundary wall of NW side - 0 Proximity to

Railway Track

N3 Boundary wall of SE side - 0 Proximity to NH

16

N4 Boundary wall of SW side - 0 Proximity to

Railway Track

N5 Rampura Batitaki SW 0.58 Settlement

N6 Dauka NW 0.86 Settlement

N7 Shyamalpur W 0.32 Settlement

N8 Tentulmuri E 0.94 Settlement




Table -3.14. Noise Monitoring Values

Station

code Location village Lday Lnight Ldaynight

N1 Boundary wall of NE side 52.3 43.3 51.8

N2 Boundary wall of NW side 54.2 43.5 42.3

N3 Boundary wall of SE side 56.1 44.6 44.2

N4 Boundary wall of SW side 54.4 42.2 41.9

N5 Rampura Batitaki 59.2 41.7 47.1

N6 Dauka 57.3 44.1 45.2

N7 Shyamalpur 55.7 42.4 43.2

N8 Tentulmuri 53.6 44.1 43.2

CPCB

Norms

For Industrial Area

75

70

For Residential Area

55

45

Discussion

The noise reading taken were within the limits as there is no such noise generating

source except vehicular movement. During fesivals the noise level increases.

3.6 TRAFFIC STUDIES:

Gen. ToR 6 (ix) Traffic study of the area, type of vehicles, frequency

of vehicles for transportation of material, additional traffic due to

project, parking arrangement etc.




Traffic study

M/s Bengal Energy Ltd has sheds for parking of cars and two wheelers for employees

and visitors near administrative building and various shops. Sheds have been ear

marked for different users. These sheds are inside plant boundary having large vacant

space in front of sheds for movement of vehicles.

Raw material & product transportation vehicles have different entry route and space has

been earmarked for parking of heavy vehicles with arrangement of rest room for drivers.

This is near main gate inside plant boundary near security post. The area has to be

further developed to accommodate additional vehicles due to expansion of project.

Traffic load for proposed expansion.

For study of additional transport load on existing road NH-16 was selected at 1km from

Rampura toll plaza through which raw material and products for the project will pass.

Study was made for two days in November 2017, 28th Tuesday and 29th Wednesday and

again another two days 22nd January Monday and 23rd January 2018.

Traffic count was monitored continuously for 24 hours each day. Both way traffic

movements were counted which consisted both heavy and light vehicles as well as two

wheelers and three wheelers.

The average hourly readings have been tabulated below.




Time in hours No. of Vehicles for 4 days averaged hourly

Multi

axils

vehicle

Heavy

Motor

Vehicles

Light

Commerci

al Vehicles

Cars Three

/Two

Wheeler

s

Total

06.00-07.00 18 250 48 38 15 369

07.00-8.00 15 240 35 45 30 365

08.00-09.00 13 200 50 60 25 348

09.00-10.00 14 185 40 55 33 327

10.00-11.00 18 180 25 60 35 318

12.00-13.00 18 298 20 40 12 388

13.00-14.00 19 265 15 55 9 363

14.00-15.00 20 182 20 40 5 267

15.00-16.00 20 178 34 67 7 306

16.00-17.00 19 182 20 60 6 287

17.00-18.00 15 176 22 50 20 283

18.00-19.00 26 180 24 40 22 292

19.00-20.00 20 198 26 60 24 328

20.00-21.00 20 138 20 55 20 253

21.00-22.00 22 175 16 38 18 269

22.00-23.00 26 210 20 46 10 312

23.00-24.00 22 298 22 20 0 362

24.00-1.00 15 265 20 20 0 320

1.00-2.00 10 214 20 15 0 259

2.00-3.00 15 210 15 18 0 258

3.00-4.00 18 215 25 45 0 303

4.00-5.00 12 228 28 45 3 316

5.00-6.00 15 240 35 40 8 338

TOTAL 410 4907 600 1012 302 7231

Equivalent

PCU

1845 16,680 600 1012 227 20,364

Heavy motor vehicles constituted largest traffic volume i.e. 68% followed by light

commercial vehicles and passenger cars 14%.

M/s BEL will require 16,80,000 TPA coking coal imported, 16,05,130 TPA non-coking

coal, 19,12,173 TPA Iron ore lump, 8,00,000 TPA I/o fines, 80,417 TPA Dolomite and

1,20,870 TPA lime stone

The company has its railway siding inside project boundary and Raw material will be

transported through rail and unloaded at Rly.siding. It is expected that sometimes lime

stone and Dolomite will be transported on road using environmental compatible

Euro/Bharat II/III vehicles. Hence maximum 2 lakh TPA raw material and 1.0 MTPA,

billet will be transported through road, which translate to 3,333TPD i.e. 200 trucks/day

and taking to and from into consideration 400 additional heavy motor vehicle (1360

PCU)will be on road due to project.




Taking 1,355 employees and their family into consideration, school going buses, it is

expected that another 2000 PCU will be on road. Although it will be on other connecting

roads, we consider 1000 PCU on NH-16., totaling 2360 say additional 2,500 PCU load on

NH-16. Total PCU load 22,864 and level of service B, being 40,000 PCU, the total load on

NH-16 will be only 50% of its rated capacity.

Design Service Volume for Four-Lane Highways in PCUs per day

Terrain Design Service Volume for Four-Lane Highways in PCUs

per day

Level of Service 'B' Level of Service 'C'

Plain and rolling 40,000 60,000

Mountainous and steep 20,000 30,000

Source: Manual of specification & standard, Planning commission, GOI

3.7 ECOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT OF THE 10KM. RADIUS OF THE STUDY AREA:

Gen. ToR 6(x) Detailed description of Flora & Fauna (terrestrial and

aquatic) existing in the study area shall be given with special

reference to rare, endemic and endangered species. If schedule- I

fauna is found within the study area, a wild life conservation plan

shall be prepared and furnished.

3.7.1 Ecological Overview

Ecology comprises of abiotic factors as air, water, land and forces of nature like light,

gravity and molecular energy, biotic components including human beings, animals,

plants and microorganisms. The relationship among the biotic & abiotic factor is known

as Ecology.

Nature has supported and maintained life on earth since time immemorial and will

continue to do so in the future. But, once the alteration of nature’s initial stage occurs,

its ability to revert back is lost. Over the years ecological and along with it the loss of

biological diversity has become a national and a global concern. Ecological studies with

theconcern for developmentwithout dreading socio-economic and environmental

conditions and the realization that there is a limit to nature’s sustainability.One of the

important aspects of Environmental Impact Assessment in the view to conserve

environmental quality, biodiversity and sustainability.

The phyto-diversity and dynamics of vegetation of the area includes the composite

growth and development of green belt in a habitat with particular circumscription and

selected composition. It may vary from site to site even from place to place due to

fluctuation of ecological factors as the episode of the population in every moment at

every corner, like monsoon filled by herbs, shrubs, trees and parasites of varied kinds

but during winter most of the elements become vanish due to unfavorable conditions.

During summer a few of them are present due to the acclimatization in the said habitat.

The dominancy is found in case of trees rather than shrubs and followed by herbs.

Forest Cover:




As per classification, the forest under Medinipur Forest Division Sal is the dominant

species, Sal coppice Forests, Open scrub forest with sporadic sal, open forest with

sporadic sal and thorny forest, plantations. The chief associate of Sal (Shorea robusta)

care Pterocarpus marsupium, Madhuca latifolia, Diospyros melanoxylon , Lagerstroemia

pervifolialora, Terminalia tomentosa, Anogeissus latifolia, Bombax ceiba. Adina cordifolia,

Buchanania latifola, Garuga pinnata

3.7.2 Objective:

The main objectives of ecological environmental study are:

1. To assess the nature and distribution of vegetation in and around the

study area;

2. To assess the distribution of animal life in the study area;

3. To assess the present status of geomorphology:

4. To assess the present status of water and soil quality;

5. To assess the present status meteorology:

6. To assess the biodiversity and to understand the resource potential of that

area; and

7. To understand the nature of pollution and to assess the impact of pollution

on the ecosystem.

For this study a team of Global Tech Enviro Experts Pvt. Ltd. visited the site for

identifying & collection of data. The different methods adopted for the study were as

follows:-

A. Primary data was generated through:

1. Preparing a general check list of all plants encountered in the study area and lists

all the plants by visual observations.

2. Phytological studies by using list count quadrant method and the quadrate of 100

m2 size was employed for this study.

3. Bird populations were studied by taking random reading at every location, by

naked eye, binoculars and photographs. The droppings, calls, nests also studied for

their identification.

4. Observing mammals, amphibians, and reptiles moulted skins, dropping, burrows,

pugmarks, calls and other signs.

5. Noting the status and quality of plant growth, and any symptoms like defoliation,

deformities, chlorosis, necrosis, warping, reduced vigour and infection by parasites

and insects by visual observation.

6. Aquatic body study of phytoplankton, zooplankton by plankton nets. Fish of the

aquatic bodies were studied by locating local fishermen while netting and local fish

markets.

7. Local inhabitants were interviewed about the plant and animal of the local areas.

Criteria for Site Selection

While selecting the areas for detailed studies on terrestrial and aquatic ecology following

considerations were made-

Location of the plant and the predominant wind directions

Different landscapes and land use patterns viz.




Natural vegetation

Agri-ecosystems and surrounding areas

Water bodies- lakes and canals, ponds etc

Topography and the geology of the area

Guidelines from Ministry of Environment and Forests, Govt. of India

Based on the above parameters sampling sites were selected and sampling was carried

at different locations.

Selection of Methodology for the study:

To achieve the above objectives a detailed study of the area was undertaken in 10 km

radius area from proposed project site as centre. The flora was categorized using life-

form categories as per Raunkiaer system of Classification, as given below;

Phanerophyte : Trees & Shrubs

Chamaephyte : Herbs (Perennial, bud resting above the ground)

Hemicryptophyte : Grass

Cryptophyte : Herbs

Geophyte : Herbs, roots & shoot are storage organs

Helophyte : Grows in wet soil

Hydrophyte : Aquatic Flora

5) Theophyte : Cereals & Pulses

6) Epiphyte : Grows on another plants

7) Aerophyte : Epiphytes with no functional roots

The vegetation was classified as per Champion & Seth 5B-C Dry Sal"

1. Literature Review, Research & Published Paper

3. Websites of www.bsienvis.nic.in, www.wiienvis.nic.in

3.7.3 Floral Characteristics

The plants were surveyed, identified and taxonomical characters evaluated. The

importance value indexes for identifying the characters were determined. The study

included Quadrate method. Authenticated list is annexed in Table No.

Sampling was done on random basis. Flora like Natural Trees, Introduced Avenue and

Garden trees, Climbers, grasses and bamboos etc. and fauna like insects, butterflies,

mollusks, amphibian, reptiles, birds and mammals etc.

Plankton Analysis

The physical and chemical characteristics of water affect the abundance, species

composition, stability and productivity of the indigenous populations of aquatic

organisms. The biological methods used for assessing water quality include collection,

counting and identification of aquatic organisms; and processing and interpretation of

biological data. The work involving plankton analysis would help in:

Explaining the cause of colour and turbidity and the presence of objectionable

odour, tastes and visible particles in waters.

The interpretation of chemical analyses.




Identifying the nature, extent and biological effects of pollution.

Providing data on the status of an aquatic system on a regular basis.

Plankton: A microscopic community of plants (phytoplankton) and animals

(zooplankton), found usually free floating, swimming with little or no resistance to water

currents, suspended in water they occur as unicellular, colonial or filamentous forms

and is mostly photosynthetic and is grazed upon by the zooplankton and other

organisms occurring in the same environment. Zooplankton principally comprise of

microscopic protozoans, rotifers, cladocerans and copepods. The species assemblage of

zooplankton also may be useful in assessing water quality.

Plankton, particularly phytoplankton, has long been used as indicators of water quality.

Because of their short life spans, planktons respond quickly to environmental changes.

They flourish both in highly eutrophic waters while a few others are very sensitive to

organic and/or chemical wastes.

Plankton net: The plankton net is a field-equipment used to trap plankton. It has a

polyethylene filter of a defined mesh size and a graduated measuring jar attached to the

other end. A handle holds the net. The mesh size of the net determines the size range of

the plankton trapped

Sampling Procedure: Plankton net number 25 of mesh size 60 µm was used for

collecting samples. 100 litres of water was measured in a graduated bucket and filtered

through the net and concentrated in a 100 ml bottle. Samples were collected as close to

the water surface as possible in the morning hours and preserved for further analysis.

The following parameters were primarily considered in the study and computed

in the following way:

5) Frequency: the degree of dispersion of individual species in an area is called

frequency. It is express as percentage occurrence.

iii) Abundance: This is the study of number of individual of different species in

community per unit area.

iv) Relative Abundance: it is the determination of the percentage of individual of one

general in composition to the total of all individual as a given area.

v) Density: I t is the numerical strength of a species.

(II) Species Diversity Index: species diversity is biological community based on presence

of a wide variety of species. It is expressed by Shannon-Weaver Index (1948) in the

following way:

Number of quadrates in which a species occurs

Frequency (f) = ------------------------------------------------------------x100

Total number of quadrates sampled

Total No. of individuals of a species in all quadrate

Abundance (A) = --------------------------------------------------------------------

Total number of quadrates in which the species occurs

Total No. of individuals species in the sample




Relative Abundance (A) = ---------------------------------------------------------

Number of quadrat in which a species occurs

Total No. of individuals of a species in all quadrates

Density (D) = ----------------------------------------------------------------

` Total No. of quadrat sampled

Species Diversity Index: species diversity is biological community based on presence

of a wide variety of species. It is expressed by Shannon-Weaver Index (1948) in the

following way:

s

H = Σ-(Pi×lnPi)

I = 1

H = Species diversity index

S = the number of species in a sample

Pi = (ni / N)

N = the total number of individuals of all the species in a

sample

ni = the number of individuals of a species.

Simpson’s Diversity Index: (D) is a composite index, which depends both on the

number of individual species & the total number of all species, and hence, it is logically

in consonance with the definition of bio-diversity, the bigger the value of D, the lower

the diversity

Number of individual Species i

Total Numer of all species N,

(D)=1-[∑ (n i/N) 2]



Table 3.16 Quantitative Assessment of Natural Plant species & Calculation of Biodiversity Index of Natural Plant Species

in the study area

SL NAME OF TREES

QUADRAT NUMBER

TO

TA

L

FR

EQ

UE

NC

Y %

DEN

SIT

Y

AB

UN

DA

NC

E

Pi

= n

i/N

(P

i)2

Ln

Pi

Sh

an

no

n

Div

ersit

y

In

dex

H=

-

(P

iXLn

Pi)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1 Acacia auriculaeformis 2 5 1 3 2 2 1 16 70 1.6 2.3 0.05 0.00 -3.03 0.15

2 Acacia chundra 1 1 3 1 2 8 50 0.8 1.6 0.02 0.00 -3.72 0.09

3 Albizia lebbeck 1 1 2 2 2 8 50 0.8 1.6 0.02 0.00 -3.72 0.09

4 Alianthus grandis 4 1 1 6 30 0.6 2.0 0.02 0.00 -4.01 0.07

5 Alstonia scholaris 2 1 1 4 30 0.4 1.3 0.01 0.00 -4.41 0.05

6 Anacardium occidentale 5 5 10 0.5 5.0 0.02 0.00 -4.19 0.06

7 Anogeissus latifolia 1 1 2 4 30 0.4 1.3 0.01 0.00 -4.41 0.05

8 Aphanamixis polystachya 1 1 2 4 40 0.4 1.0 0.01 0.00 -4.41 0.05

9 Arthocarpus chaplasha 1 1 10 0.1 1.0 0.00 0.00 -5.80 0.02

10 Artocarpus integrifolia 2 2 10 0.2 2.0 0.01 0.00 -5.11 0.03

11 Azadirachta indica 2 2 1 4 4 3 16 60 1.6 2.7 0.05 0.00 -3.03 0.15

12 Bombax ceiba 2 2 1 5 30 0.5 1.7 0.02 0.00 -4.19 0.06

13 Bridelia retusa 1 1 2 20 0.2 1.0 0.01 0.00 -5.11 0.03

14 Buchanania lanzan 1 3 4 20 0.4 2.0 0.01 0.00 -4.41 0.05

15 Butea monosperma 5 3 11 1 2 6 5 3 36 80 3.6 4.5 0.11 0.01 -2.22 0.24

16 Callicarpa arborea 1 1 10 0.1 1.0 0.00 0.00 -5.80 0.02

17 Careya arborea 1 2 3 20 0.3 1.5 0.01 0.00 -4.70 0.04

18 Cassia fistula 2 2 4 20 0.4 2.0 0.01 0.00 -4.41 0.05

19 Cassia siamia 3 1 4 20 0.4 2.0 0.01 0.00 -4.41 0.05

20 Chukrasia tabularis 1 1 2 20 0.2 1.0 0.01 0.00 -5.11 0.03

21 Dalbergia sissoo 1 1 10 0.1 1.0 0.00 0.00 -5.80 0.02

22 Dillenia indica 2 1 3 20 0.3 1.5 0.01 0.00 -4.70 0.04

23 Duabanga sonneratioides 1 1 2 20 0.2 1.0 0.01 0.00 -5.11 0.03



24 Elaeocarpus floribundus 1 1 10 0.1 1.0 0.00 0.00 -5.80 0.02

25 Elaeocarpus lanceaefolius 2 2 1 5 30 0.5 1.7 0.02 0.00 -4.19 0.06

26 Emblica officinalis 1 2 1 1 1 1 7 60 0.7 1.2 0.02 0.00 -3.85 0.08

27 Eucalyptus hybrid 3 3 10 0.3 3.0 0.01 0.00 -4.70 0.04

28 Garuga pinnata 1 1 2 20 0.2 1.0 0.01 0.00 -5.11 0.03

29 Gmelina arborea 1 1 10 0.1 1.0 0.00 0.00 -5.80 0.02

30 Hadina cordifolia 1 1 10 0.1 1.0 0.00 0.00 -5.80 0.02

31 Heliotropium indicum 1 1 2 4 20 0.4 2.0 0.01 0.00 -4.41 0.05

32 Lagerstroemia 112ulphur 1 1 2 20 0.2 1.0 0.01 0.00 -5.11 0.03

33 Lagerstroemia parviflora 1 1 2 3 7 40 0.7 1.8 0.02 0.00 -3.85 0.08

34 Lannea coromandelica 1 1 2 20 0.2 1.0 0.01 0.00 -5.11 0.03

35 Lgterstroemia parviflora 2 3 6 11 30 1.1 3.7 0.03 0.00 -3.40 0.11

36 Macaranga sp. 2 2 1 1 6 40 0.6 1.5 0.02 0.00 -4.01 0.07

37 Madhuca Indica 2 1 3 1 2 2 3 1 15 80 1.5 1.9 0.05 0.00 -3.09 0.14

38 Mallotus philippensis 1 1 10 0.1 1.0 0.00 0.00 -5.80 0.02

39 Pongamia pinnata 1 1 1 1 4 40 0.4 1.0 0.01 0.00 -4.41 0.05

40 Premna sp. 3 3 10 0.3 3.0 0.01 0.00 -4.70 0.04

41 Pterocarpus marsupium 2 2 10 0.2 2.0 0.01 0.00 -5.11 0.03

42 Pterygota alata 1 1 1 2 5 40 0.5 1.3 0.02 0.00 -4.19 0.06

43 Sapium sebiferum 1 1 10 0.1 1.0 0.00 0.00 -5.80 0.02

44 Schima wallichii 2 2 1 5 30 0.5 1.7 0.02 0.00 -4.19 0.06

45 Semicarpus anacardium 1 1 1 2 5 2 12 60 1.2 2.0 0.04 0.00 -3.31 0.12

46 Shorea robusta 3 1 2 2 1 1 2 12 70 1.2 1.7 0.04 0.00 -3.31 0.12

47 Sterculia villosa 1 2 3 20 0.3 1.5 0.01 0.00 -4.70 0.04

48 Syzygium cumini 5 2 4 11 30 1.1 3.7 0.03 0.00 -3.40 0.11

49 Syzygium jambolum 1 1 2 6 4 14 50 1.4 2.8 0.04 0.00 -3.16 0.13

50 Tectona grandis 2 3 1 6 30 0.6 2.0 0.02 0.00 -4.01 0.07

51 Terminalia alata 1 1 2 20 0.2 1.0 0.01 0.00 -5.11 0.03

52 Terminalia bellirica 1 2 1 2 2 8 50 0.8 1.6 0.02 0.00 -3.72 0.09

53 Terminalia chebula 1 1 1 1 1 5 50 0.5 1.0 0.02 0.00 -4.19 0.06

54 Terminalia elliptica 1 2 3 1 7 40 0.7 1.8 0.02 0.00 -3.85 0.08

55 Terminilia arjuna 2 2 3 4 5 1 17 60 1.7 2.8 0.05 0.00 -2.97 0.15

56 Tetrameles nudiflora 1 2 3 20 0.3 1.5 0.01 0.00 -4.70 0.04

57 Toona 112ulphur 1 1 20 0.1 0.5 0.00 0.00 -5.80 0.02

∑ 31 37 51 31 33 26 37 28 31 25 330 1750 33 99.4 1 0.04 -252.45 3.67




Shanon’s Diversity Index H=3.67. Shanon’s Diversity Index was calculated taking 57 species of

trees in the study area with 10 quadrats

Simpson Diversity index D= 0.032624

Simpson Index is moderately nearer to one so the diversty of species in not very rich.

Discussion

78 types of terrestrial angiosperms species were encountered in the study area, 57

species were encountered in quadrat counts. The other species were among herbs 25,

grass 12, climbers 21, cultivated plants including fruit bearing ,ornamental, avenue

plantation 32. In faunal species wild types were 13, reptiles and snakes 10 and avi fauna

47 species were noted.

From the Shanon’s index it is found that the area is moderately rich in species diversity,

as the land mass is in a plain deltaic area, so most of the land is used for paddy

cultivation.

Creation of green belt and promotion of avenue plantation with fruit bearing trees may

attract more birds to increase the aesthetic.

3.8 SOCIO-ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT

ToR 6(xi) Socio-Economic status of the study area

The growth of industrial sectors and infrastructure developments in and around the

agriculture dominant areas, villages and towns are bound to create its impact on the

socio- economic aspects of the local population. The impacts may be positive or negative

depending upon the developmental activity. To assess the impacts on the socio-

economics of the local people, it is necessary to study the existing socio-economic status

of the local population, which will be helpful for making efforts to further improve the

quality of life in the study area. The section delineates the overall appraisal of the

socially relevant attributes.

The data collection on the impact of industrialization on the socio-economic aspects in

the study area has been done through analysis of various secondary data and also

supplemented by the primary data generated through the process of limited door to door

socio- economic survey. The demographic and socio-economic profiles are collected from

the Primary Census Abstract for the district of Paschim Burdwan, West Bengal.

Methodology

The methodology adopted in the assessment of socio-economic condition is as given

below:

To evaluate the parameters defining the socio-economic conditions of the

people.Analysis of the identified social attributes like population distribution, sex ratio,

literacy rate, occupational structure, availability of public utilities etc through literature

like the census of India, District Census Statistical Handbooks and from records of

National Informatics Centre etc.

3.8.1 OBJECTIVE:

The main objectives are as follows:




To assess the impact of the project on agricultural situation;

To examine the impact of the project on pattern of demand;

To assess the in impact of the project on consumption pattern;

To examine employment and income effects of the project;

To explore the possibility of local industrialization as an offshoot of the project;

To examine the effect of the project on education status of the people in the

study area

To judge peoples’ perception regarding the project

3.8.2 DEMOGRAPHIC PATTERN

The socioeconomic features around the 10 km radius of the plant site have been

collected through primary and secondary data collection. The study area covers 129

villages and 95622 inhabitants. Out of the total population SC population is 20.1%, ST

31.0% and other 48.9% The demographic and socioeconomic profiles are collected from

the Primary Census Abstract for the study area of district Paschim Burdwan, West

Bengal.

3.8.3 SEX RATIO

The sex ratio (nos. of male per thousand females) is 976 in the study area (based on the

Census 2011. From above representation of number of male and female of different classes

in the society in the study area, indicates that a in about 30% of the villages the population

distribution is very healthy with the ST and SC women numbers standing at par with the

male population. This distribution will give a normalized population distribution when

plotted for individual villages and hence a healthy sign of development.

3.8.4 LITERACY:

The Literacy rate of study area is 65% of the total population. The above data plot

showing the ratio of men to female literate and illeterates in the study area shows that

though the villages lack the facilities for education yet the picture of female literate (57

%) and male literate( 72 %) gives a encouraging picture of the development of the area.

Yet the literacy level is still gloomy with 35 % of the total population being illiterate.

3.8.5 OCCUPATIONAL PATTERN

The workers in the study area comprised of 52.8 % main workers, 47.1% marginal

workers and 0.1% non-workers. The main workers mainly comprise of cultivators and

agricultural labourers.

3.8.6 GAP ANALYSIS

Major source of drinking water in the villages are tube wells, dug wells and hand

pumps. In summer, there is problem of drinking water and the source of water is

handpump.

Sanitation and medical facility:

It has been found that toilet facility is almost absent in the villages and open

defaecation is prevailing. The buffer zone of the project area is ubnder the grip of

malaria.For minor health problems the village depends on Anganwadi. In some




vill`ages dispensary, maternity home and health camp is available which are not

sufficient.

Discussion

A separate independent SIA study has been conducted to give a strong focus on the

socio-economy of the area along with the implementation of CER and CSR in future if

attracts CSR norms.

Detailed SIA study is given in Annexure VI

3.9 CONCLUSION:

The chapter has given the vivid picture of present environmental conditions of the study

area during study period. Components, like topography, land use pattern,ambient air

quality, water environment,soil characteristics,noise level, flora & fauna,traffic studies,

socio-economic environment has been described.

The ambient environmental conditions monitored has been described in this chapter

All positive and negative impacts are predicted during the construction as well as

operation phase of the project which will result in deterioration of the environment if

proper mitigation measures are not carried out. The details of the impacts and the

measures to reduce the same are addressed in the next chapter.




CHAPTER-4

ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT & MITIGATION MEASURE

4.1 DETAILS OF INVESTIGATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS DUE TO PROJECT

LOCATION, POSSIBLE ACCIDENTS, DESIGN, CONSTRUCTION, OPERATION,

DECOMMISSIONING OR REHABILITATION OF A COMPLETED PROJECT

Impact prediction is a way of mapping the environmental consequences of the project

development. Environmental impact can never be predicted with absolute certainty and

this is all the more reason to consider all possible factors and take all possible

precautions for reducing the degree of uncertainty.

4.1.1 Objectives of Impact Prediction

The objective of Impact Prediction for the proposed modification cum expansion project

under consideration is to identify the potential impacts on the specific site prevailing

environmental setting and degree of impacts. This will enable to draw up an appropriate

Environment Management Plan (EMP) to ensure that the proposed project activity does

not impair the present environmental setting. The findings of EIA are drafted in the form

of Environmental Impact Statement (EIS).

The following impacts of the project in general are assessed:

Climatic condition

Changes in present climatic condition such as temperature, atmospheric pressure,

Humidity & rainfall due to the pollutants emitted from the proposed project

Leads to Green house effect & Global Warming

Air

Changes in ambient levels and ground level concentrations due to total emissions

from point, line and area sources

Effects on soils, materials, vegetation, and human health

Noise

Changes in ambient levels due to noise generated from equipment and movement

of vehicle

Effect on fauna and human health

Water

Availability to competing users

Changes in quality

Sediment transport

Land

Changes in land use and drainage pattern

Changes in land quality including effects of waste disposal

Biological

Deforestation/tree-cutting and shrinkage of animal habitat Impact on fauna and

flora (including aquatic species if any) due to contaminants/pollutants

Impact on breeding and nesting grounds




Socio-Economic

Impact on the local community including demographic changes

Impact on economic status

Impact on human health

Impact of increased traffic

The objective of having an EIA for the proposed plant under consideration is to identify

the potential impacts on the site specific prevailing environmental setting and degree of

impacts. This will enable to draw up an appropriate Environmental Management Plan

(EMP) to consider other alternatives so as to ensure that the proposed activity does not

impair the present environmental setting beyond the assimilative capacity of the region

and ambient and other environmental standards are not exceeded at any point of time.

This is because ambient standards are maintained to protect human health with an

adequate margin of safety.

4.1.2 Impact Prediction & Assessment

The description of the proposed project and the existing baseline status in the core as

well as in the buffer zone has been dealt in detail in the earlier chapters. These

information forms the basis of Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) of the proposed

project and the same is discussed in this chapter with prediction and evaluation of these

objective of having an EIA for the proposed project under consideration is to identify the

potential impacts on the site specific prevailing environmental setting and degree of

impacts. This will enable to draw up an appropriate Environment Management Plan

(EMP) to consider other alternatives so as to ensure that the proposed project activity

does not impair the present environmental setting.

4.1.3 Pollution Potential

The plant processes like Raw material handling and product handling plant, Coke oven,

DRI kilns, MBF, EAF, IF, Sinter plant & power plant, etc. are sources of air pollution. The

sources and type of pollution in the process operation are presented in the Table 4.2. It

may be observed that heat, dusts, SO2, CO, CO2 and NOXgeneration from process&

emitted to the air environment are the prime pollution parameters from the proposed

project. However, with proper planning and innovative management technique and the

use of suitable pollution control devices, it is possible to run the manufacturing processes

without much endangering the air environment.

4.2 METHODS USED FOR THE STUDY OF ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS

After screening and scoping the identification of potentially significant environmental

impacts constitute one of the preliminary steps of Environmental Impact Assessment

(EIA). There are three principal methods for identifying environmental effects and

impacts; these are checklists, matrices and flow diagram.

Checklists

Checklists are comprehensive lists of environmental effects and impact indicators

designed to stimulate the analysts to think broadly about possible consequence of

contemplated action.

Matrices




Matrices typically employ a list of human action in addition to a list of impact indicators.

The two are related in a matrix, which can be used to identify cause and affect

relationships.

Flow Diagrams (Network method)

Flow diagrams are sometimes used to identify action-effect-impact relationship. The flow

diagram permits the analysts to visualize the connection between action and impact.

This method is best suited to single project assessment and is not recommended for

large regional actions.

The proposed modification cum Expansion steel plant is a brown field project and the

actions have been planned before implementation of the project to minimize any adverse

impact small or large on environment and population. The environmental attributes that

may be affected due to the construction and operation of the proposed project are:

Air Environment

Noise Environment

Surface-water Environment

Groundwater Environment

Land environment

Biological Environment

Socio-Economic and Cultural Environment

Infrastructure

Aesthetics

The construction, operation and future activities are considered to identify the possible

impact. The matrix method has been chosen to list the potential impacts of the proposed

project. The activities have been arranged in columns and the environmental attributes

in the row of the matrix. The impact identification matrix is shown in the Table 4.1.

Introduction to Matrix Method

The identification and prediction of impacts on various environmental parameters is

followed up by quantification of impacts. There are several methods available to quantify

the environmental impacts. The Leopold matrix method is one of the most widely

adopted and has been used for quantification of impacts for this study. The methodology

involves, first, the identification of activities, which occur during the two phases of the

project and second their likely impacts on the environmental parameters.

Matrix Method

In this method, the effect of various activities on the environment is ranked on a scale of

1 to 10 based on the order of increasing importance to arrive at the Parameter

Importance Value (PIV).

The score of each parameter has been converted to a probability value and then

recalculated by multiplying each value by a factor of 1,000 so that the sum of all the

recalculated values becomes 1000. The values thus confirm to the units of the standard

scale, generally used for evaluating the degree of impact on a set of project activities on

total environment.




The matrix used for EIA consists of project activities on the X-axis and the environmental

components likely to be effected by such activities on the Y-axis. The degree of impact

upon the environmental components due to each anticipated project activity is graded as

per the index scale given below:

SL. NO. DEGREE OF IMPACT IMPACT VALUE

1 Minimal 1-2

2 Moderate 3-4

3 Appreciable 5-6

4 Significant 7-8

5 Extreme 9-10

A (+) or (-) sign has been assigned to each value depending on its beneficial or

detrimental effect. The environment impact has been framed with the four major project

activities as column in X-axis and 14 environmental components as rows in Y-axis. The

PIV values for each row as determined in Table.4.9, is placed at the first column. An

appropriate impact value based on judicious subjective assessment is assigned to each

of the project activity. The impact score for each environmental component (SC1) have

been calculated as under:

n

SCI = (PIV)iIij

J=i

Where is the impact value (on a scale of 1.0 to 10.0 positive or negative) due to the

effect of a project activity (j) on the environmental component (i).

The n= total number of project activities.

The Total Impact Score (TIS) is arrived at as follows:

n

TIS = (PIV)ISci

I=1

Where n= Total number of environmental components.

The Total Impact Score (TIS) is determined as per the procedure outlined above. The

score has been evaluated against the following Assessment Value Index Scale:

Up to (-) 2000 No appreciable impact on environment. Adverse impact minimal.

(-) 2000 to (-) 4000 Appreciable impact on environment but not injurious in general.

Adequate mitigating measures are important.

(-) 4000 to (-) 6000 Significant impact upon the environment. Major environmental

control measures to be taken.

(-) 6000 to (-) 8000 Major injuries impact on environment. Site selection to be

considered

(-) 8000 and above Alternative site to be considered.

Up to (+)2000 Minimally beneficial.

Up to (+)4000 Moderately beneficial.

Up to (+)6000 Appreciably beneficial.

Up to (+)8000 Significantly beneficial.

(+)8000 and above Extremely beneficial.




Table 4.1: Parameter Impact Value of Environment Components

Environment

Components

Importance

Rank

Weight age

(W)

Parameters

Importance Value

(PIV)= W X 1000

Soil 1 1/38 26

Resource 3 3/38 79

Water 1 1/38 26

Air 2 2/38 53

Terrestrial flora 2 2/38 53

Aquatic Biota 0 0 0

Terrestrial fauna 0 0 0

Economic 9 9/38 237

Education 5 5/38 132

Public Order 3 3/38 79

Infrastructure & services 1 1/38 26

Security & Safety 4 4/38 105

Health 2 2/38 53

Cultural 5 5/38 132

Total 38 1000

EIA/EMP Report of M/s Bengal Energy Ltd, At: Dauka, P.O: Tentulmuri,

P.S: Naraingarh, District: Paschim Medinipur, West-Bengal


Table 4.2 Impact Identification Matrix for M/s Bengal Energy Ltd

Environment

Component

PIV

Burn

ing of

Waste

s,

Refu

ge &

Cle

are

d V

egeta

tion

Site

Pre

para

tion/

Change

in

Topogra

phy

Civ

il

Work

s

such

as

Eart

h

Movin

g

&

Buildin

g

of

Str

uctu

res

Inclu

din

g

tem

pora

ry S

tructu

res

Heavy E

quip

ment

Opera

tion

Dis

posal

of

Constr

uction

Waste

s

Genera

tion o

f Sew

age

Influx

of

Constr

uction

Work

ers

Defo

resta

tion

Tra

nsport

ation o

f M

ate

rial

Ere

ction o

f Equip

ment

Raw

Mate

rial use &

Handling

Em

issio

n

from

M

eta

llurg

ical

Pro

cesses

Efflu

ent

from

M

eta

llurg

ical

Pro

cess

Solid

Waste

fr

om

Meta

llurg

ical Pro

cess

Wate

r Extr

action

for

Meta

llurg

ical Pro

cess

Em

plo

ym

ent

genera

tion

Energ

y U

se &

Dem

and

To

tal

TIS

Sco

re

Soil 26

-1 -2 -2 -1 -1

-7 -182

Resource 79

-1 -2 -1 -1 -1 -1 -2 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -14 -1106

Water 26

-3 -1 -3 -1

-8 -208

Air 53

-1 -2 -1 -3 -1 -8 -424

Terrestrial flora 53

-2 -2 -1 -5 -263

Aquatic Biota 0

0 0

Terrestrial fauna 0

0 0

Economic 237

+1 +1 +1 +1 +2 +2 +2 +1 -2 -1 -1 +2 +4 +10 2370

Education 132

+2 +2 +2 +2 +8 1056

Public Order 79

-2 -2 -2 -2 -2 -10 -790

Infrastructure &

services 26 -1 -1

-2 -52

Project

activity




From the matrix table Total impact score (TIS) is found to be “-227” which means as there will be no appreciable impact or minimal

adverse impact on the environment. However, with adequate mitigating measures the degree of beneficial impact will be higher.

_ Negative or adverse Impact

+ Positive or beneficial Impact

Security & Safety 105

-1 -1 -1 -2 -1 -1 -1 -1 -2 -11 -1155

Health 53

-1 -1 -1 -1 -1

-5 -265

Cultural 132

+1 +2 +2 +1

+6 792

Total

-227




4.3 IMPACT PREDICTION & MEASURES FOR MINIMISING AND/OR

OFFSETTING ADVERSE IMPACT IDENTIFIED.

The description of the proposed expansion of the existing Coke oven plant of M/s Bengal

Energy Ltd, Paschim Medinipur, West Bengal and the baseline status in the core as well

as in the buffer zone has been dealt in details in the earlier chapters. These information

forms the basis of impact prediction and assessment component of Environmental

Impact Assessment (EIA) of the proposed project and the same is discussed in this

chapter and the evaluation of these impact is described in subsequent chapter.

4.3.1 IMPACTS DURING CONSTRUCTION PHASE:

Construction activity will constitute excavation, civil construction and mechanical

erection. Transportation of various construction materials and stockpiling them will also

be a major activity. These activities will be of transient nature and its impact on

environment will be of significance during construction phase only. Several temporary

measures will be taken during construction period to minimize the impact.

Site Development:

Site development is one of the prime activities for any project. This activity mainly

involves clearing of the land from all hindrances to bring the site to a condition of

starting construction work. As the expansion project will be carried out in the existing

land of the plant and the site is mostly developed for Industrial purpose, there will be no

significant impact due to site development.

Civil & Structural Work:

This work can be divided into two groups, foundation work and structural work. Certain

foundation work may involve pile-driving rigs etc. these activities may generate noise

pollution. Besides, foundation work will involve excavation and concreting work. Dust

pollution, especially during dry season, will be the major problem unless appropriate

measures are adopted to contain/ minimize the dust nuisance. The structural work will

involve steel, masonry work etc. and will involve use of equipments like hoists, cranes,

mixers, welding machines etc. there may be dust & noise pollution from this work.

During construction stage water will be required for dust suppression, civil construction

and domestic purposes. So the dust emission and noise will pose some impact on

Environment. However, the dust emission will be controlled by water sprinkling. Noise

will be controlled by adoption of adequate preventive measures like acoustic covering

and use of PPE; By taking adequate precautions the impact due to fugitive emission and

noise will be reduced to negligible level.

Mechanical & Electrical Erection:

The mechanical erection work involves extensive use of mechanical equipment for

storage, retrieval and erection, site fabrication etc. leading to considerable noise

pollution and air pollution to some extent. Pollution from Electrical work, however, is

negligible.

Source of construction materials:




For any project construction, the requirement of cement, stone chips and sand is

inevitable. These Construction materials are available locally and as the volume of civil

construction is less, the impact due to this activity will be less.

Air Environment:

Civil work and erection of structures are undertaken during construction phase. These

construction activities along with transportation of construction material generate

fugitive dust. Welding of different structures also produce gases. But these dusts are

inorganic in nature and are generated at ground level. Due to the heavy nature of these

dusts, these are not expected to be carried over to long distance to cause inconvenience

to surrounding people. The impact on ambient air quality due to fugitive dust generated

during construction period is not permanent in nature, and will cease with the completion

of construction activity. The bulk of civil work is expected to be completed within 12

months. With the completion of construction phases, the impact on air quality due to

fugitive dust will be minimized. However water sprinkling on roads can bring fugitive

emission under control

Water Environment:

The water requirement during construction activity will be met by existing water

supplies. Debris and other solid wastes are expected to be generated during construction

period and during monsoon with the surface runoff, the debris will be washed away

contributing suspended solids in nearby stream. This will be minimized through provision

of temporary garland drains around the dumping site of debris. Again, this is temporary

in nature and will cease with the completion of the construction work. The impact on

water environment during construction phase is also temporary in nature.

Noise Environment:

The general noise levels due to construction activities such as welding, fabrications and

erection of MBF, DRI Kilns, EAF, IF, rolling mill, & Power plant may sometimes go up to

80-90 dB (A) at the work sites during day time for very shot interval. The workers in

general are likely to be exposed to an equivalent noise level of 65 – 75 dB (A) in 8-hour

shift for which statutory precautionary measure as per the law will be taken. No noisy

work will be performed during night time.

Land Environment:

The proposed project site is acquired and converted to industrial premises, so there will

not be any vegetation loss or tree cutting and will also have small impact on the land use

pattern.

Soil Environment & Solid Waste:

During construction phase, solid waste such as excavated soil, debris, metal cutting,

cotton waste, oil and grease from machineries/vehicles used in construction etc. will be

generated. These wastes may contaminate soil at plant site temporarily and would be

restricted to a small area.




Certain hazardous wastes such as; used oil filter & used oil etc. will be generated during

constructional activities. These are hazardous in nature but their quantity will be very

less. This will be seggrated and stored in shed. The generation of solid waste during

construction phase will be temporary in nature and will be confined to the construction

site only. Hence the impact due to this will be insignificant, reversible and short term in

nature.

Socio-economic environment:

The construction activity will help in infusing a large amount of funds in that area and

thus will generate a lot of employment, both direct and indirect. The socio-economic

conditions will improve during construction phase of the project.

This might also result in a steep rise in agricultural wages in the surrounding villages,

especially at the time of harvesting for short duration. Hence, short-term positive

impacts on socio-economic conditions of the area are anticipated during the construction

phase.

ToR 10 Details regarding infrastructure facilities such as sanitation,

fuel, restroom etc. to be provided to the labor force during

construction as well as to the casual workers including truck drivers

during operation phase.

The overall purposes of sanitation are to provide a healthy living environment for

everyone, to protect the natural resources (such as surface water, groundwater, soil),

and to provide safety, security and dignity for people when they defecate or urinate.

Existing plant has all sanitary infrastructures for its employees, casual workers, truck

drivers transporting raw material and product to and out of the existing running project.

There is a subsidized canteen with hygienic environment to cater tea, snacks and meals

to all concerned including visitors.

Sanitary MSW disposal system, soak pit and STP exist for the existing system. Bath

rooms, latrines separate for gents and ladies with regular cleaning and sanitation exists

for workers and temporary workers. There are rest rooms with attached bath and latrine

for people working in night shift or continuing two shifts.

There is a first aid center with pharmacists for free checkup, free medicine and first-aid

provision for its employees with ambulance facility during emergency

All these existing infrastructure facilities will be extended to additional work force of

expansion project.

There will be no need of burning fossil fuel by contractor workers for cooking purpose as

canteen coupons will be issued to them through registered contractors. If situation so

demands gas cylinders will be provided to them on chargeable basis.

4.3.2 MITIGATING MEASURES DURING CONSTRUCTION PHASE

Mitigating Measures for Site Development:

Site Development for expansion of M/s. BEL. has no significant impact as the proposed

plant has been planned inside the existing plant premises.

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Soil




Mitigating Measures for Civil & Structural Work:

During construction stage water will be sprinkled. Noise will be controlled by adoption of

adequate preventive measures. By taking adequate precaution the impact due to fugitive

emission and noise will be reduced to negligible level.

Mitigating Measures for Air Quality:

The impact on ambient air quality due to fugitive dust generated during construction

period is not permanent in nature, and will cease with the completion of construction

activity. However, use of tarpaulin for covering the material being transported in trucks,

sprinkling of water will control the dust emission and proper maintenance of vehicle and

use of Euro/Bharat- III/IV vehicles will reduce emission. With the completion of

construction phase, the impact on air quality due to fugitive dust will be minimized and

this impact is reversible in nature.

Mitigating Measures for Water Environment:

During monsoon with the surface runoff, the debris will be washed away to contribute a

lot of suspended solids in nearby pond. This will be minimized through provision of

temporary garland drains around the dumping site of debris. Water consumption and

discharge of wastewater is not likely to have any significant impact on the water

environment during construction phase. Again, this is temporary in nature and will be

ceased with the completion of the construction process. Moreover, storm water run-offs

will occur only during the monsoon which last for about three months in the study area.

Domestic effluent generated from labour camp will be treated in septic tank and will be

discharged to soak pit.

Mitigating Measures for Noise Pollution:

The workers in general are likely to be exposed to an equivalent noise level of 80-90 dB

(A) in 8-hour shift for which all statutory precautions as per the law will be implemented.

Uses of proper personal protective equipments like earplugs, earmuffs etc shall further

mitigate any adverse impact of noise on the construction workers. By using standard

practice of operation, these impacts can be minimized and made insignificant. Impacts

on the noise levels will be temporary for short duration and reversible in nature. As far

as possible noisy work during night time will be avoided.

Mitigating Measures for Soil Quality & Solid Waste:

The excavated top soil will be stored near boundary and will be used for back filling/road

work/bund preparation/landscaping. The other wastes will be collected and segregated

and will be disposed of properly without causing any public nuisance

The management, handling & disposal of this hazardous waste will be carried out in

accordance with the Hazardous Waste (Management and Handling) Rules, 1989 and

amendment thereof.

Table 4.4: Action Plan for Excavation and Muck Disposal during Construction

Sl.

No.

Solid Waste Generated Action Plan

1. Excavated soil for preparation of

foundation work of buildings and

machineries.

Will be kept aside near the boundary wall

for later use for filling of low-lying areas.




2. Leveling of Site Top soil removed during leveling of the site

will be kept aside for development of

Green Belt & land scaping.

3 Metal scrap generated due to

fabrication of equipments.

The scrap will be stored in scrap yard for

use/sale.

4 Debris generated during the

Construction.

Will be suitably disposed in low lying areas.

5 Muck or sludge generated due to

piling jobs.

Will be transferred nearer to boundary wall

to be used later as filling material in low

lying areas.

Mitigating Measures for Ecology Impact:

M/s Bengal Energy Ltd has already developed green belt along boundary line and within

its existing premises, which will be further extended. The Greenbelt will be helpful in

constricting the noise & dust.

Mitigating Measures for Socio-Economic Impact:

General health checkup facilities will be provided to the nearby areas from the plant

side and some work facilities will be given to the non-workers that may contribute to

direct or indirect employment.

4.3.3 IMPACTS DURING OPERATIONAL PHASE

With the commissioning of the steel plant with other ancilliary facilities, the impacts both

beneficial and adverse are anticipated on ambient air quality, noise quality, land use,

water quality, soil, ecology and socioeconomic environment. The impact on

environmental components have been discussed below.

Impact on Air Environment

The impact on Air environment of an Integrated Steel Plant depends on various factors

like production capacity, plant configuration, process technology, type of raw materials,

type of fuel, in plant control measures adopted, operation and maintenance of the

various units of the plant. Apart from these, there will be other activities associated e.g.,

transportation of raw material and finished products, storage facilities and material

handling within plant premises which may contribute to air pollution.

The steel plant is likely to have effect on air quality parameters like PM10, PM2.5, SO2,

NOX and CO. The raw material handling plant, metallurgical units and other downstream

ancilliaries will emit dust and fumes. Apart from the above there will be fugitive dust

emissions due to transportation, storage and processing of of ores and minerals as raw

materials. Needless to say, the adequate air pollution control measures will be taken up

both at design and operational stage to confirm the emission parameters within the

prescribed standards.




A- Fugitive emission

ToR 7(vi) Measures for Fugitive Emission Control

a)Primary Fugitive Emission

During operations, fugitive dust emissions may associate with

Delivery of raw materials to site;

Storage of different minerals;

Processing

Operation of the stockpiles and reclamation;

Transportation of by-products off site;

Vehicle movements Slag processing;

Handling of collected flue dust from APCs

b)Secondary Fugitive Emission

Secondary fugitive emission like dust and fume from DRI kilns, steel melting shop

comprising of IF& MBF, Sinter plant.

The major concern is SO2 for the operation of AFBC. Sulphur is an input to the process

via the coal and is distributed between ash and off gas with the majority of the sulphur

ending up in the off gas, predominantly in the form of H2S under normal operating

conditions. The primary control mechanism is the use of a lime scrubber unit to scrub all

exhaust gas prior to release to atmosphere. With low Sulphur of South African coal or

even blending with Indian coal lime scrubber is not envisaged.

Measures for fugitive emission control

Following mitigation measures will be taken up.

1) Haulage internal roads are black topped. Automatic water sprinklers to be

installed by the side of roads.

2) Mobile water tankers will be deployed to sprinkle water on leading road to plant

outside main gate & railway line side gate.

3) Dry fog system to be provided to material transportation conveyors.

4) Three tire green belt along the boundary wall, by the side of internal roads and

around material handling plant

5) Bag filter with suction swivel hood for control of fugitive emission at material

loading 7 unloading station.

6) Material transportation will be done fully covered with tarpaulin

B Emission from process

Emitting Stacks are major sources of air pollution in the proposed expansion.Particulate

matter, SO2, NOX will be emitted from different unit operations.




Measures for emission control during operation phase

Emission of particulate matter, SO2,NOx will have adverse effect on human health and

environment as a whole. There fore it is required to take measures to keep emissions

within prescribed standards. Details of proposed measures have been given in Table 4.5

below.

Gen.Tor 3(vi) Details of Emission, Effluents, Hazardous Waste and

their Management.

Gen.Tor 7(v) Details of Stack Emission and Action Plan for Control of

Emission to Meet Standards.




Table 4.5: Details of predicted stack emission from proposed expansion Project

Facility Stack Height(m)

Top dia (m)

Temp(K) Velocity (m/s)

Flow rate(m3/hr)

PM mg/Nm3

PM gm/s

SO2 mg/Nm3

SO2 gm/s

NOx gm/s

APC equipment

1x500 TPD DRI Kilns

50 2.6 393 9.15 1,75,000 44.24 2.15 286.00 13.9 - DSC, ABC, ESP & high stack

1x500 TPD DRI

Kilns

50 2.6 393 9.15 1,75,000 44.24 2.15 286.00 13.9 DSC, ABC, ESP &

high stack

2x350 TPD DRI Kilns

60 2.8 393 11.05 2,45,000 44.26 3.01 285.88 19.44 - 2 DSC, ABC, ESP & single high stack

1x0.6 MTPA Coke-Oven

60 3.8 413 11.0 4,60,000 20.34 2.6 194.00 24.78 - WHRB & high stack

1x0.6 MTPA Coke-Oven

60 3.8 413 11.0 4,60,000 20.34 2.6 194.00 24.78 WHRB & high stack

2x80T EAF 30 3.6 340 10.0 3,81,650 80.18 8.5 - - - 2 Bag filters & single stack

3x20T IF 30 2.5 340 8.4 1,43,115 88.05 3.5 - - 2 Bag Filter & single stack

1x60m2 Sinter Plant

55 2.0 393 8.6 96,780 37.77 1.02 24.6 16.8 ESP & stack

1x320m3 MBF 30 2.0 313 6.94 78,500 50.00 1.09 - - Dust catcher,

Ventury scrubber, emergency venting flare stack with

water seal

1x320m3 MBF 30 2.0 313 6.94 78,500 50.00 1.09 - - Dust catcher,

Ventury scrubber, emergency venting flare stack with water seal

1x35 MW AFBC 62 2.6 413 11.0 2,12,000 40.00 2.36 38.1 WHRB & ESP

DRI material Handling Plant

30 1.5 310 8.0 50,200 500.00 7.0 - - Bag filter & stack




A. Model input: Source input parameter

The different point source input parameters in the form of stack and emission data are

considered.

Stack emissions are major sources of air pollution from the proposed plant. The

proposed expansion steel plant is to be provided with necessary air pollution control

devices like Electro Static Precipitators (ESP), bag filters, dust catchers, ABC, ventury

scrubber& lime scrubber etc to control dusts and gases and also limit emission within the

prescribed standard. The emission factors, air handling capacity of the proposed

installation and emission norm has been used to estimate amount of emission from the

proposed plant with the height of emission. Particulate emission is based upon the Air

Pollution Control Device (APCD) with design stack emission limited to norms specified by

CPCB.

Model input parameters: Control options

The options used for short term computations are:

The plume rise is estimated by Briggs formulae, but the final rise is always

limited to that of the mixing layer;

Buoyancy Induced Dispersion is used to describe the increase in plume

dispersion during the ascension phase;

Calms processing routine is used by default;

Wind profile exponents are used by default.

Flat terrain is used for computations;

It is assumed that the pollutants do not undergo any physico-chemical transformation

and that there is no pollutant removal by dry deposition.

Briggs rural dispersion coefficient has been considered 24 hours averaging are taken into

consideration.

Gen.Tor 7(i) Assessment of ground level concentration of pollutants

from the stack emission based on site-specific meteorological

features. In case the project is located on a hilly terrain, the AQIP

Modelling shall be done using inputs of the specific terrain

characteristics for determining the potential impacts of the project on

the AAQ. Cumulative impact of all sources of emissions (including

transportation) on the AAQ of the area shall be well assessed. Details

of the model used and the input data used for modelling shall also be

provided. The air quality contours shall be plotted on a location map

showing the location of project site, habitation nearby, sensitive

receptors, if any.

Year Month Day Hr.(1-24) CL.

Cover DBT RH PR WD WS MH

2017 12 27 1 1 20 58 1010 360 8.2 302

2017 12 27 2 0 19 58 1011 360 9.2 286

2017 12 27 3 0 19 59 1012 360 10.3 210

2017 12 27 4 0 19 59 1012 360 11 137




2017 12 27 5 0 20 58 1011 360 11.5 91

2017 12 27 6 0 20 57 1010 360 12 80

2017 12 27 7 0 21 56 1011 360 9.3 75

2017 12 27 8 0 21 55 1010 360 8.5 280

2017 12 27 9 0 20 54 1010 135 5.2 460

2017 12 27 10 0 21 53 1009 45 3.1 590

2017 12 27 11 0 22 52 1011 45 1.2 680

2017 12 27 12 0 23 51 1009 45 0.4 810

2017 12 27 13 0 23 50 1008 45 0.4 980

2017 12 27 14 1 22 50 1008 45 0.4 1042

2017 12 27 15 1 22 51 1009 45 0.4 983

2017 12 27 16 0 21 52 1010 90 0.4 835

2017 12 27 17 0 21 53 1010 90 3.6 740

2017 12 27 18 0 20 54 1011 135 7.5 690

2017 12 27 19 0 19 56 1012 180 9.8 652

2017 12 27 20 0 20 56 1011 180 10.6 580

2017 12 27 21 0 19 54 1010 225 11.2 515

2017 12 27 22 0 20 55 1011 270 12 490

2017 12 27 23 0 20 56 1010 315 10.5 420

2017 12 27 24 0 19 57 1011 315 9.4 386




Table 4.6 Assessment of GLC of pollutants without APC equipments

Location Name

GLC for PM10 (µg/m3) GLC for PM 2.5(µg/m3) GLC for SO2(µg/m3) GLC for Nox(µg/m3)

Monitored

GLC

Pre

dic

ted

incre

menta

l G

LC

from

isople

th

Maxim

um

Resultant

GLC

Monitore

d

G

LC

at

sam

pling s

ite

Pre

dic

ted

incre

menta

l G

LC

from

isople

th

Maxim

um

Resultant

GLC

Monitore

d

G

LC

at

sam

pling s

ite

Pre

dic

ted

incre

menta

l G

LC

from

isople

th

Maxim

um

Resultant

GLC

Monitore

d

G

LC

at

sam

pling s

ite

Pre

dic

ted

incre

menta

l G

LC

from

isople

th

Maxim

um

Resultant

GLC

Keshuriya 80.2 14.88 95.1

35.2 13.88 49.1

9.6 6.91 16.5

12.6 14.88 27.5

Bargopal 79.7 3.72 83.4 35.5 3.47 39.0 9.4 6.91 16.3 12.6 4.96 17.6

Daharpur 85.8 29.77 115.6 39.5 27.77 67.3 9.5 20.73 30.2 18.2 14.88 33.1

Nutandihi 74.2 26.4 100.6

32.6 24.29 56.9

17.0 48.36 65.4

17.3 39.69 57.0

Silti 77.1 29.77 106.9 36.3 27.77 64.1 8.4 20.73 29.1 16.3 24.81 41.1

Belti 74.8 22.38 97.2 32.9 17.35 50.3 9.0 27.64 36.6 15.6 29.77 45.4

Salkha 76.4 7.44 83.8 33.8 3.47 37.3 8.7 0 8.7 15.0 0 15.0

Mirjapur 75.8 7.44 83.2 33.4 6.97 40.4 8.2 0 8.2 17.5 4.96 22.5

NAAQS STANDARD

100 60 80 80




B. Impact of Pollutants on human health

CO2 currently forms about 405 parts per million (ppm) of earth’s atmosphere, compared

to about 280 ppm in pre-industrial times, and billions of metric tons of CO2 are emitted

annually by burning of fossil fuels.CO2 increase in earth’s atmosphere has been

accelerating oxidation of SO2, usually in the presence of a catalyst such as NO2, forms

H2SO4, and thus acid rain. This is one of the causes for concern over the environmental

impact of the use of these fuels as power sources.

Nitrogen oxides, particularly nitrogen dioxide, are expelled from high temperature

combustion, and are also produced during thunderstorms by electric discharge. They can

be seen as a brown haze dome above or a plume downwind of cities. Nitrogen dioxide is

a chemical compound with the formula NO2. It is one of several nitrogen oxides. One of

the most prominent air pollutants, this reddish-brown toxic gas has a characteristic

sharp, biting odor. Annual premature European deaths caused by air pollution are

estimated at 430,000. An important cause of these deaths is nitrogen dioxide and other

nitrogen oxides (Nox) emitted by road vehicles. In a 2015 consultation document the UK

government disclosed that nitrogen dioxide is responsible for 23,500 premature UK

deaths per annum. Across the European Union, air pollution is estimated to reduce life

expectancy by almost nine months. Causes of deaths include strokes, heart disease, lung

cancer, and lung infections.

Particulates, alternatively referred to as particulate matter (PM), atmospheric particulate

matter, or fine particles, are tiny particles of solid or liquid suspended in a gas. In

contrast, aerosol refers to combined particles and gas. Some particulates occur naturally,

originating from volcanoes, dust storms, forest and grassland fires, living vegetation,

and sea spray. Human activities, such as the burning of fossil fuels in vehicles, power

plants and various industrial processes also generate significant amounts of aerosols.

Averaged worldwide, anthropogenic aerosols—those made by human activities—currently

account for approximately 10 percent of our atmosphere. Increased levels of fine

particles in the air are linked to health hazards such as heart disease, altered lung

function and lung cancer.

Impact on Water Environment:

ToR 7(ii) Water quality modeling-in case, if the effluent is proposed to

be discharged into the local drain, then water quality modeling should

be conducted for the drain water taking into consideration the

upstream and downstream quality of water of the drain.

Waste water generated from process will be settled, treated, filtered and reused or

recycled where ever applicable. Some waste water will be utilized in green belt watering

and dust suppression through sprinklers. No effluent will be discharged outside plant

boundary. Hence zero discharge norm will be followed and therefore water quality

modeling not done.

ToR 7 (iii) Impact of the transport of the Raw materials and end

products on the surrounding environment shall be assessed and

provided. In this regard, options for transport of raw material and

finished products and wastes (large quantities) by rail or rail cum

road transport or conveyor-cum-rail transport shall be examined.

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Thunderstorms

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/European_Union

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Life_expectancy

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Life_expectancy

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stroke

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Heart_disease

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Particulates




Majority of raw material and product shall be transported through rail. The company has

its railway siding inside project boundary and Raw material will be transported through

rail and unloaded at Rly.siding. It is expected that sometimes lime stone and Dolomite

will be transported on road using environmental compatible Euro/Bharat II/III vehicles.

Hence maximum 2 lakh TPA raw material and 1.0 MTPA, billet will be transported

through road, which translate to 3,333 TPD i.e. 200 trucks/day and taking to and from

into consideration 400 additional heavy motor vehicle (1360 PCU)will be on road due to

project.

1 km length of NH 16 was considered for monitoring traffic study starting from Plant

main gate. As because the entrance opens to NH 16.

Impact on Traffic

Road traffic to and from the plant during operation of expanded plant will be heavier

than at present as envisaged mode of transport of the materials is via road.

Traffic density will be increased marginally as a result of expansion. In turn, it will

contribute to noise as well as ambient air quality in term of dust and other gaseous

pollutants. The regular maintenance of vehicles and transport of materials under cover,

will limit the pollution within limits. The present road conditions are reasonably good for

proposed movement of traffic.




Impact on Ecology:

The proposed expansion unit will be set up in the existing premises. Designated area will

be considered as solid waste dumping site. No waste water will be drained outside plant

boundary. Hence not much of impact on ecology is anticipated.

Socio-economic Impacts:

It is rather obvious that nearby villages will have more impact (adverse or beneficial),

therefore the study area was divided into three zones with 3 km, 7 km & 10 km radius

with central point of the combined project site as the centre to assess the socioeconomic

impact of the project on the surrounding environment.

The manpower requirement for the proposed project will generate some permanent jobs

and secondary jobs for the operation and maintenance of plant. This will increase

direct/indirect employment opportunities and ancillary business development to

appreciable extent for the local population. This phase is expected to create a beneficial

impact on the local socio-economic environment.

Depending on requirements employees are called in different shifts and few employees

are called on duty in national/ festival holidays and off days. The licensed capacity of the

unit is 1000.

Educational Status

The local educational levels will be raised with additional facilities provided to schools

through various CSR programs, such as scholarships, awareness programs, child care

facilities, and cultural events, self help groups and community participation in area

developments.

Impact on Public Health and Safety

Discussion with the medical officers reveals non-existence of major disease in the study

area. Health awareness among the villages may grow especially regarding cleanliness

with the industrial development.

4.3.4 MITIGATION MEASURES DURING OPERATION PHASE

Mitigation measures for Ground water:

Until recently it was a common myth that groundwater is pristine i.e. potential

contaminant percolating through the subsurface would adhere to the soil or be degraded

by natural process and therefore would not enter or greatly affect groundwater quality.

Thus, the groundwater was regarded as a safe and convenient depository for the waste

and non-waste by-products, generated by the society.

However, with the passage of time and increasing number of serious incidences, there is

a growing concern of groundwater pollution. Raw material of the project will be stored on

compact pure clay mixed with Bentonite layer covered with HDPE layer therefore there will be no

seepage from the raw material piles. Again, the material will be stored under shed so as to

prevent the leachate through runoff.

Mitigating Measures for Air Environment:

The impacts of primary air pollutants on air quality due to emission from single source or a

group of sources is evaluated by use of mathematical models. Needless to say, the adequate

air pollution control measures like ESPs, bag filters,dust catchers, Lime scrubber, ventury

scrubber ID Fan and stack will be installed to reduce impact to a larger extent.




Air pollution control at different point source

The proposed steel plant will emit gases and fumes which will have negligible impact after

pollution control management on human health, animals, vegetation and material. Here

under, action plans are proposed to address the pollution problem to meet the NAAQS 2009

Standard.

Stacks will be provided with porthole and working platform so that stack monitoring can

be done as per norms of statutory authority and proper Air Pollution Control Devices

shall be installed. On line stack monitoring and tripping of process with failure of

pollution control equipment has been proposed to be interlocked.

The isopleths diagrams after providing efficient equipments to arrest particulate matter is

given in Fig below:

Gen. Tor 7 (i) Assesment Of Ground Level Concentration Of Pollutants

Table 4.7 The GLC values after implementation of APC systems are

Location Name

GLC for PM10 (µg/m3) GLC for PM 2.5(µg/m3)

GLC for SO2(µg/m3) GLC for NOx(µg/m3)

Monitored

GLC

Pre

dic

ted

incre

menta

l G

LC

from

isople

th

Maxim

um

Resultant

GLC

Monitore

d

G

LC

at

sam

pling s

ite

Pre

dic

ted

incre

menta

l G

LC

from

isople

th

Maxim

um

Resultant

GLC

Monitore

d

G

LC

at

sam

pling s

ite

Pre

dic

ted

incre

menta

l G

LC

from

isople

th

Maxim

um

Resultant

GLC

Monitore

d

G

LC

at

sam

pling s

ite

Pre

dic

ted

incre

menta

l G

LC

from

isople

th

Maxim

um

Resultant

GLC

Keshuriya 80.2 0.56 80.8 35.2 1.16 36.4 9.6 7.58 17.2 12.6 14.88 27.5

Bargopal 79.7 0.28 80.0 35.5 0.66 36.2 9.4 3.79 13.2 12.6 4.96 17.6

Daharpur 85.8 1.68 87.5 39.5 1.16 40.7 9.5 15.16 24.7 18.2 14.88 33.1

Nutandihi 74.2 1.96 76.2 32.6 1.32 33.9 17.0 22.74 39.7 17.3 39.69 57.0

Silti 77.1 1.41 78.5 36.3 1.32 37.6 8.4 22.74 31.1 16.3 24.81 41.1

Belti 74.8 1.12 75.9 32.9 1.16 34.1 9.0 18.95 28.0 15.6 29.77 45.4

Salkha 76.4 0.28 76.7 33.8 0.99 34.8 8.7 0 8.7 15.0 0 15.0

Mirjapur 75.8 0.28 76.1 33.4 0.99 34.4 8.2 0 8.2 17.5 4.96 22.5

NAAQS STANDARD

100 60 80 80




ToR-7(vii)Details of hazardous waste generation and their storage,

utilization and disposal. Copies of MOU regarding utilization of solid

and hazardous waste shall also be included. EMP shall include the

concept of waste-minimization, recycle/reuse/recover techniques.

Energy conservation and natural resource conservation.

The various types of solid waste encountered from an Integrated Steel

Plant are:-

A. Municipal Solid Waste

B. Hazardous Waste

C. Industrial Waste

a. A. Municipal Solid Waste

Very small amount of Municipal Solid waste will be generated from canteen& Guest

House which will be converted to compost through Organic Waste converter and will be

utilized as manure in green belt.

b. B. Industrial Waste

Add ToR 8 Plan for slag utilization

Table 4.3 Solid Wastes utilization & disposal measures

Solid waste Quantity in TPA Utilisation measures


IF flue dust 24.000 Will be sold to Metal recovery Agencies

DRI Dolchar 2,72,000 Use in AFBC to generate steam for power

plant

Fly ash 13,78,050 Sold to Gava Ecocrete Pvt Ltd

BF slag 1,84,760 Sold to ASO Cement Ltd

BF sludge + dust 2,93,670 Sold to ASO Cement Ltd

Power plant Bottom

Ash

1,00,500 Sold to Gava Ecocrete Pvt Ltd

In case of excess BF slag and sludge over sale, this can be used as raw material for iron

ore sinter making.

Fly Ash Management

Total Fly ash generation from CPP has been estimated to be 13,78,050 which will

be supplied to Gava Ecocrete Pvt Ltd as per their greement.

All the request letter are annexed as Annexure VII




Bottom Ash Management

Total Bottom ash generation from CPP has been estimated to be 1,00,500 TPA which will

be supplied to Gava Ecocrete Pvt Ltd as per their agreement letter.

C. Hazardous Waste

Hazardous Waste Management

Table 4.9 Hazardous Waste Management

Sl.

No.

Type of

Hazardous

Wastes

Schedule Source of

Generation

Unit of

Measurem

ent

Quantity

Generated

/Annum (

approx )

Mode of Disposal

1 Used Grease

5.2

Moving equipments Kg 500

Stored temporarily

and being lifted by

Authorized Vendor.

2 Used Oil

Filters

35.1 Compressors, power

packs, vehicles. Nos. 70

Stored temporarily

and being lifted by

Authorized Vendor.

3

Waste

Jute/Cotton

& Used PPE's

like Gloves,

shoes etc .

5.2

Use for cleaning

machines Kg 200

Stored temporarily

and being lifted by

Authorized Vendor.

4 Used Bag

Filters

Bag houses Nos./Kg. 110/550

Stored temporarily

and being lifted by

Authorized Vendor.

5 Oily Sludge

34.4

Power Pack Rooms Kg 40

Stored temporarily

and being lifted by

Authorized Vendor.

6 Used Oil

5.1

Transformer and all

Mechanical Engines KL 6.2

Being stored in

containers and will

be sold to

Authorized vendors.

ToR-7(viii)Proper utilization of fly ash shall be ensured as per Fly ash

Notification, 2009.

Fly Ash Management

Total Fly ash generation from CPP has been estimated to be 13,78,050 which will

be supplied to Gava Ecocrete Pvt Ltd as per their greement.

Total Bottom ash generation from CPP has been estimated to be 1,00,500 TPA

which will be supplied to Gava Ecocrete Pvt Ltd as per their agreement letter.

4.4 EMP AT DESIGN STAGE

Technological Improvement

For this steel plant the technologically viable, less energy intensive, less polluting route has

been chosen. With advanced technology in emission reduction and energy conservation will

be taken in to consideration, while selecting the suitable design. Some of the important

design considerations at the design & implementation stage are as follows.




A proper layout plan has been chosen for the optimum utilization of the available

land and resources.

The design aims at minimum use of water.

Conservation of water through waste water treatment, recycling & reuse.

Zero discharge norms proposed with proper planning and its implementation.

Efficient dust extraction, dust suppression and dust collection measures have

been planned in the design of plant equipment to reduce the dust emission

considerably.

Noise emission control.

The noise producing equipments will be designed with dynamic balancing and

vibration dampening by proper grouting so as to produce minimum noise.

The operation control rooms and pulpits would be provided with noise shield

walls.

4.4.1 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLANT (EMP) AT CONSTRUCTION

STAGE:

Site Preparation:

The project site preparation requires some leveling activities. During dry weather conditions,

dust may be generated by activities like excavation and transportation through un-metallic

roads. The dust will be suppressed using water sprinkling. As soon as construction is over the

surplus earth should be utilized to fill up low-lying areas, the rubbish should be cleared and

all un-built surfaces reinstated. Appropriate vegetation should be planted and all such areas

should be landscaped.

For Maintaining Water quality

During construction, volume of debris & mud will be generated, which during the rainy

season, can contaminate the storm water run-offs with suspended solids. Efforts will be made

to reduce the suspended solids content of storm water run-offs by routing the storm water

drains through catch pits. Moreover, storm water run-offs will occur only during the monsoon

season which lasts for about 2-3 months in the study area. These impacts will be temporary

lasting only during the construction period of the proposed plant. Pathways for pollution via

seepages, evaporation, residual remains are to be studied for surface water will be done after

running of expansion project

For Maintaining Air Quality

During the construction phase, civil work will be carried out to put the units in place. The

construction work leads to generation of fugitive dust. However, the fugitive dust is not

expected to spread too far. Water spraying will be undertaken to suppress dust. Due to

construction activities, impacts on ambient air quality will not be permanent and will cease

once the construction is completed.

To Maintain Noise Level in the Vicinity

The construction equipment will be chosen by criteria of environmental friendly

technology and shall generate less noise level. Noise levels during the limited

construction period are likely to increase initially due to increased movement of trucks

and other diesel-powered material handling equipment. This is unavoidable and limited




during day time only. The movement of trucks and machinery will be regulated to reduce

the impacts of increased noise. The construction phase will be limited to short period.

Hence it is temporary. Therefore, the impact on ambient noise levels will be insignificant

and ceases once the construction is completed.

Ecological Aspects

The construction activity won’t affect the surrounding ecology of the proposed steel plant

as the construction is well confined within the site premises.

4.4.2 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLANT (EMP) AT OPERATIONAL

PHASE

Air Environment Management:

There will be dust & Gas Emission from IF and material handling site. With use of Swivel

Hood, Bag Filter & Stack this emission will be appreciably reduced & there by Air

Pollution will be under control.

The dust generated in the material handling system will be extracted through suction

hoods located at various drop points. The hoods will be connected to a common duct

which will be provided with a motorized damper for isolation. An on-line booster fan will

be provided for generating the necessary suction at the suction hoods.

Air pollution Control devices proposed for the project

E S Ps

M/s Bengal Energy Ltd proposes ESPs for control of dust emission for DRI kilns, sinter

plant and captive power plant.

Charged or emitting electrodes will be connected to 66KV DC. 220V AC will be stepped

up to 66KV and converted through rectifier to DC. Dust collecting plates will be earthed.

Emitting electrodes will be placed between collecting electrodes and equidistance from

them.

Inlet duct of ESP will have gradual expansion and perforated diffuser plate to reduce

pressure to facilitate dust separation and equal distribution of gas to all rows. Corona

discharge will create drift or migration velocity by charging dust particles and pushing

them towards collecting electrodes.

Deposited dust over collecting electrodes will be periodically dry cleaned by automatic

hammering process and collected dust from bottom hopper of ESPs will be pneumatically

conveyed to storage bunker for disposal.

Gas outlet duct is gradually narrowed down to inlet duct size and pressure is recovered.




ESP dust separation efficiency is minimum 99%, the area of collecting plates ‘A’ is

calculated using Anderson-Deutsch equation.

ฑ= 1-e- Vpm A/Q, whereฑis efficiency of ESP

1) ESP for each 500 TPD DRI kiln

A = ln(1-0.99)/-(Vpm /Q) = 4.605/- (Vpm /Q)

Where A = area of ESP plates taken together, Dust migration velocity Vpm= 0.2m/s

(assumed) and Q= volumetric flow in Nm3/sec

Q= 1,10,260Nm3/hr=30.62Nm3/s, Vpm= 0.2m/s, ฑ=99%

Area of collecting plates A= 4.605/0.0065= 708m2&takingdesign safety factor 1.5

times = 1062m2

With plate height of 9m, the total plate length is estimated as 118m

ESP can have 10 rows with plate length of each row =12m

2x500 TPD DRI Kilns will have 2 ESPs, 2 ID fans but single stack

2)ESP for each 350 TPD DRI kiln

Q=21.44 Nm3/s,Vpm /Q =0.0093 & A=495m2 and taking 1.5 times=743m2

So ESP will have plates of 9m height, 9 rows and plate length of each row=10m

2x350 TPD DRI Kilns will have 2 ESPs, 2 ID fans but single stack

3)1x60m2 Sinter plant

Q=27 Nm3/s, Vpm /Q = 0.0074 & A=622m2 and taking 1.5 times=933m2

So ESP will have plates of 9m height, 9 rows and plate length of each row=12m

The sinter plant will have one ESP, one ID fan and one stack.




4) ESP for 1x35 MW AFBC power plant

Q=59Nm3/s, Vpm /Q =0.0034 & A=1,354m2 and taking 1.5 times=2032m2

So the ESP will have plates of 9m length, 12 rows and each row of 18m length

One ESP, one ID fan and one stack.

Bag filters

Bag filters have been proposed for EAFs and IFs

Bag Filters

Pulse jet bag filter has been proposed with bag material needle felt polyester, hence Air

to cloth ratio i.e. dust migration velocity Vfhas been taken as 5m/min.

1) Bag filter for 1x20T IF

Gas flow rate of each IF, Q=460Nm3/min,

Ac, Area of filter cloth = Q/Vf= 92m2 and taking design safety factor 1.5times the

calculated value, area of cloth comes to 138m2

Filter media cloth will be stitched to cover a cylindrical MS wire cage with circular

bottom. Dimension of each bag diameter=15cm and length 3.6m, Area of cloth for each

cage=1.7m2 with additional margin for folding inside at connection of bag with Ventury.

Number of bags required will be 82 bags. As 2/3 of bags will be under service and 1/3

under cleaning at a time, total bags will be 123. The bag filter will have 9 rows and each

row will have 14nos of bags. There will be two chambers, Dust separation chamber and

plenum chamber. Dust laden flue gas will enter into separation chamber; pass through

needle felt polyester bags due to suction of ID fan. Dust will be retained on surface of

bags and clean gas will enter into plenum chamber and finally vented through stack due

to discharge of ID fan.

Differential pressure gauge between two chambers will give performance of filtering

media. When dp across is high the pulse jet will operate through timer action and clean

bags. During cleaning of bags dust will be deposited in bottom hopper of bag house and




will be removed through Rotary air lock valve and pneumatically conveyed to storage

bunker or recycled to process.

For 3x20T IF, there will be 3 nos of bag filters, 3nos of ID fans but single stack with two

EAFs.

2)Bag filter for 1x80T IF

Gas flow rate of each EAF, Q=1840Nm3/min,

Ac, Area of filter cloth = Q/Vf= 368m2 and taking design safety factor 1.5times the

calculated value, area of cloth comes to 552m2

Filter media cloth will be stitched to cover a cylindrical MS wire cage with circular

bottom. Dimension of each bag diameter=15cm and length 3.6m, Area of cloth for each

cage=1.7m2 with additional margin for folding inside at connection of bag with Ventury.

Number of bags required will be 326 bags. As 2/3 of bags will be under service and 1/3

under cleaning at a time, total bags will be 489. The bag filter will have 21 rows and

each row will have 23nos of bags. There will be two chambers, Dust separation chamber

and plenum chamber. Dust laden flue gas will enter into separation chamber; pass

through needle felt polyester bags due to suction of ID fan. Dust will be retained on

surface of bags

Additional Tor-6 All Stock Piles Will Have to be on Top ofa Stable Liner

To Avoid Leaching Of Materials To Ground Water.

The raw materials at the RMHP site will be stored on a platform made up of pure clay

mixed with bentonite and covered by HDPE liner to avoid leaching of materials.

Moreover, the raw materials will be stored under a shed to avoid the contact with rain

water.

Water Management

ToR 7(iv) A note on treatment of waste water from different plant

operation, extent recycled and reused for different purposes shall be

included. Complete scheme of effluent treatment, characteristics of

untreated and treated effluent to meet the prescribed standards of

discharge under E(P) Rule.

Waste Water Management

As the plant water system is designed based on maximum recirculation system and

effective discharge from plant will be insignificant. The effluents likely to be generated

from the proposed plant are:









The first step towards a healthy waste water management is to separate the waste

stream from the storm water Stream.

The storm water will have a separate route leading to the rain water harvesting pond

with proper pretreatment scheme before entering to the rain water harvesting pond &

the waste water stream will be routed separately to the treatment unit or Effluent

Treatment Plant (ETP).

TREATMENT OF INDUSTRIAL EFFLUENT

The Effluent Treatment Plant is designed on the basis of the following effluent

characteristics.

PARAMETERS UNIT RAW

EFFLUENT

TREATED

EFFLUENT

SPCB

Standard

Flow M3/HR 100 100

pH - 6.00-9.00 7.00-8.5 6.5 – 8.5

Turbidity NTU 60 <15 -

Oil & Grease PPM 31.2-21.9 < 5 10 mg/l

Total Suspended Solids PPM 1000-5000 <30 100 mg/l

Process Description of the Waste Water Treatment

The effluent from the plant will be screened through the mechanical screen & will

pass to the grit chamber for settling of the heavier & big size particles. The grits

will be pumped through a heavy-duty pump to the sludge tank. The overflow

from the Grit Chamber will be pass to the Oil & Grease tank for separation of Oil

& Grease in the initial partition through a oil skimmer. The skimmed oil & grease

will be kept in a separate tank for further disposal / use.

The Oil & Grease separated effluent will be passing to the Equalisation tank,

which is provided with air agitation for further transfer of effluent to the Flash

Mixer. In the flash Mixer the effluent will be added with lime solution for

precipitation of heavy metals if any & Poly electrolyte of appropriate dose will be

added for faster coagulation in the flocculation zone of the clarifloculator provided

after the Flash Mixer. The solids will be settled in the clarifloculator as sludge &

removed as under flow to the sludge tank. The Overflow of the clarifloculator is

clarified clear water & will be transferred to the clear water tank for further reuse

in the plant.

The sludge from the sludge tank will be fed to the filter press for separation of

solid & water.

STORM WATER MANAGEMENT

Storm water is generated during rainy season due to rainfall. The rain water will flow to

the rain water harvesting pond for storage of rain water. As the storm water passes

through different areas so it may collect pollutants like Suspended Solids, oil & Grease

etc. So before entering to the pond the storm water should pass through the screen ,

Grit Chamber & oil & Grease trap. The details of the schematic flow diagram is given

below




The various control measures are:

Backwash from Filtration Plant will be led to a sludge pond for removing

suspended solids. The overflow from the sludge pond will be used for dust

suppression and irrigation of green cover. The sludge from the sludge pond will

be dried and dumped in low lying area.

Run-off water from the raw material storage yard will be routed through drains to

catch pits to settle out suspended solids. The clear water will be discharged into

natural drainage channels.

Cooling Tower Blow-down and Boiler Blow-down will be utilized for dust

suppression in the raw material handling area and IF slag cooling.

Efforts to be made to reuse most of the water in the plant itself. This water comes

under the category of ‘Waste Liquor’ and has to be treated to render it harmless.

Backwash from Filtration Plant will be led to pits for removing suspended solids.

The overflow from the pits will be reused in the plant water system. The sludge

from the pits will be dried and dumped. Effluents from the SMS are likely to

contain suspended solids and oil & grease. These effluents will be routed to

settling pits fitted with oil & grease trap. The clarified water will be reused in the

plant.

Cooling Tower Blow-down from various recirculation systems will be cascaded for

reuse in other qualitatively compatible systems. Thus, proposed plant will recycle

water to the maximum extent possible. The Blow Down water from various plant

units will be collected along with the drainage water and used for Dust

Suppression by Spraying and for gardening purpose.

All storm water drains from the raw materials and solid waste handling areas will

be routed through garland drains into catch pits of sufficient volume to settle out

suspended solids present in the storm water run-offs. The clear water will be

discharged into natural drainage channels. This type of effluent is anticipated only

in monsoon. The sewage from the Plant and Canteen waste water will be treated

in Sewage Treatment Plant. The treated sewage will be diverted for irrigation of

green cover.

The proposed plants would require industrial water on a continuous basis for

process requirement, cooling purposes, cleaning/scrubbing purposes etc. In order




to minimize consumption of fresh water from the source, industrial water after treatment

is proposed to be recycled and reused. After cooling and suitable treatment

makeup water will be added to compensate for the losses in closed circuit

circulation system.

The company is following the ZLD for its existing plant and will propose ZLD for

this expansion project. The water will be required in the steel plant for SMS plant:

Roof and panel cooling, Electrode cooling system requirement and Cast mould

cooling.

ToR-7(x) Action plan for rain water harvesting measure at plant site

shall be submitted to harvest rain water from roof top and storm

water drain to recharge the ground water and also to use for the

various activities at the project site to conserve fresh water and

reduce the water requirement from other sources.

4.5 RAIN WATER HARVESTING

Run Off Water Management during Monsoon/ Post Monsoon Period

M/s. BEL plans to have water rain water harvesting ponds to collect the storm water and

rain water particularly during the monsoon and will use the same for plant purposes as

and when required.

Part I construction:

Rain Water Harvesting Tank

Area=20 ha

Intensity of rainfall=60 mm

Runoff quantity=20*0.06*0.50 ham=0.60 ham

60 % of the above=0.6*0.6 ham=0.36 ham=3600 cum

Capacity of each water harvesting tank:

Fort recharge-2350 cum

So, no. of water harvesting tank required=2

Similarly, in Part II, III & IV 3, 2 & 2 nos. of water harvesting tank would be required.

A. Expected quantum of recharge

Sl

No

Structures Qty Recharge capacity Total quantum of

recharge in cum

Remarks

1 Traditional dug

well

4 10% of volume per

day

4X16X12=768 120 days of

monsoon period

considered

2 Recharge pit 20 0.12 cum per rainy

day

20X0.12X70=168 70 days of

monsoon period

considered

3 Rain water

harvesting tank

2 50mX50mX4m 20000cum

4 Recharge tube well 12 5000*cum 60,000 120 days of

monsoon period

considered

80,936 cum




B. Part II Expected quantum of recharge 1,05,978 cum

C. Part III Expected quantum of recharge 98,294 cum

D. Part IV Expected quantum of recharge 95,894 cum

Total recharge potential of RWH=3,81,102 cum

Rain water harvesting pond

About 5.20 ha of land has been allocated to store rain water for plant use so that make

up water drawl can be reduced.

The discharge water quality will be as per IS: 2296 for surface water discharge standard.

PH - 6.5-8.5

Suspended solid - <100mg/l

BOD <30mg/l

COD <250mg/l

Iron <0.3mg/l

4.6 MAINTENANCE OF POLLUTION CONTROL EQUIPMENTS:

The Pollution Control Equipment will be examined and maintained in annual shutdown.

• As a measure of preventive maintenance sets of ESP plates and filter

bags for bag filters will be kept ready to meet any eventuality of mal

performance of equipment in position.

• Condition based maintenance also will be taken up.


During normal operations of the plant, noise levels will increase significantly only close to

the turbines/compressor but this will be confined only within plant boundary. However

noise levels will increase during bleeding-off of excess steam. But such incidents are

occasional and will last only for few seconds at a time only. The noise level within the

plant boundary is occupational noise levels and confined within shops. The level will be

further minimized when the noise reaches the plant boundary and the nearest residential

areas beyond the plant boundary, as elaborate green belt development is envisaged for

all along the boundary for attenuation of noise and fugitive emission. All the equipment

in the steel plant will be designed/operated in such a way that the noise level shall not

exceed 85 dB (A) as per the requirement of Standard.

In the proposed plant, the primary sources of the noise pollution are compressors, turbo

generator & crushers. The noise pollution management will be taken up in following

manner

By selecting low noise generating equipment, which would have below 75 dB at

1m distance. This is taken care at the equipment design stage.

By isolating the noise unit from the working personnel’s continuous exposure by

providing acoustic aids for plant personnel.

By administrative & safety measures, providing noise level monitoring, remedial

measures, providing noise safety appliances.

The noise impact on the surrounding environment during the construction phase

will be within acceptable limits. The operation of high noise generating

equipment shall be restricted during the night time.




Various measures proposed to reduce noise pollution include reduction of noise at

source, provision of acoustic lagging for the equipment and suction side

silencers, selection of low noise equipment and isolation of noisy equipment &

proper maintenance and lubrication. The plant personnel in noisy area will be

provided with PPE such as ear muffler & also the duration of exposure of the

personnel will be limited as per the norms.

Thick green belt development is planned for the attenuation of noise pollution and

to maintain ambient noise quality within the statutory limit.

Raw Material Handling

Solid waste generated in the raw material handling area is particulate matter. This is

collected using de-dusting equipment like Bag Filters and routed back into the process.

Measures For Improvement Of Ecology:

There is no wildlife sanctuary within the 10 km radius of the proposed plant. There will

not be any loss of plantation because of the project. The resultant ambient air and noise

quality levels after the operation of the plant will be within the prescribed limits to have

any impact on surrounding flora and fauna. Moreover there will not be any wastewater

discharge and solid waste disposal to outside the factory premises to cause any impact

on the local ecology. On the other hand the company will provide the comprehensive

green-belt cover in 33 % of the project area as per the MoEF norms to improve the local

ecology. All these steps will considerably improve upon the ecology of the area.

The company in principle shall adhere to

Plantation program will be undertaken in all available areas. This will include

plantation along the plant boundary, in the proposed plant premises, along the

internal and external roads, on solid waste dump yards and along the

administrative building and the stacking yards.

People will be educated and trained in social forestry activities by local

governmental and non-governmental organizations.

Plantation in residential and industrial areas will be done along the narrow and

broad internal roads. This will not only improve the flora in the region but also

add to the aesthetics of the region.

ToR-7(ix) & Specific ToR(vi) Action plan for the green belt

development plan in 33% area i.e. land with not less than 1,500 trees

per ha. Giving details of species, width of plantation, planning

schedule etc. shall be included. The green belt shall be around the

project boundary and a scheme for greening of roads used for the

project shall also be incorporated.

4.8 GREEN BELT DEVELOPMENT

Green vegetation cover is beneficial in many ways leading to conservation of

biodiversity, retention of soil moisture, recharge of ground water and maintaining

pleasant micro climate of the region. In addition, vegetation cover can also absorb

pollutants from the environment and helps in effective pollution control.




Green belts are planned open spaces safeguarded from developmental activities such as

construction of buildings, factories, dams, etc. Safeguarded in the sense that no

infrastructural development will be allowed on such designated areas and these areas

will only be used for growing vegetation cover on it. Green belts in and around urban

and industrial areas are important to the ecological health of any given region.

As on Date Plantation Status

Sl. No. Year of

Plantation

Type of Trees No.s

Planted

Area of Plantation Ha of Land

for

Plantation

Cost of

Plantation

in Lakhs

1 2009-2010 Debdaru, Akasia,

Krisnachura, Jujuba 18,600

Along boundary wall-Tier I 12 14.88

2 2010-2011 Kadam, Gamhar, Bottle

brush, Jhaun 15,000

Along boundary wall-Tier II 10 12.00

3 2011-2012 Mango, Jack fruit,

Sisoo, 22,500

Internal roads, Raw Material

Handling 15 24.75

4 2012-2013

Sheesum, Neem, Arjun,

Chatim, Debdaru,

Kamini

7,500

Along Conveyor belt

carrying raw material to

Coke oven

5 9.37

5 2013-2014 Chikoo,Mango,

Arjuna,Chatiman 10,500

Along Coke oven plant 7 13.65

6 2014-2015 Debdaru, kadam,Arjun,

Neem 4,500

Around RWH pond, Internal

roads 3 6.52

7 2015-2016 Replenish the dead trees

- 1.25

8 2016-2017

Akasia, Kanchan,

Neem, Pyara, Jamun,

Kamini

6000

Along railway siding

4 15.00

9 2017-2018 Neem, Debdaru,

Jackfruit 2000

Along Coke oven plant - 16.96

10 2018-2019 Replenish the dead trees - 0.75

Total 11216

56.0 115.13

PROPOSED TARGET

Dead plants will be replenished in coming years.

4.9 SOCIO-ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT

The proposed plant site has been chosen primarily because of its proximity to the raw

material source and infrastructure facilities. The benefits include;

• Generation of employment;

• Establishment of small and medium scale engineering ancillaries, with cascading

employment opportunities;

• Increased revenue to the state by way of taxes and duties;

• Improved green cover;

• Better communication and transport facilities;

• Better educational facility




• Improvement in health care sector

The proposed project shall enhance the prospects of employment. Recruitment for the

unskilled workers for the proposed plant will be from the nearby villages. The

development of the basic amenities viz. roads, transportation, electricity, drinking water,

proper sanitation, educational institutions, medical facilities, entertainment, etc. will be

developed as far as possible.

The company shall give special emphasis on skill development of unemployed youth of

the surrounding locality. With the help of Govt. agencies and local NGOs they will pursue

the unskilled youth for augmentation of their skill by undergoing onsite training during

construction and operation phase in order to develop skilled workforce pool. The

surrounding Industries will also be persuaded with the help of govt. department to

develop such work force./ Apprentice trainees will be provided with stipend and

encourage to undertake skill development training during construction and operation

phase so that they can get engagement in the company.

4.10 IRREVERSIBLE AND IRRETRIEVABLE COMMITMENTS OF ENVIRONMENTAL

COMPONENTS

A resource commitment is considered irreversible when impacts from its use would limit

future use options and the change cannot be reversed, reclaimed, or repaired.

Irreversible commitments generally occur to nonrenewable resources such as minerals or

cultural resources, and to those resources that are renewable only over long-time spans,

such as soil productivity.

A resource commitment is considered irretrievable when the use or consumption of the

resource is neither renewable nor recoverable for use by future generations until

reclamation is successfully applied. Irretrievable commitments generally apply to the loss

of production, harvest, or natural resources and are not necessarily irreversible

Although not all of the 161.87 ha of M/s BEL plant site would actually be developed, it is

likely that the entire site would be unavailable for other uses, once the project comes

into operation. However, after the operational life of the project is over and the plant

and linear facilities have been decommissioned and reclaimed, the land would again be

available for other uses. Therefore, during the lifespan of the project, land use would

experience an irretrievable impact.

Existing facilities would be cleared, graded, and filled, as needed, to suit construction of

the project. These actions would result in additional impacts that are irreversible and/or

irretrievable. Existing vegetation and soils would be removed, causing mortality of some

wildlife, such as burrow-dwelling species and slow-moving species that are unable to

relocate when ground-disturbance activities begin. In addition, the vegetation and soil

habitats would be lost for future use by wildlife until reclamation could be successfully

implemented. The direct mortality of wildlife would be an irreversible impact and the loss

of habitat would be an irretrievable impact.

The loss of top soil, which requires a very long time to generate would constitute an

irreversible and irretrievable resource commitment; however, reclamation would likely

include replacing any lost topsoil and not relying on natural soil-producing processes.

Therefore, it is likely that the soil removal would ultimately be an irretrievable impact but

not irreversible.

It has been proposed to store this valuable resource which is excavated during

construction stage and reused in green belt etc. Again fly ash generated from the project




will be used as brick in construction work, so that conventional use of making brick from

topsoil and burning and damaging it can be avoided.

Process water would be used primarily in the cooling towers, which would convert the

water to vapor. Potable water used during construction and operations would be

discharged through a septic system. the project would not directly discharge any of the

process or potable water to source of surface water. Rain water to be harvested and

used in the process or can be charged to ground water table.

4.11 ASSESSMENT OF SIGNIFICANCE OF IMPACTS (CRITERIA FOR

DETERMINING SIGNIFICANCE, ASSIGNING SIGNIFICANCE)

The last step in the impact assessment process is determining the magnitude and

significance of impacts. This determination provides decision makers with the

information needed to determine if a project should be approved or modified in some

way that would make impacts acceptable.

Impact magnitude depends on the degree and extent to which the project changes the

environment and usually varies according to project phase. In general, most project

impacts are associated with construction and operations. Site characterization has fewer

impacts and decommissioning and reclamation impacts are relatively short-lived and

should result in an improvement in conditions relative to the operational period.

Determining the significance of impacts can be one of the most difficult aspects of an

impact assessment. Quantification of impact magnitude is typically an objective,

scientifically based process. But once impact magnitude is determined, the analyst must

decide on the significance of those impacts. Decision makers typically consider only the

significant impacts in deciding among alternatives. Significant impacts will be the focus of mitigation measures and possible adjustment of project features.

Factors to consider in determining impact significance often parallel those factors used to

determine impact magnitude. These factors include but are not limited to:

Area of Influence: Impact significance is often directly related to the size of the

area affected. An example would be the acres of land disturbed.

Percentage of Resource Affected: The greater the percentage of a resource

affected, the more significant the impact.

Persistence of Impacts: Permanent or long-term changes are usually more

significant than temporary ones. The ability of the resource to recover after the

activities are complete is related to this effect.

Sensitivity of Resources: Impacts to sensitive resources are usually more

significant than impacts to those that are relatively resilient to impacts.

Status of Resources: Impacts to rare or limited resources are usually

considered more significant than impacts to common or abundant resources.

Regulatory Status: Impacts to resources that are protected (e.g., endangered

species, wetlands, air quality, cultural resources, water quality) typically are

considered more significant than impacts to those without regulatory status. Note

that many resources with regulatory status are rare or limited.

Societal Value: Some resources have societal value, such as sacred sites,

traditional subsistence resources, and recreational areas. Note that some of these resources also have regulatory status.

https://teeic.indianaffairs.gov/glossary/glossary.htm#114








Category of impact

Small Impact: This is an impact that is limited to the immediate project area,

affects a relatively small proportion of the local population (less than 10%), and

does not result in a measurable change in carrying capacity or population size in

the affected area.

Moderate Impact: This is an impact that extends beyond the immediate project

area, affects an intermediate proportion of the local population (10 to 30%), and

results in a measurable but moderate (not destabilizing) change in carrying

capacity or population size in the affected area.

Large Impact: This is an impact that extends beyond the immediate project

area, could affect more than 30% of a local population, and could result in a

large, measurable, and destabilizing change in carrying capacity or population size in the affected area.

Factors to consider in determining impact magnitude include but are not limited

to:

Area of Influence: The impact magnitude is often directly related to the size of

the area affected. In this case 10km radius of BEL project site.

Overlap Between Area of Influence and Resource of Interest: The impact

magnitude is often directly related to the area of overlap between resources and

the overall area of influence for the project.

Deviation from Current or Baseline Conditions: For projects that affect air or

water quality, how much would concentrations of contaminants increase. For

projects that result in a large influx of workers, what is the current capacity of

housing, schools, and other support services?

Project Duration: Magnitude is often directly proportional to the lifespan of the

project, beyond which it is likely to have much less impact.

Sensitivity of the Resources: Some species appear to be very sensitive to

disturbance whereas others are fairly tolerant of disturbance (e.g., many plant

species adapt to disturbance).

Project Timing: Project activities that occur during periods of sensitivity (e.g.,

nesting season, high-precipitation periods) have greater impacts than at other times.

Quantifying Impacts

Impact magnitude is usually quantified on the basis of the factors listed above. Simple

calculations (e.g., summing area of influence, calculating areas of overlap between

resources and area of influence, determining project duration) or complex mathematical

models (e.g., modeling changes in water concentrations or air emission dispersions) are used to quantify impacts.

Often, the magnitude of impacts cannot be readily quantified. This can result from

incomplete data or a poor understanding of the effect the project will have on resources.

In these cases, professional judgment is usually used to describe in qualitative terms

what the magnitude of impacts would be.

When determining impact magnitude, conservative assumptions are often used.

Examples of conservative assumptions include assuming that all plants and animals in

the project footprint will be killed, that the project will result in a fairly high decrease in

property values, and that emission control features will be some percentage below

design levels. Sometimes a “worst-case” situation is assumed. The purpose of using

conservative assumptions is to ensure that impacts are not underestimated.





Conservative assumptions can sometimes result in unrealistically high estimates of

impact magnitude. The use of professional judgment in identifying assumptions is

essential to ensure that the results are conservative but not unrealistic.

Even with conservative assumptions, impacts that are poorly understood (e.g., the

response of resources to the environmental changes brought about by the project is not

known) can be underestimated or improperly characterized. Conservative assumptions

can result in greatly overestimating impacts and unnecessary costs for a project

if mitigations are not properly directed and scaled to the impact.

Monitoring programs are usually developed to determine or verify the impacts to various

resources. An important component of any monitoring program will specifically address

uncertainties. Resolving uncertainties will be important for future related projects, fine-tuning of operations, and refinement of a mitigation strategy.

For M/s BEL; significance of impact has been taken on 10km radius of project site and

dispersion model of PM10, PM2.5, SO2 and NOx has been made using software and

concentration of these pollutants of different villages have been shown on isopleths in

this chapter and impacts have been found to be within allowable limit, with installation of pollution control equipments.

CONCLUSION

This chapter described details of predicted environmental impacts due to the project,

measures for minimising and offsetting adverse impact identified during construction

phase as well as operational phase along with EMP at design stage and operational

phase.Estimation of APC devices, rain water harvesting structures, green belt

development. If the industry doesn’t fit to the present technology & location related to

environmental and social aspects then there is a need to select a better technology and

alternate site where it will be most suitable for setting the industry.





CHAPTER-5

ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES (TECHNOLOGY & SITE)

M/s Bengal Energy Limited is running its project on 161.87 ha of land at-Dauka, in

Paschim Medinipur district of WB. At present the unit has a 0.6 MTPA coke oven plant

and 40 MW power plant based on waste heat recovery from its coke oven gas.

The company is proposing its expansion to manufacture 1.0 MTPA steel billet, generate

205 MW power from waste heat recovery and AFBC completely utilizing char from DRI Kilns.

The process route of steel billet production is DRI Kiln-MBF-EAF/IF-LRF. This route is well

established and proven and many steel plands in the country and abroad are successfully

running on this route. No alternative technology/ new technology has been proposed for the project.

No alternative has also been proposed for the project, as the expansion will be carried

out on available vacant space of the existing 161.87 ha of land. The land is adequate for 1.0 MTPA billet manufacturing project.

CONCLUSION

It is well appraised that the technology considered and the location selected fulfils the

criteria for the expansion project, but then follow up action is needed, by

periodic/continuous monitoring of various aspects of environment, finding out deviations

from permissible limit and corrective measure for sustainability of project and

environment. This aspect need to be dealt in next chapter.




CHAPTER-6

ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME

M/s Bengal Energy Ltd is at present running with 0.6 MTPA Non-Recovery Coke Oven

Plant and 40 MW captive Power Plant.

The company is now proposing expansion to become 1.0 MTPA Integrated Steel Plant

with 1.2 MTPA Non-recovery Coke Oven and 205 MW Power Plant within the existing

plant premises.

The company has already chalked out a comprehensive Environmental Monitoring

Program for sustainable targeted production for existing unit and this will be extended to

the expansion units also.

6.1 TECHNICAL ASPECTS OF MONITORING THE EFFECTIVENESS OF

MITIGATION MEASURES

Regular monitoring of environmental parameters like air, water, noise and soil as well as

performance of pollution control facilities and safety measures in the plant are important

for proper environmental management of any project. Therefore, the environment and

safety cell has already been formed to handle monitoring of air and water pollutants as

well as the solid wastes generation & utilisation as per the directiveof State Pollution

Control Board and Central Pollution Control Board. Proposed monitoring schedule for

environmental parameters is given in the table below.

6.2 ADVANTAGES OF MONITORING

Monitoring of various parameters will be carried out regularly to:

Find out pollution level inside the plant and in nearby area in 10km radius buffer

zone, at specified monitoring stations to compile data and know the trend for

remedial measure.

Monitoring data gives clear indication of plant health.

Find out efficiency level of pollution control measures adopted and scope for

improvements.

Laboratory Facilities

The company has an Environmental laboratory to analyze important pollution parameters

like pH & BOD of water, analysis of raw material, product, noise monitoring near various

equipments etc. However, NABL/MoEF Accredited laboratory is being outsourced for

periodic monitoring of stack flue gas, ambient air quality, surface and ground water

quality and other various parameters.

Gen.ToR-7(xii)& Specific ToR(iv) Action plan for post project

environmental monitoring shall be submitted.

Depending upon prevailing predominant wind direction AAQ monitoring stations have

been decided where monitoring instruments shall be installed for measuring polluting

parameters at regular intervals.




Pollution load is normally high during winter days and predominant wind direction in

project buffer zone is North and North East. Hence following villages in South and South

West direction at different distances from project site and having settlements have been

selected for installing regular monitoring stations.

Infact isopleth of pollutants at these stations show comparatively higher value than

other locations.

6.3 SAMPLING LOCATIONS

Sl.

No.

Locations Distance

(Km)

Direction w.r.t

project

1 Daharpur 5.89 S

2 Nutandih 5.54 SW

All Pollution control equipment will be provided with separate electricity meter

and totalizer for continuous recording of power consumption.

The amperage of the ID fan will also be recorded continuously. Non-functioning of

Pollution control equipment will be recorded in the same logbook along with

reasons for not running the Pollution Control Equipment.

The safety cap/emergency stack of rotary kiln type plant, which is generally

installed above the After-Burner Chamber (ABC) of feed end column will not be

used for discharging untreated emission, bypassing the air pollution control

device.

In order to prevent bypassing of emissions through safety cap and non-operation

of ESP or any other pollution control device, software controlled interlocking

facility has been proposed to be provided on the basis of real time data from the

plant control system, to ensure stoppage of feed conveyor, so that, feed to the

kiln would stop automatically, if safety cap of the rotary kiln is opened or ESP is

not in operation. The system should be able to take care of multiple operating

parameters and their inter relations to prevent any possibility of defeating the

basic objective of the interlock. The system should be foolproof to prevent any

kind of tempering. The software based interlocking system, proposed to be

installed by industry should be get approved by the concerned State Pollution

Control Board, for its adequacy, before installation by the industry.

Stack Emission from de-dusting units All de-dusting units should be connected to

a stack having a minimum stack height of 30 m. Sampling porthole and platform

etc. shall be provided as per CPCB emission regulation to facilitate stack

monitoring. De-dusting units can also be connected to ABC Chamber and finally

emitted through common stack with kiln off-gas emissions. Fugitive Emission The

measurement may be done, preferably on 8-hour basis with high volume

sampler. However, depending upon the prevalent conditions at the site, the

period of measurement can be reduced.

Siting Guideline for Sponge Iron Plants Siting of new sponge iron plants has been

as per State Pollution Control Board guidelines.

i. Residential habitation (residential localities/ village) and ecologically and/or

otherwise sensitive areas: A minimum distance of at least 1000 m (1.0 km)

has been maintained. The location of Sponge Iron Plant is more than 500 m

away from National Highway and State Highway.

ii. Radial distance between two Sponge Iron Plants is more than 5 km for plants

having capacity 1000 TPD or more.




iii. Sponge Iron Plants can be established in designated industrial areas / Estates

as notified by State Govt.

iv. If any plant/clusters of plants are located within 1 km from any residential

area/ village they may be shifted by State Pollution Control Board/ State Govt.

in a phased manner for which a time bound action plan is to be prepared by

SPCBs.

6.4 DATA ANALYSIS

The Ground water samples are to be analyzed for various parameters as per IS: 10500

and Surface water as IS: 2296 Class-C standards with the specified procedure. The

methodology which will be adopted for monitoring & analysis of PM10, PM2.5 SO2, NOx will

be as per IS: 5182 standards. Samples are to be analyzed for SO2 using improved West-

Gaeke method for air samples using a spectrophotometer at a wavelength of 560 nm.

Samples will be analyzed for NOx using Jacob and hocheiser modified (Na-As) method,

for air samples using a spectrophotometer at wavelength of 400 nm. RPM & SPM in

ambient air can be found by using respirable dust sampler (RDS).

6.5 REPORTING SCHEDULE

After every six months of plant operation six monthly reports covering all the parameters

of study period has to be prepared engaging external accredited agency and after

completion of analysis a copy of all the analysis reports are to be sent to the State

Pollution Control Board. A copy of the reports are to be maintained in the plant and will

be made available to the concerned inspecting authorities. Abnormality to be reported to

Board of Directors to take decision on remedial measure




Table 6.1 Monitoring Schedule

Sl

No

Environ

ment

particula

rs Description Areas/Locations

Frequency of

Monitoring

Duration of

sampling

Monitoring

Parameters Data Analysis

Reporting

Schedule Action Plan

1

Air AAQ

1. Daharpur

2.Nutandih Twice in a week 24 hrs

PM10,PM2.5,SO

2,NOx, CO,

Ammonia, Lead,

Nickel, Arsenic

West-Gaeke

Method using

Spectroohoto

mer, Jacob

and

Hocheiser

method

After every six

months of plant

operation six

monthly reports

covering all the

parameters of

study period has

to be prepared

engaging

external

accredited

agency and

after completion

of analysis a

copy of all the

analysis reports

are to be sent to

the State

Pollution Control

Board. A copy of

the reports are

to be

maintained in

the plant and

will be made

available to the

concerned

inspecting

authorities.

Abnormality

to be recorded

and intimated

to Head of

Organisation

and corrective

Measures to

be

Implemented

Fugitive 1. RMHP

2. Internal Roads Twice in a Month SPM

Stack

Emissions

1. DRI Kilns

2. CPP

3. IFs

4. EAF

5. Sinter

6.MBF

Online Monitoring Continuous

PM10, PM2.5,

SO2,NOx,CO,

Flow rate,

Temp.

West-Gaeke

Method using

Spectrophoto

mer

2

Water Surface

Water

1. Pond Water of

Nutandih

2. Pond water of

Dauka

Twice in a year

1. Pre-Monsoon

2. Post-Monsson

Heavy Metals will be

monitored Once in a

month.

Grab

Sample

Parameters as per Class"C"

IS:2296

3

Ground

Water 1.Tubewell of

Daharpur

2.Tubewell of

Nutandih

Twice in a year

1. Pre-Monsoon

2. Post-Monsson

Heavy Metals will be

monitored Once in a

month.

Grab

Sample

Parameters as per Class"C"

IS:10500

4

ETP, CT

and Boiler Inside plant Once in a Month

Grab

Sample

pH, COD,

TSS,Oil &




Blowdowns Grease, BOD

5

STP

Inside plant Once in a Month

Grab

Sample

pH, COD,

TSS,Oil &

Grease, BOD

6 Noise Noise

1. Along the

boundary wall

2. Daharpur

3.Nutandih Once in 6 Months

8 hrs

continuous

with 1 hr

interval

1.Lday

2. Lnight

3. Ldn

7

Occupati

onal

Health

1. Workers in the

plant Once in a year

Chest, Xray,

Vision, ECG,

Spirometry,

Audiometry etc




6.6 BUDGETORY PROVISIONS FOR EMP

Gen.Tor-7(xi) Total Capital Cost And Recurring Cost/Annum For

Environmental Pollution Control Measures .

ToR 8(iv)Plan and fund allocation to ensure the occupational health &

safety of all contract and casual workers.

The company will invest 155 Crore (about 4 % of total project cost) as capital

investment towards implementation of Environmental Management Plan. The Annual

recurring cost will be about 18 crore details are as follows.

Investment towards EMP Implementation & its yearly maintenance is given in Table 6.3

Table 6.2 Investment towards EMP, Implementation & its yearly

maintenance

Category

Capital Cost

(INR Cr)

Recurring Cost

(INR Cr)

Air pollution Equipments 111.65 8

Water Pollution Control Machinery

& Construction

28 3

Rainwater Harvesting 2.5 0.8

Occupational Health 1.5 1

Green Belt Development 0.10 0.03

Environmental Monitoring 1.1 0.5

Solid Waste management 3.2 1.5

Safety & Disaster Management 5.3 2.5

EMS & Capacity Development 1.75 1

Total 155.1 18.33

Additional ToR. 7 Plan for The Implementation Of The Recommendations Made

For The Steel Plants In The CREP Guidelines

All the charter on corporate responsibility for environmental protection(CREP)

recommendations for integrated steel project will be implemented & followed strictly

which has been stated in table below.

Table 6.3 CREP Compliance

Sl.

No. CREP Conditions Compliance

1 Technology The organization will adopt the latest state of the art

technology with in-built pollution control measures

2 Fugitive emissions

reduction in SMS

Dedusting of Cast house at tap holes, runners, skimmers ladle

and charging points, swivel hood, Fume Extraction Chamber

followed by adequate capacity bag filtration will control

emission within the norms. RMHS-Dust extraction

&suppression using water sprinklers, Dry Fog in closed

conveyors & Bag filters




3

Direct inject of reducing

agents in MBF. Energy

recovery of top BF gas.

Pulverized coal injection in MBF has been proposed

MBF top pressure to be utilized to run turbine and generate

power to the tune of 35kw/t of hot metal produced

4

To operate pollution

control equipment

efficiently and to keep

proper record of run

hours, failure time and

efficiency with

immediate effect.

Compliance report in

this regard be submitted

to CPCB/SPCB every

three months

Energy meter has been proposed to be installed in ESPs to

keep record of running hours and reported to SPCB, WB. Non-

conformance to be reported to Board of Directors. Sensible

heat BF gas, Non-recovery Coke-oven hot gas shall be used in

WHRB for captive power generation.ESP will control dust

emission.

5

To reduce specific water

consumption to 5 m3/t

for long products and 8

m3/t for flat products

Unit proposes production of billets and water consumption is

proposed with 6448 m3/day water excluding power plant

consumption but including domestic, coke oven etc. hence it

is coming to about 2.3 m3/t, there is no provision of rolling

mill at present to produce long or flats.

6

Reduction Green House

Gases by Reduction in

power consumption, Use

of by products gases for

power generation.

Promotion of Energy

Optimisation technology

including energy/ audit

BF gas has been proposed to be utilized to generate power.

Power reduction measures have been proposed. Power

recovery from DRI kiln flue gas, use of Variable frequency

Drive ID fans, Silicon-controlled rectifier, capacitor Bank, hot

metal charging in LF/IF, selection of medium frequency

coreless IFs and minimization of air consumption in FBCs are

the power saving steps suggested for the unit

7

Installation of

Continuous stack

monitoring system

Continuous stack monitoring system to be implemented and

regular ambient air monitoring will be done as per the

guidelines.

8 L C A

Life Cycle Assessment (LCA) is a decision cum management

tool which provides information on the environmental effects

of various products and processes so as to arrive at necessary

corrective measures to make the entire process efficient with

optimal utilization of resources and minimal wastes

generation. Steps to be taken to minimize pollution from

receiving ore from mines to utilization of end product and in

every intermediate stages.




9 Solid Waste /Hazardous

Waste Management

There will be generation of fly ash, bottom ash, BF slag, IF

slag, BF dust &sludge from the plant processes. Fly ash will

be fully utilized in brick making by external manufacturing

agencies, utilization of ground granulated BF slag and fly ash

in cement plants and recycle of BF dust &sludge in sinter

plant has been proposed. Small amount of non-process

hazardous waste like used oil and exhausted batteries shall

be handed over to authorized resources.

10 Good house keeping

Green belt along boundary and tree plantation by the side of

internal roads, material handling area, regular water

sprinkling on roads and removal of MSW on regular basis will

help in good housekeeping. Again, scheduled preventive

maintenance and regular lubrication of moving machineries

will losses due to break down and help in good house keeping

and thereby prevent accidents. M/s BEL is a polythene free

Plant. All the employees spare time every week for cleaness

of the plant.

CONCLUSION

It is highly essential to have a regular environmental monitoring to monitor the post

project environment standards, like establishing a laboratory selection of sampling

locations, data analysis and budgetary provision for EMP, so that later it can be assessed

if there is a change in the ambient environmental conditions. After considering the

environment point of view, there will be evaluation on the risk and hazard involved in the

occupation in the next chapter. An industry cannot survive ignoring issues of people

residing in surrounding area of project who contribute for sustainability of project and

also affected by the project, hence there is need to listen people and take their views

before setting up a project. This need to be addressed in next chapter.




CHAPTER-7 ADDITIONAL STUDIES

7.1 RISK ASSESSMENT & DISASTER MANAGEMENT:

M/s Bengal Energy Ltd, at-Daukais at present running with 0.6 MTPA Non-Recovery/heat

recovery Coke Oven and 40 MW Power Plant. The project has proposed its expansion for

which prior EC is in the process.

After expansion, the facilities will be as follows:

1. 2x0.6 MTPA non-recovery Coke oven Plant with waste heat recovery boiler

2. 4x500 TPD DRI kilns

3. 4x350 TPD DRI Kilns

4. 2x320m3 MBF

5. 1x60m2 Iron Ore Sinter plant

6. 2x80T EAF with CCM

7. 3x20T IF with CCM

8. 35 MW AFBC based Power plant

9. 22 MW BF gas fired based Power Plant

10. 80 MW Coke Oven gas(WHRB) power Plant

11. 68 MW DRI kiln flue gas(WHRB) Power Plant &

12. 120 TPD ASU.

Besides these operating processes, which can cause major hazards due to leakage of

toxic gases and red hot metal liquids; there will be one month’s fuel stock at all the time

of a year. Coal will be stocked under shed and LDO in 150 KL above ground tank; these

are combustible and Fire/ pool fire is anticipated from these materials

It is presumed that the proposed steel plant would be designed and engineered with all

possible safety measures and standard code of practices of engineering. In spite of this,

there may be some design deficiency or due to operation and maintenance fault which

may lead to accidental events causing damage to the life and property. This chapter

presents an overview of environmental risks associated with the production facilities,

suggested remedial measures and a model outline of the emergency preparedness plan.

7.2 OBJECTIVES

The objectives of environmental risk assessment are governed by the following, which

excludes natural calamities:

To identify the potential hazardous areas so that necessary design safety

measures can be adopted to minimize the probability of accidental events.

To identify the potential areas of environmental disaster which can be prevented

by proper design of the installations and its controlled operation

To manage the emergency situation or a disastrous event, if any, from the plant

operation.

Managing a disastrous event will obviously require prompt action by the operators and

the crisis management personnel using all their available resources like alerting the

people and other plant personnel remaining inside, deployment of firefighting equipment,

operation of emergency shut off valves, opening of the escape doors, rescue etc.




Minimizing the immediate consequences of a hazardous event include cordoning off,

evacuation, medical assistance and giving correct information to the families of the

affected persons and local public for avoiding rumors and panic.

Lastly, an expert committee is required to probe the cause of such events and the losses

encountered and suggest remedial measures for implementation so that in future such

events or similar events do not recur.

7.3 DEFINITION OF ENVIRONMENTAL RISK

The following terms related to environmental risks are defined before reviewing the

environmental risks:

Harm : Damage to the person, property or environment.

Hazard : Something with the potential to cause harm; this could be

a Characteristic of material being processed or malfunctioning

of the equipment. An environmental hazard is thus going to be

a set of circumstances, which leads to the direct or indirect

degradation of environment and damage to the life and

property.

Risk : The probability of the harm or likelihood of harmful

occurrence being released and its severity. Environmental risk

is a measure of the potential threat to the environment, life

and property.

Consequence: Effect due to occurrence of the event, which may endanger the

Environment permanently or temporarily and, or, loss of life and

property.

Environmental The consequence is so severe that it can extensively damage a

Disaster : one or all the four components of the environment, namely, (i)

Physico-chemical, (ii) biological, (iii) human and (iv) aesthetics.

7.4 IDENTIFICATION OF HAZARDS

The hazards are attributable due to raw materials and chemicals used in steel making

and the plant operation. A list of major raw materials used in the plant and the process

units with their hazard potential is presented in Table below.

Gen. ToR 3(x) Hazard Identification and details of proposed safety measures.




Table 7.1 Hazard Identification of the Proposed Steel Plant

SL NO ACTIVITY CREATING

HAZARD

Rank Risk

potential

Preventive Measures Likelihood of occurrenc

e (A)

RANK

Likelihood

of detection

(B)

RANK

Severity of

consequence

( C )

RANK =

(A+B)XC

Oxygen Plant

1 Handling of Liquid Oxygen HIGH 4 MODERATE 3 LOW 6 42 Leather apron, leather gloves and safety shoes

DRI

1 Cleaning of cooler transfer chute

HIGH 4 VERY LOW 5 MODERATE 8 72 Safety rope and PPE to be used

2 cleaning of dust settling chamber

HIGH 4 VERY LOW 5 MODERATE 8 72

Use of PPE like safety shoes,

helmets, gloves, aprons and goggles

SMS

1 Fall of material due to Excess N2 purging

LOW 2 VERY HIGH 1 HIGH 10 30 Purging to be done with calculated amount of N2

2 Burn injury due to overflow of hot material

LOW 2 VERY HIGH 2 HIGH 10 40 Use of PPE like safety shoes, helmets, gloves, aprons and goggles

3 Burn injury due to broken of wire rope

LOW 2 VERY LOW 5 HIGH 10 70 Cordening of area with hooter arrangement during transportation

4 Fall of ladle due to broken of hanger

LOW 2 VERY LOW 5 HIGH 10 70 Cordening of area with hooter arrangement during transportation

5 Slip and fall due to accumulation of sponge iron on shop floor

MODERATE 3 MODERATE 3 LOW 6 36 Use of PPE like safety shoes, helmets, gloves, aprons and goggles

6 Falling of scrap due to mishandling of scrap during

charging of scrap to SMS

MODERATE 3 MODERATE 3 MODERATE 8 48 Use of helmets and safety shoes




7

SLIPING OF PERSONS DUE TO Spillage of material on the shop floor during charging of raw material through mobile

equipment

MODERATE 3 MODERATE 3 MODERATE 8 48 Use of PPE like safety shoes, helmets, gloves, aprons and goggles

8 Electrical Flashing / shock during Air cleaning of furnace capacitors and switch gear

LOW 2 LOW 4 HIGH 10 60 Electrical isolation, tagging, spot earthing

9 Electrical Shock during Checking of Capacitor bank

VERY LOW 1 MODERATE 3 MODERATE 8 32 Rubber hand gloves and insulator tools

11 Occurrence of static electricity/electric spark in the Mill Cellar Room

VERY LOW 1 VERY LOW 5 HIGH 10 60 Proper earthing to be ensured

12 Splashing of molten metal and slag

LOW 2 VERY HIGH 1 HIGH 10 30 Face shield, helmet, asbestos appron

Rolling Mill

1 Fall of material during hot slab handling

LOW 2 VERY LOW 5 HIGH 10 70 Sling to be checked from time to time, Use of PPE

2 BODY PART in between slab/chain

LOW 2 VERY LOW 5 MODERATE 8 56 Use of Hand gloves, Stopper switch at short intervals

3 Fire due to Electric short circuit during Firing with Tar

LOW 2 VERY LOW 5 LOW 6 42 Use of MCB

4 Back firing during Firing with Producer gas

LOW 2 VERY LOW 5 LOW 6 42 Use of Face shield

5

Fall of Plate, Cutting set, Fall

on person during Plate/Cobble Cutting

LOW 2 VERY LOW 5 LOW 6 42 Use of helmet

6 Collision of hot coil strips during Shifting of Coil

LOW 2 very low 5 low 6 42 To be mechanically handled

7 Falling of objects from top MODERATE 3 VERY LOW 5 MODERATE 8 64 Use of helmet & Safety Shoe

8 Un safe disposal of oily wastes of Rolling Mills

HIGH 4 Low 4 Moderate 8 64 To be collected in drums and capped

CPP




1

Furnace oil transfer from tanker to storage tank

LOW 2 HIGH 2 MODERATE 8 32 To be transferred Mechanically and Use of PPE 1.Slip & Fall

2. Fire

2

Operation of Boiler

LOW 2 LOW 4 HIGH 10 60

Periodic NDT to know the thickness of pipe and replacement with thinned down pipes.

Interlocking of ID fan running with LDO firing.

1.EXPLOSION

2.TUBE LEAKAGE

3. BACKFIRE

3 Oil leakage from bearings &

oil line on main steam line LOW 2 LOW 4 LOW 6 36

Shrouding of evaporator coil

4 Chemical handling MODERATE 3 LOW 4 MODERATE 8 56

Use of PPE like safety shoes, helmets, gloves, aprons and goggles 1. ACID / ALKALI SPILLAGE

5 Generation of dust during ash

unloading on trucks VERY HIGH 5 VERY HIGH 1 LOW 6 36 Use of Dusk Mask

6 Fall from height while working in the height

LOW 2 LOW 4 HIGH 10 60 Use of safety belt

7 Oil wastes/oil sludge handling LOW 2 High 2 Mode rate 8 32 Use of PPE like safety shoes, helmets, gloves, aprons and

goggles

8 Collapsing of acid/ alkali storage tanks

VERY LOW 1 High 2 High 10 30 Use of vacuum breaker

9 Leakages of steam line LOW 2 HIGH 2 MODERATE 8 32 NDT of steam line at regular intervals specially at bends and thermal insulation of pipeline

SINTER PLANT

1 Working near moving equipment

HIGH 4 LOW 2 HIGH 10 60 Guards for moving equipment, PPE

2 Generation of dust NOx, SOx & Dioxins

HIGH 4 HIGH 4 MODERATE 8 64 PPE like mask, Good ventilation of Working Place.




From the Table, it may be observed that the major on-site emergency situation may

occur from the organic coal chemicals storage and handling, fuel gas handling, molten

metal and slag handling, acids and alkali storage and handling and electrical short-

circuit. The off-site environmental disaster may occur if large-scale fire and explosion

occurs, the effect of which extends beyond the plant boundary. The off-site

environmental disaster may occur due to significant environmental degradation for a

sustained period.Off-site environmental disaster not envisaged for this integrated steel

plant. However pool fires from fuel oil storage tanks are not ruled out, and needs

addressal.

7.5 ENVIRONMENTAL RISK EVALUATION

From environmental hazards point of view for the raw materials and consumable

chemicals and processing of the same in various production units, relative risk potential

analysis is made on the following three factors:

Likelihood of occurrence

Likelihood of detection

Severity of consequences

Each of these factors is graded and compiled to determine the risk potential. The factors

governing the determination of relative risk potentials are presented in the Table 7-2.

Table 7.2 – Determination of Risk Potential

Likely hood of

occurrence Likelihood of detection

Severity of

consequences

Criteria (A) Rank Criteria (B) Rank Criteria (C) Rank

Very High 5 Very High 1 None 2

High 4 High 2 Minor 4

Moderate 3 Moderate 3 Low 6

Low 2 Low 4 Moderate 8

Very low 1 Very low 5 High 10

RISK POTENTIAL (RP) = (A+B) X C

Based on the above stated criteria for assessing the risk, each probable event has been

evaluated by addressing several questions on the probability of event occurrence in the

view of the in-built design features detection response, operational practice and its likely

consequence. A summarized list of environmental risk potential for the likely events is

presented in Table 6-3

This evaluation has been done with the presumption of common events as observed

from the past experience in the operation of an integrated iron and steel plant and best

practicable designs for the proposed project. The present risk potential evaluation is

primarily based on human errors or faulty operation or failure of the control systems.




From the table 7.3, it appears that some events carry risk potential above 50. these

vents will be considered as risk prone hazardous events and need adequate safe design

operation and maintenance in order to reduce the risk.

Risk Management Measures

The Risk management measures for the proposed project activities require adoption of

best safety practice at the respective construction zones within the Works boundary. In

addition, the design and engineering of the proposed facilities would take into

consideration of the proposed protection measures for air and water environment. The

Evaluation is given in the Table No. 7.3.

7.6 DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN

Tor-7(xiii) Onsite And Offsite Disaster Preparedness And Emergency

Management Plan Including Risk Assessment And Damage Control.

Manpower

Table 7.3 Manpower to be in position

Department

/ Section

Shifts Total per

week

day

Total on

Pay Roll General I II III

Coke Oven

Plant

20 60 60 60 200 230

Sponge Iron

Plant

15 100 100 100 315 325

BF 10 30 30 30 70 75

EAF & IF 10 75 75 75 235 250

Captive Power

Plant

15 50 50 50 165 175

Sinter Plant 5 20 20 20 65 70

Maintenance

and Services

30 40 40 40 170 175

Quality

Assurance and

Lab

5 15 15 15 50 55

Total 110 390 390 390 1280 1355

From the manpower deployment table, it can be seen that at any point of time in general

shift hours 500 people will be available in plant, and 390 people during night. More over

some contract labors and security guards will be available in the plant. If it is a time of

changeover of shift additional 390 people will also be inside plant premises. Therefore,

planning has to be made for safety of these people during any onsite disaster.

In an integrated steel plant like this one, it is imperative that accidents occurring due to

unforeseen acts and events will not affect the surrounding areas. Therefore, an onsite

emergency plan for prevention and mitigations of accidents will be enough to cater for

unforeseen acts and events that may occur.




Identification of most credible Hazard Scenarios

All the anticipated hazard scenarios associated with this integrated steel plant are

critically examined and the following scenarios are identified as credible scenarios:

Credible scenario-A : Pool fire in any of 2x200 KL LDO tanks

Credible scenario- B : Pool fire in 1x200 KL FO tank

Credible scenario- C : Toxic release and fire due to CO from MBF

Credible scenario-D : Leakage of liquid Oxygen from ASU

The LDO/FO tanks will be provided with standard auxiliaries such as conservative vent

valve, flame arrestor, drain connection. Oil from these tanks shall be transferred to the

respective consumer units by 2 x 100 per cent fuel oil transfer pumps through filters.

Return oil, if any, shall be discharged back to the storage tank. The tank farm will be

provided with dyke wall and suitable fencing all around according to statutory

requirement. However accidental fire may not be ruled out.

Models done for this scenario show that credible hazard can occur in winter night time.

In this case the significant heat levels of interest(SHL) for the pool fire as predicted by

model shall be as per the following table.

There are three significant “Heat Levels” of interests which are as follows.

S H L Value Experience at

distance pool A

Experience at

Distance pool B

Indication

SHL-1 4.5 KW/m2 10.01m 9.57m Causes pain if unable

to cover the body

within 20 seconds

SHL-2 12.5 KW/m2 6.19m 5.91m Minimum energy for

melting plastic

SHL-3 37.5 KW/m2 3.68m 3.51m Sufficient to cause

damage to equipments

As pool fire can cause damage to equipments within distance estimated, no such

equipments to be constructed within that distance. This hazard is not considered as most

credible scenario.

As to toxic release and fire due to CO release, BF gas contains about 25-30% CO. This

considered as most credible scenario and for that on sight emergency plan has been

made.

Leakage of liquid Oxygen from Oxygen storage tank or ASU will vigorously accelerate the

combustion or initiate explosion of organic or oxidizable material. Many materials that

are not combustible in air(20% Oxygen) can burn in oxygen rich atmosphere. Oxygen

tank may vent rapidly or rupture violently from pressure when involved in a fire

situation.

Toxicological Information

Oxygen is neither combustible nor acutely toxic under normal pressure but helps in

combustion. So associated fire hazard due to leakage of Oxygen is rare and much less in

magnitude as compared to fire from LDO or FO tanks. The coal storage area and LDO/FO

storage tanks to be away from Oxygen storage tank.




Emergency command structure

7.7 ROLE OF KEY PERSONS

7.7.1 WORKS MAIN CONTROLLER:

He is the Managing Director of the unit and is generally available in the factory or in the

colony nearby except on tours. On emergency, he can reach work site at any odd hour

within 20 minutes time. In his absence, HOD project & co-ordination shall take up his

charge as Works Main Controller (WMC).

On being informed of an incident, he has to:

Rush to the emergency Site, collect all information from SIC.

Decide if emergency is to be declared and advise Site incident Controller

(SIC) accordingly and reach Emergency Control Room (ECR).

Advise Rescue Team Leader (RTL)/ Security Gate to blow the siren with

appropriate code for declaration of emergency.

Two minutes with a pause of five seconds for 3 times for fire hazard.

Three minutes with pause of five seconds for 5 times for Gas leakages.

Advice (Auxiliary Team Leader) ATL for communication to statutory

authorities and for mutual aid as required.




Through (Auxiliary Team Leader) ATL ensure constant communication to

statutory authorities and to mutual aid partners as required.

Maintain continuous communication with Site Incident Controller (SIC) to

review the situation and assess the possible course of action for emergency

operations.

To declare normalcy at the end of operation and advise Rescue team leader

(RTL)/security Gate to blow “all clear siren” [for 1 minute continuously].

Ensure the record keeping of emergency operations chronologically.

7.7.2 SITE INCIDENT CONTROLLER:

He is available at the factory or in the colony nearby. At any point of time and on being

informed about an accident, he has to:

Intimate the works main Controller (WMC) and proceed to the emergency

site.

Take the necessary instruction from Combat Team Leader (CTL), assess the

situation and call Rescue Team Leader (RTL) and Auxiliary Team Leader

(ATL).

Inform Works Main Controller (WMC) regarding the situation.

Take necessary steps and provide guidance to Combat Team, Rescue Team,

and Auxiliary Team Leaders to mitigate the emergency situation.

Examine for major emergency shut down operation activities, decide safe

escape route and announce for evacuation to Assembly Point.

Inform Works Main Controller (WMC) about the status of the situation at

regular intervals.

7.7.3 COMBAT TEAM LEADER

He is the leader to attend to the emergency and is available in the factory or in the

colony at any instant.

On being informed about an accident, he has to:

Immediately rush to the site and lead the team to control the situation.

Inform Site incident controller (SIC) about the incident and request him to

rush to the spot.

Instruct the rescue Team leader (RTL) for fire fighting and medical assistance.

Co-ordinate the activities of team members and combat the emergency, so as

to eliminate the route cause of the hazard.

Shut-down the plant if necessary to take up repair measures.

To arrest the leakage and spillage from various equipments, shut down the

concerned equipments.

Take necessary action to remove unwanted persons from the site of the

incident.

Keep informed about the developments to Site incident Controller (SIC).

7.7.4 RESCUE TEAM LEADER

He is the person who conducts rescue operations and should be available at any instant.

On receiving the information about the incident he has to:

Rush to site of emergency through safe route.




Ensure presence of all his team members, availability of fire fighting facilities

and take necessary action to arrest the fires/leakage of gas.

Arrange for safe escape of entrapped persons.

Make necessary arrangements to send the affected persons for immediately

medical attention through the medical officer.

Search for the missing persons on the basis of role call taken by Auxiliary

team leader (ATL).

Give the feedback to the site incident controller (SIC) about the

developments.

7.7.5 AUXILIARY TEAM LEADER

He is the communication manager for the crisis management. On being informed of the

emergency, he should proceed to Emergency Control Room (ECR) and:

Keep in constant touch with works main controller (WMC) and Site Incident

Controller (SIC).

Inform the Statutory Authorities and District Administration.

Communicate to mutual Aid Partners, Fire service stations at Kharagpur.

Send communications to District Hospital Kharagpur Road for rendering

services.

Inform the relatives of causalities and send them to their residence or hospital

as the case may be.

Take care of visit of the authorities to the Emergency site.

Give feed back to work main controller (WMC) about the status with respect

to his areas of activities.

Table 7.4 ACTION PLAN FOR ON-SITE EMERGENCY

STEP

NO

INITIATOR ACTION TO TAKE

1. The person noticing

the emergency

Inform the Security Gate, Combat team leader and the

concerned Shift-in –charge immediately.

2. Combat team Leader

(CTL)

Inform site incident Controller (SIC) and rush to spot and

organize his team.

Take charge of the situation, arrange for fire fighting and

medical first-aid available at site.

To start combating, shut-down equipments, arrest the leakage

of gas/fire.

3. Site Incident

Controller (SIC)

Inform works main controller (WMC) and rush to emergency

site.

Discuss with Combat Team Leader (CTL), assesses the

situation and call the Rescue Team Leader (RTL) & Auxiliary

Team Leader (ATL).

Organize the Rescue Team and Auxiliary Team and send the

rescue Team to site.

Arrange to evacuate the unwanted persons and call for

additional help.

Pass information to the works main controller (WMC)




periodically about the position at site.

4. Works main

Controller (WMC)

Rush to emergency site and observe the ongoing activities.

Take stock of the situation in consultation with the SIC.

Move to Emergency Control Room.

Take decision on declaration of emergency.

Advise Auxiliary Team Leader to inform the statutory

authorities and seek help of mutual aid from partners as

required.

Decide on declaration of cessation of emergency.

Ensure that the emergency operations are recorded

chronologically.

5. Rescue Team

(RTL)

Consult with Site incident controller (SIC) and organize his

team with amenities to arrest fire fighting and medical

treatment.

Rush to Emergency Site through safe route along with the

team members.

Arrange to set off the fire by fire fighting equipments and

hydrant points to arrest the fire or to evacuate the area.

Shift the injured persons to hospital by ambulance after

providing necessary first aid.

To inform the auxiliary team Leader for necessary help from

mutual aid Partners.

6. Auxiliary Team (ATL) On being directed by works main Controller (WMC) inform

about the emergency to statutory authorities.

Seek help of Mutual Aid partners and Coordinate with Mutual

Aid partners to render their services.

Arrange to inform the relatives of casualties.

Take care of visit of the authorities to the Emergency site.

7. Team members Each of the team members should follow the instruction of

concerned team leader to mitigate the emergency.

7.8 SILENT HOUR COMMAND STRUCTURE

The Senior Officers/ Key Persons of the plant remain during day time i.e. 8am to

8 pm. Hence the timing of 8pm to 8am is considered as silent hour that to 10pm

to 8am is the crucial time. Still each and every unit/section of the plant is

headed by shift in charge in the rank of Officer, Engineer or Sr. Engineer or Asst.

Manager, who shall be responsible for handling the emergency. The other

supporting/services and emergency sections like Fire Service, Ambulance,

Security, Personnel, Water Supply, Transport departments etc. are also running

for 24 hours shift wise with shift in charge and crew to handle emergency during

the silent hour till main command personnel arrive. However, most of the key

persons of the main command structure reside in nearby area and can reach

within minimum time.

The command structure of the silent hour shall be same as during normal hour,

however, during the silent hour, the operation Shift-in charge of the concerned




area where the fire or leakage of gas has taken place, shall act as SIC-in –

charge, till the arrival of actual designation members.

Since WMC, SIC, CTL, RTL & ATL may not be available inside the plant; they shall

be informed by the SIC-in-charge either by telephone or by sending special

messengers to their residences.

On receiving the information WMC, SIC, CTL, RTL & ATL shall reach the site

immediately & simultaneously take actions to ensure the presence of their

respective team members.

Therefore the action plan as well as the role of key person shall be same as the

normal hour execution of command structure.

7.9 ACTIVATION & CLOSING PROCEDURE FOR ON-SITE EMERGENCY

7.9.1 ACTIVATION PROCEDURE

The person noticing the incident of fire or leakage of gas, shall inform about the location

& nature of fire to the combat team Leader (CTL), security Gate and concerned Shift-in-

charge.

Combat team Leader (CTL) shall inform site incident controller (SIC) and shall rush to

the site immediately. He shall arrange for fire fighting and first aid available at site. He

shall arrange to take necessary steps to eliminate the root cause of fire.

Site incident controller (SIC) on getting information shall inform the WMC and reach the

site at the earliest. He shall take over the charge and shall direct Rescue Team Leader

(RTL)) to carry out rescue operations including fire fighting and medical attention. Site

incident controller (SIC) shall co-ordinate with Combat team leader (CTL) to eliminate

the root cause of fire.

- Work main controller (WMC), on arrival at site shall take stock of the situation

from site incident controller (SIC) and then rush to emergency control room

(ECR) to declare emergency on the basis of assessment made by (Site incident

controller (SIC). He shall give direction to the security gate/ (Rescue team

Leader) RTL to activate siren.

Two Minutes with a pause of five seconds for 3 times for fire Accident.

Three Minutes with a pause of five seconds for 5 times for leakage of gas.

- Rescue Team Leader (RTL) shall mobilize fire fighting and medical resources to

site and shall assist (Site incident Controller) SIC.

- Auxiliary Team Leader (ATL) shall take charge of Emergency Control Room

(ECR), shall ensure smooth operation of ECR and shall inform relatives of

casualties. Informs mutual Aid partners and ensures their arrival at site if

required.

- Auxiliary Team Leader (ATL) informs statutory authorities and district

administration regarding emergency suitably and coordinates their visit at site.

- Works main controller (WMC) coordinates and keeps the track of all the

activities at site and off the site and arranges the recording of the activities in a

chronological manner for review of the Onsite emergency Plan.




7.9.2 FACILITIES AVAILABLE FOR ON-SITE EMERGENCY PLAN:

(a.) Assembly Point:

In any emergency it will be necessary to evacuate people from affected zones or the

zones likely to be affected, to a safer place. Safer places are identified and designated as

Assembly Points. Taking the area and hazard zones into consideration two assembly

points have been marked in two different areas i.e. one near administrative building

(Assembly Point-1) and other near the SMS Area (Assembly Point-2) Both the points are

well connectable to the plant road and facilities like drinking water, temporary shelter

and first aid is available there. This has been well marked in the lay out map as well as

in the factory.

(b.) Escape routes:

Escape routes are those that, allow reasonably safe passage of persons from the work

area to assembly point during emergency situation. These routes would be different

depending on wind direction, Fire and explosion scenario. Escape routes are ear marked

on the drawings as well as on the routes, showing escape direction in broad arrow marks

on fluorescent paints, which will facilitate all for safe evacuation.

(c.) Emergency Control Room (ECR):

The emergency Control Room is a place from which all emergency management

operation are directed and coordinated. Also it is the place from where all

communication will be established, with outside agencies and district authority also.

Facilities Available at ECR:

a. Plant general Layout, ear marked with hazard zone, Assembly points and escape

routes.

b. List of working personnel in various shifts and general shift.

c. Mobile telephone Nos., of emergency command structure personnel.

d. Emergency command structure.

e. Rhythmical siren code for different emergency situation.

f. Relevant material safety data sheet.

g. Emergency Control Room Register.

h. First Aid Box with antidotes.

i. Required personal protective equipments with self carrying breathing app.

7.10 FACILITIES AVAILABLE

Fire Hydrant System

Fire pumps are to be connected to main fire hydrant to maintain a pressure of

7Kg/cm2. In case of temporary power failure, the fire pumps are to run through

DG. An underground tank supply water to the fire main. A security jeep is

stationed at main gate (main control) to meet the emergency.

Fire Extinguishers

Required types of fire extinguishers are to be provided at different locations of

the plant.

Fire Buckets




Fire buckets filled with dry sand must be provided in differentlocations of

the plant.

Fire Tender

The company may have a fire tender of its own for major firefighting operations.

Siren

Company must have Siren/ hooter arrangement, which can be activated

manually during fire related emergency.

Communication

Public address system and EPABX telephone is available for effective

communication inside the plant. Telephone directory is available in the entire

department.

Dispensary

A well organized First-aid centre with ambulance, stretchers, oxygen cylinder etc.

shall be located inside the factory. The First-aid centre is manned by one doctor,

4nos. pharmacists, 4 nos. attendants, and one Ambulance with driver. The

first-aid center is manned round the clock. In the event of emergency, the

doctors and staff attend the first-aid centre. The existing first-aid centre is to

be strengthened & well-equipped to meet the emergencies. In case of

requirement outside ambulance services are to be contacted.

First Aid Box

Company has provided First Aid boxes with required first aid medicines at

different locations inside the plant for any injury. First aid boxes are checked by

the pharmacists once in a month & and medicines are filled/replaced. The first aid

boxes are provided in the following locations:

Blast Furnace, DRI, Coke Oven, Ferro Chrome, Power Plant, Electrical Substation,

DG room, Administrative building, SMS, Rolling Mill and Security Office.

7.11 OBJECTIVE OF ONSITE EMERGENCY PLAN

The main objective of the plan is to take immediate actions to meet any emergency

situation for speedy and efficient rescue and relief operations. The main steps in an

onsite emergency plan is described below:

Cordon and isolate the affected area for smooth rescue operation.

Rescue and treat casualties and safeguards the rest.

Minimise damage to persons, property and surroundings.

Contain and ultimately bring the situation under control.

Secure and safe rehabilitation of the affected area.

Identify any dead and provide for the needs of the relatives.

Provide necessary information to statutory agencies.

Provide authoritative information to the news media.

Ward off unsocial elements and prying onlookers.

Counter rumor mongering and panic by relevant accurate information.




Industrial Safety and Fire Fighting

For protection of working personnel, equipment and machineries from any damage or

loss and to ensure uninterrupted production, adequate safety and firefighting measures

have been planned for the proposed plant. Important provisions are as follows:

Provision of adequate personal safety appliances to workers engaged in hazardous installations

Provision of detection and alarm system to allow a developing fire to be detected

at an early stage.

Provision of water spray fire extinguishing system and portable extinguishers

using carbon dioxide or chemical powder.

Portable Fire Extinguishers

All plant units, office, buildings, stores, laboratories, etc. will be provided with adequate

number of portable fire extinguishers to be used as first aid fire appliances. The

distribution and selection of extinguishers will be done in accordance with the

requirement of fire protection manual.

7.12 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH

The modern definition of Occupational health is “The promotion and maintenance of the

highest degree of physical, mental and social well-being of workers in all occupations –

total health of all at work”.

Occupational health is concerned with physical, mental and social well-being in humans

in relation to his work and work environment, their adjustment to work and adjustment

of work to humans

ILOs’ Occupational health services recommendation, 1959 (No. 112) aims with following:

Protecting workers against any health hazard, which may arise out of work or condition

in which it is carried on.

Contributing towards workers’ physical and mental adjustment, in particular by

adaptation of work to workers and assignment to jobs in which they are suitable and;

contributing to establishment and maintenance of highest possible degree of physical

and mental social wellbeing of workers.

7.12.1 Occupational Health Hazard

Hazard is defined as “Source or situation with a potential for harm in terms of injury or ill

health, damage to property, damage to the workplace environment, or a combination of

these”

1972 ILO/WHO Conference Recommendations:

Occupational health is a wide field, and during last decade relative importance of its

component parts has changed. This changing concept has been linked with scientific

progress in relation to occupational health and safety and also with changes in evolution

of work and work environment on part of individuals. In past emphasis was on safety,

now it is more on health and job satisfaction.

In 1976, 29th session of World Health Assembly directed Director General to promote

planning and implementation of comprehensive health programs for workers, as an

integral part of National Health Programs.




Legal Provisions

The Indian Constitution has shown notable concern to workmen in factories and

industries as envisaged in its preamble as Directive Principles of State Policy.

For securing the health and strength of workers, men and women

That the tender age of children is not abused

That the citizens are not forced by economic necessity to enter avocations

unsuited to their age or strength

Just and humane conditions of work and maternity relief are provided and,

That the Government will take steps, by suitable legislation or in any other way,

to secure the participation of workers in the management of undertakings,

establishments or other organizations engaged in any industry

The Factories Act, 1948, the Mines Act, 1952, the Dock Workers (Safety, Health &

Welfare) Act, 1986 are some of the laws, which contain provisions regulating the health

of workers in an establishment. Whereas the Employees State Insurance Act, 1948 and

the Workmen’s Compensation Act, 1923 are compensatory in nature. These various legal

provisions to protect health and safety of the workers are given in Chapter 8. It may be

sufficient to indicate at this stage that metallurgical industries are classified as hazardous

industry and legal provisions must be adhered to avoid any harm to work force and local

residents in the vicinity of the industry.

Occupational health hazard in steel plants are of two types. One occupational health

hazard 1) common to all shops including Raw material/Product handling & 2) Hazards

specific to individual Major Shop.

Gen. Tor 8 (i) Details Of Existing Occupational And Safety Hazards. What Are

The Exposure Levels Of Above Mentioned Hazards And Whether They Are Within

Permissible Exposure Level (PEL). If These Are Not Within PEL, What Measures

The Company Has Adopted To Keep Them Within PEL So That Health Of The

Workers Can Be Preserved.

(A)Existing Health hazards Common to a Steel Plant like M/s BEL are due to dust in

eye contact, skin contact, inhalation of toxic gas, ingestion, coming in contact with

molten metal or high temperature, and unpleasant sound level of running machineries.

Dust

The iron ore and coal are stored in raw material yard. The main health hazard in the

storage yard is uncontrolled fugitive dust emission during loading/un loading and

transportation of material in the stock yard.

Eye Contact:

Airborne dust may cause immediate or delayed irritation or inflammation. Eye contact

with large amounts of dust particles can cause moderate eye irritation, chemical burns

and blindness.. Eye exposures require immediate first aid and medical attention to

prevent significant damage to eye.

Skin Contact:




Dust of coal, Iron ore and silicon may cause dry skin, discomfort, irritation, severe burns

and dermatitis. These dusts are capable of causing dermatitis by irritation. Skin affected

by dermatitis may include symptoms such as, redness, itching, rash, scaling and

cracking.

Inhalation

Breathing dust may cause nose, throat or lung irritation, including choking, depending on

the degree of exposure. Inhalation of high levels of dust can cause chemical burns to the

nose, throat and lungs. Inhalation of toxic gases beyond TLV can even be fatal.

Ingestion:

Internal discomfort or ill effects are possible if large quantities are swallowed.

Burning

Burning is caused due to coming in contact with hot metal or bodies at high temperature

or corrosive chemicals like acid or alkali. Similarly cold burning and blister formation is

caused in coming contact with liquefied gases.

B)Common safety hazards in an Integrated Steel Plant are - Posture, Excess Load,

Harmful Contact By Cranes : Defective Tackles, Slings, Excess Load, Wrong Signaling,

Working Under Load, Unskilled Operator, Defects in Crane, Improper / Unauthorized

Handling and most important is stress

7.12.2 EXPOSURE LIMITS

The exposure limits for Manganese, Crystalline, silica, Coal Dust are as given in the

following table for awareness.

SR.

NO.

Raw

materials

Chemical

Name

*NIOSH

TLVTWA

(mg/m3)

Factory

Act TLV

(mg/m3)

Target

Organs

Symptoms

1 Manganese Manganese

oxide

(Mn3O4)

1mg/m3 C*05mg/m3 Resp.

System, CNS,

Blood,

Kidneys,

Asthenia,

insomnia,

mental,

confusion, low

back pain,

vomit;

maliase,

blassitude,

kidney

damage;

pneumonitis

2 Silicon Si -

10mg/m3(total)

10600/(% Eyes, Skin, Irritation eyes,

skin, upper

(a)

Crystalline

Quartz+10

mg/m

10/(%

respirable)

Resp sys. respiratory;

cough

(b) Quartz -5mg/m3

(1) In

terms of

dust count

& (2) In

(respiratory) Quartz+2)

mg/mt.

10/(%

respirable)




terms of

respirable

dust.

3 Coal(Dust) <5%SiO2)2mg/

m3 as the

respirable dust

fraction)

Not

available

Respiratory

system

Chronic

bronchitis,

decreased

pulm function,

emphysema 0.1mg/m3(as

the respirable

quartz fraction)

4 Iron ore Iron oxide

dust

&fume(as

Fe)

(Fe2O3),Iro

n(III) Oxide

5mg/m3 5mg/m3 Respiratory

system

Benign

pneumoconiosi

s( siderosis)

Airborne concentrations of chemical substances and represent conditions under which it

is believed that nearly all workers may be repeatedly exposed, day after day, over a

working lifetime, without adverse health effects are threshold limit values.

Permissible Exposure Level

The expansion project will have Induction Furnace and Rolling mill. The workmen while

handling raw material like sponge iron, pig iron or scrap may be exposed to Iron oxide

Fe2O3 fumes.

Ferric oxide fumes are red brown in color and have a metallic taste. As per OSHA

standard for 8hr working the Possible Exposure Limit is 10mg of Fe2O3 per cubic meter

of air (American standard 5mg/m3. Repeated exposure of iron ore fume over a period of

years may cause x-ray changes of lungs but does not cause the exposed person to

become ill. Exposure for 6 to 10 years is only recognized by X-ray. This may cause

pneumoconiosis and benign of pneumoconiosis is termed siderosis.

If a person breathes a large amount of iron oxide fume must be shifted to fresh air at

once and if breathing found to have stopped, artificial respiration to be given and

affected person to be kept warm and at rest and get medical attention as soon as

possible.

Preventive measure to keep emission within PEL

7.12.3 FIRST AID MEASURES

Following first aid measures shall be taken.

Eye Contact:

Rinse eyes thoroughly with water for at least 15 minutes, including under lids, to remove

all particles. Seek medical attention for abrasions and burns.

Skin Contact:

Wash with cool water and a pH neutral soap or a milk skin detergent. Seek medical

attention for rash, burns, irritation and dermatitis.




Inhalation:

Move person to fresh air. Seek medical attention for discomfort or if coughing or other

symptoms.

Falling from height

Proper scaffolding to withstand the load, use of safety belt and other PPEs can protect

from injuries.

Ingestion:

Vomiting not to be induced. If conscious, have person drink plenty of water. Seek

medical attention.

7.12.4 EXPOSURE CONTROLS AND PERSONAL PROTECTION

Exposure Controls:

Control of dust through implementation of good housekeeping and maintenance;

The bag filters will be installed to control dust emission.

Use of PPE, as appropriate (e.g. masks and respirators)

Use of mobile vacuum cleaning systems to prevent dust buildup on paved areas;

Personal Protective Equipment (PPE):

Respiratory Protection: When the dust level is beyond exposure limits or when

dust causes irritation or discomfort use Respirator.

Eye Protection: Wear Safety goggles to avoid dust contact with the eyes. Contact

lenses should not be worn when handling the materials.

Skin Protection: Wear impervious abrasion and alkali resistant gloves, boots, long

sleeved shirt, long pants or other protective clothing to prevent skin contact.

Preventive Measures

The storage yards are constructed and maintained as per the guidelines.

Regular weekly inspections of storage yards will be carried out with regard to

proper earthling, adequate firefighting facilities, any combustible materials,

prevention of growth of wild vegetation etc.

No naked fires will be allowed in and around coal storage areas and height of

coal/ coke heap should not be high to prevent auto ignition.

Stress

The process by which we perceive and respond to certain events, called stressors, that

we appraise as threatening or challenging.

Uncertainty at work place cause high level of stress. The cause of uncertainty can be

lack of information or instruction what exactly to do or lack of job knowledge.

No job satisfaction i.e. boss is not happy with or what boss & colleagues think about

his/her ability or receiving vague inconsistent instruction. Sometimes that work place is

not safe and catastrophe anticipated due to wrong operation.




With increased stress, blood pressure increases, productivity thoughts decrease and

destructive thoughts increase and there is likelihood of taking risky alternatives due to

poor judgment and there may be greater tendency of escape behaviors.

Alcohol & stress in combination are deadly and smoking is not the solution considering

its long-term harmfulness.

Communicating problems at work place to seniors, colleagues; asking in a positive way

and executing their guide lines and giving much importance to each & every job that

comes on the way can remove stress at work place.

Table 7.5 Health Hazard in Major Shops:

Sl.

No.

Group Item Potential

Health hazard

Preventive measures

I Raw materials

and products

handling

Iron ore fines Eye/skin

irritation

Water sprinkling’

Coal, lime stone,

Dolchar

Other fluxing

minerals

Respiratory

track diseases

due to Dust,

Dry fogging in

conveyors, ID fan

bag filter, PPE

Acids/Alkalis Skin & eye

injury

Water jet for eye

washing, first-aid

II Major shops

MBF Hot metal & slag

CO & H2gas

Burn injury

Gas poisoning

Keeping area dry so

that molten Iron Metal

does not come in water

Contact, wearing PPE

Billet caster Hot molten metal Burn injury wearing PPE

Coke-Oven Red Hot Coke Burn injury PPE like safety shoes,

hand gloves & helmet

Sinter Plant Red Hot Sinter Burn injury PPE like safety shoes,

hand gloves & helmet

AFBC High pressure

steam

Burn injury and

exposure to

high level noise

damaging ear

PPE like safety shoes,

hand gloves & ear muff

ASU Liquid O2 & N2 at

very low

temperature

Cold burning of

skin, cold

blisters

PPE like safety shoes,

hand gloves

III Utilities

Fuel gas

Distribution

Gas leaks Fire and gas

Poisoning

Use of PPE

Electric power Short circuit Electric shock Use of PPE

Supply

IV All shops

Falling from

height

Collapse of

scaffoldings

Injury, breaking

of bone

Proper scaffolding to

withstandLoad

Breaking of slings Use of safety belt




Tested from time to

time.

Falling of heavy

Objects from height

People working over

Head, next floor

Head injury Use of helmet and

safety belt

Gen.Tor-8(ii) Details Of Exposure If The Workers’ Health Is Being Evaluated By

Pre Designed Format, Chest X-Rays, Audiometry, Spirometry, Vision Testing(Far

& Near Vision, Color Vision And Any Other Ocular Defect) ECG, During Pre

Placement And Periodical Examinations Give The Details Of The Same. Details

Regarding Last Month Analyzed Data Of Above Mentioned Parameters As Per

Age, Sex, Duration Of Exposure And Departmental Wise.

From the periodic monitoring and annual health check up of the employee base of M/s

BEL no trend of disease vectors were identified correlating to the type of job, or period

of job for individuals.

Therefore, it may be inferred that the temporary ailments if identified within the

employee are not related to working conditions.

Gen.ToR 8(iv) Plan and Fund Allocation to ensure Occupational health

and Safety of all contract and casual labors.

M/s BEL has proposal for spending Rs 1.5 cr against occupational health and safety.

Medical check up will be carried out once a year for both contract and casual workers.

Gen.ToR 8(iii) Annual report of health status of workers with special

reference to Occupational Health and Safety

Summary of annual report of health status of workers with special reference to

occupational Health and safety is attached as Annexure VIII




Sp ToR (ii)The issues raised during public hearing and commitment of

the project proponent on the same along with time bound action plan

to implement the commitment and financial allocation thereto should

be clearly provided.




7.8 PUBLIC HEARING

Public Hearing for proposed expansion from its 0.6 MTPA Non-Recovery Coke Oven and

40 MW Power Plant to 1.0 MTPA Integrated Steel Plant, 1.2 MTPA Non-Recovery Coke

Oven and 205 MW Power Plant at Dauka, PO- Tentulmuri, PS-Narayangarh, Dist-Paschim

Medinipur, West Bengal by M/s Bengal Energy Limited was conducted on 15.05.2018, at

12.00 hrs at the project site , WB. The Proceedings as submitted by WBSPCB are as

follows:




Summary of Public Hearing report

Notice was given on 13.04.2018 in local daily ‘Ei Samay” and National daily “The Times

of India “for Public hearing of 1.0 MTPA Integrated Steel Plant, 1.2 MTPA Non –Recovery

Coke Oven and 205 MW of M/s BEL at Dauka, PO-Tentulmuri, Narayangarh, Dist-

Paschim Medinipur, West Bengal.

On 15.05.2018, at 12: 00 hrs, PH was conducted at factory site. Sri S K Meena,

Additional District Magisterate (G) & D.L.L.R.O, Paschim Medinipur presided over the

meeting. Sri S.K Mandal Sr, Environment Engineer were also present.

Points raised in hearing by public and reply & commitment of Sri Navin Maheshwari,

Director of M/s BEL, who represented the management have been given below.



Tentulmuri

Source of water for the

plant and concern on

pollution due to expansion

Water requirement will met from

nearby river for which the company

has requisite permission. Pollution

control norms of statutory



abatement of pollution. Green belt

will be further strengthened.

2 Sri Subod Dey,

Khorigaria

Sri Sukumar Das,

Khorigaria


expansion, its control so as

to provide a better

environment for local

village.






3 Sri Mantu Behari

Patra

Enquired about development

of the area due to expansion


regularly and will also continue on

regular basis.

4 Sri Anil Singh,

Banspukuria

Sri Dipak Pal,

Tentulmuri

Employment provision for

local people and their safety

aspects.


5 Sri Badal Patra,

Tentulmuri

Requested the proponent to


protection and provide food

like gur and channa to the

labours.



regular basis.


Khorigaria

Sri Dhananjoy

Bhuiya,

Khorigaria

Provision of training

programs for skill

development to local and




regular basis.




Sri Bhadreswar

Singh, Nangunia

7 Sri Sujit Khara,

Malka









General Public and local bodies were in favour of the proposed expansion project of M/s

BEL,Kharagpur.

ToR 11 Adequate funds(at least 2.5% of the project cost) shall be

earmarked towards the Enterprise Social Commitment based on Public

Hearing issues and item wise details along with time bound action

plan shall be included. Social economic development activities need to

be elaborated upon.




7.8 CORPORATE ENVIRONMENT RESPONSIBILITY

The capital budget for CER purpose is 1810.00 lakhs (1% of 100 cr + 0.75 % of next 500 cr + 0.5 % of 1000 cr + 0.25 % of 3343 cr) of

the project cost which will be spend towards the sustainability of project as well benefit of the public.


2nd Yr (in lacs)

3rd Yr (in lacs)

Total (in lacs)

1

Refreshers course to technical persons, on

advanced industrial training and practical

exposure to industries, like process, safety,

disaster etc.

Rent Establishment + Training Material + Stipend+

faculty 60 60 60 180

2 Development of water shed and renovation of

water bodies in Banspukuria, Tentulmuri

villages

12 Nos of New &

Existing water

bodies @ 4 Nos/Yr.

@ Rs 400000

Digging, Paving, de-siltation

& removal of Aquatic weeds 16 16 16 48

3 Construction of village community center and

its renovation 3500000/ Village

3 Villages with community

hall, recreational and study

centers

35 35 35 105

4 Strengthening of approach roads

Proposing 4 km CC

Approach & Village

Roads

Rs 1200000./Km for

widening & strengthening 48 48 48 144

5 Adoptation of primary schools and Anganwadi

Centres

3 Schools & 3

Anganwadi centres

Renovation of the school

building, construction of

toilets, provide bench & desk

25 25 25 75

6 Technical and Infrastructural aid to farmers.

Providing deep irigation points with electricity,

supply of high yield seeds, fertilizer to poor

farmers. The villages will be decided in consulattion

with local administration.

35 30 65 130

7 Promote artisans

Hand loom and generic floor mats, bamboo crafts

are famous cottage industries of the area are in

ruined condition to be resumed with modernisation.

15 22 18 55

8 Swatch Bharat Mission Providing Tractors, Back Hoe cum toploader, dust

bins and development of the dump yard 300 300 225 825




This will be spent along the construction activities of the project and will cover all the issues raised by public during hearing and as

committed by project proponent.

CONCLUSION

In This chapter a study on Identification of hazards, environmental risk evaluation, disaster management plan, Role of key persons during

hazard. On-site emergency plan, occupational health, occupational Health Hazard, exposure Limits, exposure Controls And Personal

Protection, health hazards. Public Consultation/Public hearing and outcome of public hearing is budgeted in corporate environment

responsibility calculating the value as per the capital cost incurred in the project.

After successful commissioning of the project, what will be its benefit to the society to compensate the adverse impact due to the project

need to be elaborated in the next chapter.

9 Energy efficient street light Electrification of the village with energy efficient

LED bulbs. 77 78 76 231

10 Plantation and distribution of saplings in and

around the villages







CHAPTER-8

PROJECT BENEFIT

For the sustainability of the project and protection of environment the project proponent

has to spend 18.1 cr of its project cost towards CER activities and this has to be spent

along with setup of project.

These are the indicators of benefits that an integrated steel project can give to the

society around it. Making profit should not be the sole aim of setting up an integrated

steel project. Sustainability of project and environment, which include the people in it

also.

8.1 PROJECT BENEFIT

Infrastructure development.

Direct & indirect Employment opportunity

Revenue generation to central & state government.

Spending 18.1 cr against CER activities as per the issues raised by local public

during Public Hearing.

Trickledown effect of enhance profitability to the local populace.

The comprehensive Environmental Management Plan will focus to completely reduce,

recover, recycling/reuse of treated waste water achieving a zero-discharge standard, the

maximum reuse of solid waste, adequate air pollution control measures so as to keep

the resultant of the ground level concentration well within the NAAQS residential norms

and the adequate green belt cover in one third of the project area for enhancement of

the local ecology. M/s BEL has already achieved Zero discharge for its existing unit and

planning to utilize all its waste products to achieve Zero waste and same principle will be

followed for the expansion project also. All these achievements will obviously nullify the

adverse impacts of the pollution problem. Then the beneficial impacts like the

employment opportunity, improvement in infrastructure facilities, improved business

opportunity etc. will obviously improve the socio-economic conditions of the locality.

8.2 INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT

PhysicalInfrastructure

The basic physical systems of a business or nation like Transportation, communication,

sewage, water and electric systems are all examples of infrastructure. These systems

tend to be high-cost investments; however, they are vital to a country's economic

development and prosperity.

Infrastructure is also an asset class that tends to be less volatile than equities over the

long term and generally provides a higher yield. As a result, some companies and

individuals like to invest in infrastructure for its defensive characteristics.

The quality and efficiency of infrastructure services play a pivotal role in achieving the

GDP growth target set for the country. The contribution of the private sectors and Public

sectors in development of infrastructure plays vital role in economic growth of India.

Social Infrastructure

Social Infrastructure is a subset of the infrastructure sector and typically includes assets

that accommodate social services.




Examples of Social Infrastructure Assets

Sector Examples

Health Medical facilities

Education Schools (primary and secondary)

Tertiary facilities

Residential student accommodation

Housing State or Council housing

Civic and Utilities Local government facilities

Water and wastewater treatment

Transport Bus stands

Need-based road construction (excluding demand-risk

toll roads)

Corrections and Justice Prisons

Court houses

8.3 EMPLOYMENT POTENTIAL

There has been direct employment, where local people have been given preference

according to their education and skill and same procedure will be followed for the

expansion projects also.

There will be additional direct and indirect employment for expansion project. Direct

employment will be 1355. Total man power taking existing, expansion and contract

labors under housekeeping, canteen and security will be about 3,000. The breakup of

manpower will be as follows.

Category-wise break-down of manpower

Category Total

Management personnel 65

Technical specialist 150

Supervisory staff 185

Highly skilled staff 225

Skilled 535

Semi-skilled staff 167

Office staff 28

Total 1355

Indirect employment through contractors and ancillary industries like fly ash bricks etc.

will bring economic development of the area. Skilled, semi-skilled and unskilled people

will be get employment.




8.4 REVENUE GENERATION TO CENTRAL & STATE GOVERNMENT

Both state and central Govt. will earn through various taxes, excise, permit, license and

services and improve their revenue.

CONCLUSION

This chapter has given a description on the project benefit including infrastructural

development, social development including employment generation, revenue for the

country.

The following chapter will have a brief description on environmental cost benefit analysis

of the project,that is by spending on environment protection, a project is gainer in

various ways.




CHAPTER-9

ENVIRONMENT COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS

Environmental cost benefit analysis has not been recommended at the scope stage. The

expenses made by project proponent to control soil, water, air and noise and bring into

safe limit for sustenance of flora and fauna and more specifically human health, will be

recovered through minimization of expenses to cure diseases, through sustained crop

yield,

The industry can not survive with contaminated water or polluted ambient air. There will

be massive expenses on account of machine break down or process failure due to water

and air. Employees will suffer from diseases caused due to polluted atmosphere and

there will be loss of man days causing production loss to the company. So the expenses

on environmental pollution control although seems to be high at the start up, its

perennial benefit will be enjoyed by present as well as future generations.

CONCLUSION

The expenses made to control environment for sustenance is given in this chapter, after

all the descriptions regarding the project; at the end it should have a well-defined

Environment management plan. The following chapter gives a broad description on EMP.




CHAPTER-10

ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN (ADMINISTARATIVE)

10.1 EMP IMPLEMENTATION AND MONITORING

Various measures have been suggested in the EMP for mitigation of impacts in earlier

chapters of this EIA report. These have to be implemented according to the suggestions

and monitored regularly to prevent any lapse. This chapter deals with administrative

aspect of ensuring that mitigation measures are physically implemented and their

effectiveness monitored for improvement and implementation of corrective measure if

deterioration is observed.

A large part of the sampling and measurement activity will be concerned with long term

monitoring aimed at providing an early warning of any undesirable changes or trends in

the natural environment that could be associated with the steel plant facilities.

10.2 METEOROLOGY

A meteorological station will be set up at a suitable location to monitor wind speed &

direction, air temperature and humidity on a continuous basis. This data will be used to

identify the zones where air pollution levels due to release of pollutants will be more

than the permissible limits levels.

10.3 EMISSIONS AND AIR QUALITY

Work zone air quality shall be monitored once a month, to assess the levels of

particulate matter inside the steel plant complex. To the extent possible, on line

monitoring for PM, SO2, NOx, CO, and CO2 for each stack will be provided. At least 4 no.

of permanent AAQ station will be stationed around the steel plant and monitoring will be

conducted twice a week.

Emissions from other de-dusting stack will also be monitored once a month. However the

frequency of monitoring may be increased if the West Bengal State Pollution Control

Board desires so.

10.4 DRAINAGE SYSTEM

The effectiveness of the drainage system depends on proper cleaning of all drainage

pipes/channels. Regular checking will be done to see that none of the drains are clogged

due to accumulation of sludge/sediments etc. The clogged drains will be cleaned as soon

as possible, preferably the same day. The catch-pits linked to the storm water drainage

system from the coal handling areas will be regularly checked and cleaned to ensure

their effectiveness. This checking and cleaning will be rigorous during the monsoon

season, especially if rains are forecast.




10.5 WATER QUALITY

Raw water will be monitored daily. Drinking water being supplied inside the plant and the

township will be monitored at least once a week. Although there is no effluent discharge

outside the plant boundary, however bleed off from system either may be utilized for

firefighting or discharge after proper treatment.

Surface water & Ground water quality to be monitored twice in a year. Pre and Post

monsoon and trend to be observed and corrective measures to be taken.

10.6 NOISE LEVEL

Noise level at various equipments is to be measured once in every three months and

greasing, acoustic enclosure repair, foundation bolt tightening etc to be suggested.

10.7 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH

Routine medical examination of personnel shall be carried out as systematic programs.

10.8 LABORATORY FACILITIES

The plant’s chemical laboratory may be equipped and manned to carry out the necessary

Environmental monitoring work. Alternately other accredited laboratories may be

contracted for carrying out the necessary environmental monitoring.

10.9 UPDATING OF EMP

The periodicity of monitoring will be governed by the directives from statutory

authorities and prevailing regulations. The action plan of EMP will be updated every year

with respect to the results achieved and to plan activities for the next year.

10.10 ORGANISATION AND MANPOWER

M/s Bengal Energy Limited is having Environmental Management Cell working under

Works Main Controller (WMC) who is also Organizational Head/Director. Environment

Pollution Control Cell with Head of Environment Division, Asst. Environment Engineers,

Chemist, laboratory technicians etc. are reporting to him. Again each plant has its

laboratory to take routine analysis.

The teams in co-ordination with each other look after Environmental aspects of the

project.

The routine work of EMC is as follows:

a. Regular monitoring of stack emission & fugitive emission and report any

abnormalities for immediate corrective measures.

b. Regular monitoring of ambient air quality in and around the plant.

c. Regular monitoring of re-circulating water quality, water quality of the storage

ponds, ground water quality and surface water quality.

d. Regular noise monitoring of the work zone and surrounding area.




e. Green belt plantation, maintenance, development of other forms of greenery

like lawns, nursery, gardens, etc. along the plant boundary and inside the plant

premises, Colony and Guest House.

f. Regular monitoring of solid wastes quantity and ascertaining avenues for

utilization of solid wastes.

g. Development of schemes for water conservation, rain water harvesting and

reuse of treated wastewater.

Various measures have been suggested in the Environmental Management Plan (EMP)

for mitigation of impacts. These have to be implemented according to the suggestions

and will be monitored regularly to prevent any lapse.

In addition to preparing an EMP, this permanent organizational set up also works to

ensure its effective implementation. Hence, proposed plant will create a team consisting

of officers from various departments to co-ordinate the activities concerned with

management and implementation of the environmental control measures. This team will

undertake the activity of monitoring the stack emissions, ambient air quality, noise level

etc. either departmentally or by appointing external agencies wherever necessary. The

department has a sophisticated Environment Laboratory. Regular monitoring of

environmental parameters will be carried out to find out any deterioration in

environmental quality and also to take corrective steps, if required, through respective

internal departments.

The cell will also be responsible for monitoring of the plant safety and safety related

systems which include:

Checking of safety related operating conditions.

Preparation of a maintenance plan and documentation of maintenance work

specifying different maintenance intervals and the type of work to be performed.

Other responsibilities of the cell will include:

Conduct and submit annual Environmental Audit. A SPCB registered agency will be

retained to generate the data in respect of air, water, noise, soil and meteorological

data and prepare the Environmental Audit report. Timely renewal of Consolidated

Consents & Authorization (CC & A) will also be taken care of.

Submitting environmental monitoring report to SPCB. Data monitored by the cell

will be submitted to the Board regularly and as per the requirement of SPCB. The

cell will also take mitigative or corrective measures as required or suggested by the

Board.

Keeping the management updated on regular basis about the conclusions / results

of monitoring activities and proposed measures to improve environment

preservation and protection.

Conducting regular safety drills and training programs to educate employees on

safety practices. A qualified and experienced safety officer will be employed for the

identification of the hazardous conditions and unsafe acts of workers and advice on

corrective actions, organize training programs and provide professional expert

advice on various issues related to occupational safety and health.




The comprehensive EMP will also include greenbelt development, disaster

management plan and the peripheral socio-economic development plan for the

region. The impact score with EMP is calculated and found to be slightly positive

and hence the project may be implemented. The EMP will implement by the

“Environment Management Department (EMD)” members created by the

management of the plant.

Industrial activity can have harmful effects on ecological systems, climate and

public health. Recognizing this, Proponents are desired to be committed to reducing their

environmental footprint and promoting environmental stewardship at all levels of their

organizations. A company’s goal must be aimed at minimizing its organization’s impact

and maximize future generations’ ability to live, work, play and shared natural

environment, with equal access to clean air, clean water, and natural resources.

Many corporations have established organization-wide environmental policies to define

and advance their environmental goals. An environmental policy sends a clear message

to employees, vendors, and the community at large that their company considers

environmentally intelligent practices an organizational priority. When a company adopts

such a policy, it’s a meaningful first step in any effort to improve environmental

performance.

Gen.ToR-9(i) Does the company have a well laid down environment

policy approved by its board of directors?

M/s BEL has well defined Environment Policy which has been given below as supplied by

Project Proponent.

In the Policy the company has committed to work towards Environment protection,

prevention of Environmental pollution and Environment improvement around its business

unit and adopt sound environment practice to achieve sustainable growth.

Gen.ToR-9(ii) Does the environmental policy prescribes for

standard operating process/procedures to bring into focus any

infringement/ deviation/Violation of the environmental or forest

norms/ conditions?

It can be seen from the Environment policy of M/s BEL given below that the company

commits to comply with all applicable statutory and other norms/requirements for

environmental protection.




Environmental Policy of Bengal Energy Ltd ( BEL)

BEL recognizes that as a responsible member of society it has an important duty to

operate in harmony with the environment. We also engage in business with the aim of

contributing to ecologically sustainable development of society through production

activities that respect environmental integrity, and by developing environmental

preservation technologies & methods.

Our Action Plan

1. We aim to carry out environmental tasks in an organized way, and to implement

environmental preservation activities continuously.

2. We will set appropriate objectives and targets for reducing the burden our

activities impose on the environment with conserving biodiversity.

3. We aim to provide society with products and services that contribute to the

preservation of the environment.

We endeavor to increase the social value of our products in terms of

environmental protection, safety and hygiene.

We will provide products and services that reduce environmental loads by

obtaining a clear grasp of environmental needs and developing

technologies.

Our policy for business facilities

Taking into consideration respective business activities, local communities and the

surrounding environments by setting out its own environmental policy, objectives and

targets drawing on methods compliant with international standards. Toward such ends,

BEL continually strive:

To respect laws and regulations and agreements we have concluded with external

parties

To prevent pollution and reduce and appropriately treat waste, and to conserve

the ecosystem

To improve “resource productivity” through implementation of energy efficiency,

resource efficiency, and recycling

To inform employees and other companies residing within our facilities of our policies and require their cooperation

With regard to the observance of laws and regulations, we implemented environmental-

related facilities with strict instruction to follow the rules & regulation of State & Central

policies keeping global warming in our mind.

Gen.ToR-9(iii) What is the hierarchical system or Administrative

order of the company to deal with the environmental issues and for

ensuring compliance with the environmental clearance conditions?

Regular monitoring of environmental parameters like air, water, noise and soil as well as

performance of pollution control facilities and safety measures in the plant are important

for proper environmental management of any project. Therefore, the environment and

safety cell has already been formed to handle monitoring of air and water pollutants as




well as the solid wastes generation as per the requirements of State Pollution Control

Board and Central Pollution Control Board.

The company has an Environmental laboratory to analyze important pollution parameters

like pH & BOD of water, analysis of raw material, product, noise monitoring near various

equipments etc. However NABL/MoEF Accredited laboratory is being outsourced for

periodic monitoring of stack flue gas, ambient air quality, surface and ground water

quality and other various parameters.

The company has well defined budget towards EMP, Implementation & its yearly

maintenance.

Organization, manpower andhierarchical system

M/s BEL is having Environmental Management Cell(EMC) working under Works Main

Controller (WMC) who is also Organizational Head/Director. Environment Pollution

Control Cell with Head of Environment Division, Asst. Environment Engineers, Chemist,

laboratory technicians etc. are reporting to him. Again each plant has its laboratory to

take routine analysis.

The teams in co-ordination with each other look after Environmental aspects of the

project.

The routine work of EMC is as follows:

a. Regular monitoring of stack emission & fugitive emission and report any

abnormalities for immediate corrective measures.

b. Regular monitoring of ambient air quality in and around the plant.

c. Regular monitoring of re-circulating water quality, water quality of the storage

ponds, ground water quality and surface water quality.

d. Regular noise monitoring of the work zone and surrounding area.

e. Green belt plantation, maintenance, development of other forms of greenery like

lawns, nursery, gardens, etc. along the plant boundary and inside the plant

premises, Colony and Guest House.

f. Regular monitoring of solid wastes quantity and ascertaining avenues for

utilization of solid wastes.

g. Development of schemes for water conservation, rain water harvesting and reuse

of treated wastewater.

Various measures have been suggested in the Environmental Management Plan (EMP)

for mitigation of impacts. These have to be implemented according to the suggestions

and will be monitored regularly to prevent any lapse.

In addition to preparing an EMP, this permanent organizational set up also works to

ensure its effective implementation. Hence, proposed plant will create a team consisting

of officers from various departments to co-ordinate the activities concerned with

management and implementation of the environmental control measures. This team will

undertake the activity of monitoring the stack emissions, ambient air quality, noise level

etc. either departmentally or by appointing external agencies wherever necessary. The

department has a sophisticated Environment Laboratory. Regular monitoring of

environmental parameters will be carried out to find out any deterioration in




environmental quality and also to take corrective steps, if required, through respective

internal departments.

The cell will also be responsible for monitoring of the plant safety and safety related

systems which include:

Checking of safety related operating conditions.

Preparation of a maintenance plan and documentation of maintenance work

specifying different maintenance intervals and the type of work to be performed.

Other responsibilities of the cell will include:

Conduct and submit annual Environmental Audit. A SPCB registered agency will be

retained to generate the data in respect of air, water, noise, soil and meteorological

data and prepare the Environmental Audit report. Timely renewal of Consolidated

Consents & Authorization (CC & A) will also be taken care of.

Submitting environmental monitoring report to SPCB. Data monitored by the cell

will be submitted to the Board regularly and as per the requirement of SPCB. The

cell will also take mitigative or corrective measures as required or suggested by the

Board.

Keeping the management updated on regular basis about the conclusions / results

of monitoring activities and proposes measures to improve environment

preservation and protection.

Conducting regular safety drills and training programs to educate employees on

safety practices. A qualified and experienced safety officer will be responsible for

the identification of the hazardous conditions and unsafe acts of workers and advise

on corrective actions, organize training programs and provide professional expert

advice on various issues related to occupational safety and health.

The comprehensive EMP will also include greenbelt development, disaster

management plan and the peripheral socio-economic development plan for the

region. The impact score with EMP is calculated and found to be slightly negative

and hence the project may be implemented. The EMP will implement by the

“Environment Management Department (EMD)” members created by the

management of the plant.

Gen.ToR-9(iv)Does the company have system of reporting of non-

compliances/violations of environmental norms to the Board of

Directors of the company and/ or share holders or stake holders at

large.

10.11 FUNCTIONS OF EMP CELL

Functions of EMP cell of M/s BEL are as follows:

a) Maintaining Records

In line with the best practice, M/s BEL has established and maintained a system of

records to demonstrate compliance with the environmental management systems and

the extent of achievement of the environmental objectives and targets. In addition the

other records (legislative, audit and review reports), management records also address

the following:

Details of failure in compliance and corrective action;




Details of indigents and corrective action;

Details of complaints and follow-up action;

Appropriate contractor and supplier information;

Inspection and maintenance reports;

Product identification and composition data;

Monitoring data;

Environmental training records.

b) Audit

As a mandatory requirement under the Environment Protection Rules (1986) as

amended through the Notification issued by the Ministry of Environment and Forests in

April 1993, an Environmental Statement should be prepared annually. This should

include the consumption of total resources (raw material and water per tons of product),

quantity and concentration of pollutants (air and water discharged, quantity of hazardous

and solid waste generation, pollution abatement measures, conservation of natural

resources and cost of production vis-à-vis the investment on pollution abatement. This

may be internal or external audits, but carried out impartially and effectively by a person

properly trained for it. Broad knowledge of the environmental process and expertise in

relevant disciplines is also required.

c) Environmental Monitoring

Regular monitoring programs of the environmental parameters are essential to take into

account the changes in the environment. The objective of monitoring is:

To verify the result of the impact assessment study in particular with regards

to new developments;

To follow the trend of parameters which have been identified as critical;

To check or assess the efficiency of the controlling measures;

To ensure that new parameters, other than those identified in the impact

assessment study, do not become critical through the commissioning of new

installations or through the modification in the operation of existing facilities;

d) Objectives and Targets

The objectives should be set with a view to realizing gradual and steady improvements

in environmental performance through application of best available and economically

viable technology.

e) Reporting

Performance with respect to monitoring results of various parameters is to be reported in

writing to unit Head as well as statutory body like SPCB. Unit head in turn to intimate

share holders and all stake holders.




CHAPTER-11

SUMMARY & CONCLUSION

ToR 1 Executive Summary

i) Project name and location

Proposed Expansion project of M/s. BEL is located over 161.87 ha of land at village-Dauka, PO-

Tentulmuri, PS- Narayangarh, Dist-Paschim Medinipur, West Bengal, which extends from 220

15’ 22.96’’ N to 220 15’ 27.68’’ N and 870 22’ 53.37’’ E to 870 23’ 34.69’’ N with, with 32

AMSL appearing on Toposheet No-73M/6 (F45J6). The proposed expansion is confined over the

same land of 161.87 ha.

ii) Products & Capacities (existing & proposed)

M/s. BEL, was granted EC vide J-11011/28/2008-IA II (I), 2nd January, 2009for 0.5 MTPA

Integrated steel in MBF,DRI, EAF & CCM route; 1.2 MTPACoke Oven & 140 MW CPP which

included both WHRB & FBC. But the unit could install 0.6 MTPA Coke Oven & 40 MW CPP and

has now applied and granted ToR for 1.0 MTPA integrated steel, 1.2 MTPA Non-Recovery Coke

OVEN & 205 mw POWER Plant. The configuration & capacities are as given in table below.

Facility Existing Configuration

Existing capacity in TPA



Final capacity

Product End use

Non.Recovery CO Plant


CPP(Coke Oven gas) 1x40 MW 40 MW 1x40 MW 40 MW 80 MW Elec. Power Internal use/Sale


6,40,000 4,48,000


4x350 TPD

CPP (DRI) - Nil 68 MW 68 MW Elec. Power Internal use/Sale


Sinter Plant 1x60m2 2T/m2.hr, 340days

- Nil 1x60m2 10,00,000 10,00,000 Sinter MBF



LF - Nil 1x25T Holding Liq. steel CCM


IF 15H/day, 325 days

- Nil 3x20T 2,92,500 2,92,500 Liq. Steel CCM





Oxygen Nitrogen

Use in MBF & EAF




iii) a. Requirement of land

The project area is located at Vill-Dauka, Po-Tentulmuri, PS-Narayangarh in Paschim Medinipur district of

West Bengal. The company has in its possession 161.87 ha of land. The proposed expansion will be

accommodated in available vacant area of this land. This is an industrial barren land.

b. Requirement of Raw material with source of supply.

Major Raw material inventory for project after modification cum expansion with source and mode of

transportation is estimated and given below.

Material Gross Capacity in TPA Source Mode of Transport







Other chemicals required for the proposed project is






5 Lubricants LTR 10,015

c. Requirement of water

The total water requirement after the expansion project will be 13,165 m3/day, which will be sourced

from river Kangsabati. Two intake wells at the river, one at Jinsar 220 23’ 34.42” N and 870 21’ 49.32” E

and other at Uttershimla 220 23’ 19.30” N and 870 23’ 05.03” E has been set up. Transportation of water

from river to project site will cover a pipe length of 23.7km and cross canal, NH-6, Howrah-Kharagpur

Rly. Line and pass along the length of NH-60, and outfall at 220 14’ 45.48” N and 870 23’ 23.08” E.

Permission has already been from Government of west Bengal, SE Rly etc. This water project is to supply

10 MGD i.e. 40,920 m3/day and part of job has already been completed.

d. Requirement of Power

Power requirement after expansion will be 153 MW. Own Captive Power generation will be 205 MW.

After usage balance power of 52 MW will be supplied to State Grid.

e. Requirement of Fuel

16,80,000 TPA Coking Coal, 17,96,780 TPA Non coking Coal will be used as fuel in project.

iv) Process description in brief

Steel production in proposed expansion will be in DRI/MBF-IF/EAF- route. Lump Iron Ore along with

Coal and dolomite will be fed to Kilns for sponge iron production. Similarly, Iron ore agglomerate sinter

will be manufactured in sinter plant and will be fed to MBFs with coke, Oxygen, dolomite & pulverised




coal injection for production of hot metal. Hot metal from MBF & Sponge Iron will be used in IFs and EAFs

for production of liquid steel which will be casted in CCM for production of billets..

v) Capital cost of the project, estimated time schedule

The total project cost has been estimated as Rs 4943 crore. This will include pollution control equipments

which will be installed along with process equipments and a CER cost of 18.10 Crore. The plant will be

commissioned and give commercial production in three after obtaining Environmental Clearance.

vi) Site selected for the project

The project is located at Dauka, Tentulmuri, Paschim Medinipur. The expansion has been proposed in the

acquired area on which existing plant is running. It has well developed infrastructure like road network,

railway siding etc. No national park or wildlife sanctuary or eco sensitive zones or places of

archaeological importance are present within 10 km radius around the project and the site does not come

under critical polluted area. Hence alternate site has not been considered.

vii) Baseline Environmental data.

For the preparation of EIA report a monitoring schedule covering winter season of the year was carried

out from 1st Nov 2017 to 31st Jan 2018. The consultant had engaged NABL accreditated laboratory , M/s

Kalyani Laboratories Pvt Ltd for carrying out monitoring under their strict supervision.The impact

identification started with collection of baseline data such as existing ambient air quality, qualities of

ground water, surface water, soil, noise level prevailing in the area and meteorological parameters like

temperature, humidity, wind speed and direction, cloud cover etc.

Land

The general land use/land cover features of the buffer zone include settlements, agricultural land,

vegetation and forest, collieries both in use & disused, wasteland, water bodies, wet land, and industrial

land, infrastructure and others.

Agriculture land of buffer zone is about 66%, followed by 16.5 % rural settlement and about 3.1% dense

forest.

Water

Kangsabati River is of high significance in the region as it caters to the water requirements of most of the

villages and the majority of the industrial units in the region. River is about 20 km away from the project

site. In 1978, the area was affected by flood and there after no flood hazard has been observed since last

40 years. The mean sea level of the river is 26m and the MSL of the plant is 33 m.

Annual avg. Rain fall project area being 1440 mm and project area 20 ha there will be about 3,81,102m3

of rain water harvested per annum and will meet summer supply to plant i.e. lean period of river

Kangsabati.

The analytical results of surface water samples at different location for various parameters reveal that all

the parameters comply with IS: 2296 (Class ‘C’) standards indicating their suitability for drinking and

other purposes after conventional treatment followed by disinfection.

Similarly the analysis results of groundwater samples showed all the parameters are within the

prescribed limits as per IS: 10500 standards for drinking water.

Climate

Climate in the study region is generally dry and hot and is characterized with seasonal variations of temp.,

humidity, rainfall etc.

Summer is from March to June. South West monsoon brings rain to the area from mid June to September.

Post monsoon are October & November. November to February are winter in the area.

The area receives fairly good amount of rainfall from the southwest monsoon during June to September.

Light showers of rain occur during the months of October, November and sometimes in December also

Annual Average rain fall 1440 mm

Meteorological conditions In order to determine the micrometeorological conditions of the study area a temporary micro-

meteorological monitoring observatory was set up near the site from Nov 2017-Jan 2018. The results




were compared with data of IMD station Midnapore. At the site Overall predominant wind direction has

been from North and the North East direction during study period.

The average wind velocity found to be 3.72 m/s and the calm period is 34.83%.

Ambient air

The study area represents mostly industrial environment. Air quality in the project area is affected by the

presence of polluting industry nearby. The prominent sources of air pollution in the study area are due to

emission from industries, vehicular movement and domestic coal burning as fuel in some parts of the

study area.

During the study period, the concentrations of PM10 measured to vary between 93.6-61.9 g/m3 at

different locations of the study area. The concentrations of PM2.5 varied between 49.8-27.2 g/m3 at

different locations of the study area. During the study period, the average levels of SO2 concentrations at

all location varied from 15.4-6.1 g/m3. The concentrations of NOX values varied between 28.7-10.5

g/m3 at different locations. The concentrations of CO value ranged between 789-342 µg/m3 at different

locations during the study period

Soil analysis

The study area analysis results of the soil parameters show deficiency normal nutrients and micro

nutrients of. The bulk density of the study area ranges from 1.13 to 1.3 gm/cc. The other nutrient content

like nitrogen, potassium and phosphate content of the soil is very low indicating land not suitable for

agriculture purposes. This is to be taken care of in agricultural land as well as growing trees for green

belt.

Flora and Fauna

Flora and Fauna of the study area reveals that no Schedule- I type of fauna found in the study area. In

faunal population; cattle, goats, dogs, rats, insects are common in the study area.

As per IUCN's "Red Data Book", none of the taxa found in this region could be marked as rare or endangered plant species.

Socio Economic

The socioeconomic features around the 10km radius of the plant site have been collected through

primary and secondary data collection. The study area covers 12425 inhabitants. Out of the total

population 53 % are male and 43% are female. SC population is 25%, ST 1.0% and other 74%. 57 % of the

total population is literate.

Priority to be given to local people in employment in proposed expansion project to improve economy of the locality. viii) Identification of Hazard in handling, processing and Storage of material and safety systems

provided.

All the shops will have their own list of hazards, which have been identified and damage to human being

and environment has been discussed with risk management, which can reduce if not mitigated fully. The

major on-site emergency situation may occur from storage and handling, fuel gas, molten metal and slag

handling, acids, alkali storage and handling and electrical short-circuit. Proper safety equipments will be

provided to the workers and proper standard operating procedure will be followed during handling and

processing hazardous material. Hazards in various working area have been identified, its severity has

been estimated and mitigation has been suggested.

Hazard Identification & Risk Analysis for different units has been addressed with identification of most

critical hazard operations.

ix) Likely Impact of the project on air, water, land, flora fauna

Air Environment:

The pollutant emissions from the proposed project will have maximum ground level concentration as

33.48 µg/m3 for PM10, 31.23 µg/m3 for PM2.5, 44.65µg/m3 for NOx and 62.18 µg/m3 for SO2. With

installation of APC systems like bag filters, and ESPs the maximum ground level concentration will come

down to 2.53 µg/m3 for PM10, 1.49 µg/m3 for PM2.5 and 34.11 µg/m3 for SO2.

However there will be occasions when dust venting may be forced due to APC failure although inter

locking provision has been suggested for tripping the unit. Action plan has been suggested to protect

crops of the villagers during such situations. In case of failure of APC immediate action will be taken at

most impact points with water jet mixed system which will be truck mounted.




Water Management

As the plant water system is designed based on maximum recirculation system. The effluents likely to be

generated from the proposed plant are:






The effluents will be treated in ETP and will be reused. M/s BEL abides to Zero Discharge Liquid norms

for its existing plant. Rain water harvesting will be done to reduce raw water drawl during lean period of

Damodar.


The noise level within the plant boundary is occupational noise levels and confined within shops. The

level will be further minimized when the noise reaches the plant boundary and the nearest residential

areas beyond the plant boundary, as elaborate green belt development is envisaged for all along the

boundary for attenuation of noise and fugitive emission. All the equipment in the steel plant will be

designed/operated in such a way that the noise level shall not exceed 85 dB (A) as per the requirement of

Standard.

Solid Waste Management

The comprehensive EMP enlists the management plan for each individual unit.

Solid waste Quantity in

TPA




DRI Dolchar 2,72,000 Use in AFBC to generate steam for power generation

Power plant Fly ash 1,50,750 Supply to Gava Ecocrete Pvt Ltd as per MOU.

DRI ash & dust 5,75,600 Land feel and dump in abandoned coal mines for which

permission to be sought

BF slag 1,84,760 To be used in sinter plant & balance to be Sold to ASO


BF sludge + dust 2,93,670 To be used in sinter plant & balance to be Sold to ASO


Power plant Bottom Ash 1,00,500 Sold to Gava Ecocrete Pvt Ltd, MOU 30th August, 2018

In case of excess BF slag and sludge over sale, this can be used as raw material for iron ore sinter making.

Measures for Improvement of Ecology:

There is no wildlife sanctuary within the 10 km radius of the proposed plant. The core zone area is devoid

of plantation. There will not be any loss of plantation because of the project. On the other hand, the

company will provide the comprehensive green-belt cover in 33 % of the project area as per the MoEFCC

norms to improve the local ecology. The company plans to acquire the nearby abandoned coal quarries

with deep gorges and holes and will fill the same with the non-hazardous solid waste and will develop

thick green belt cover over the sites. All these steps will considerably improve upon the ecology of the

area.




x) Impact Mitigation Measure

Gaseous Emission

e. Hot flue gas with particulate matter, SO2, CO2 and NOx will be generated from DRI kilns, Flue gas

will pass through, DSC, ABC & ESPs for separation of particulate matter and clean gas will be

sucked by ID fans and vented to atmosphere through high stack. Efficiency of ESPs being >99%,

particulate matter emission will come down. In the existing plant 1 no. of ESPs for Cement

rinding units is installed and additional 4 ESPs and 5 Bagfilters will be installed.

f. Fumes generated from Induction Furnace will be cleaned in bag filters and vented to atmosphere

through ID fan and stack. Emission will come down.

g. Sinter plant and FBC will have ESPs to clean gaseous emission which are then sucked by ID fans

and vented to atmosphere.

h. Both DRI Kiln flue gas, Coke Oven gas will have WHRB boiler for removal of heat for generation of

steam for power. Ventury scrubber will be used in MBF to remove particulate matter in the form

of sludge. BF dust and sludge having residual carbon will be used in making sinter.

With this pollution control measure the resultant ground level concentration will come down from

estimated value as follows.

PM10 from 33.48 to 2.53 µg/m3, PM2.5 from 31.23 µg/m3 to 1.49 µg/m3, SO2 from 62.18 to 34.11

µg/m3

Liquid Effluent

d. Industrial waste water from MBFs, DRI kilns and CPP will pass through ETP, where

neutralization and settling will take place. After treatment the turbidity will come down from 60

to <15 NTU, oil & grease from 31 to <5PPM and suspended particle from 1000-5000 to <30 PPM.

e. Domestic waste water will pass through STP having equalization, aeration and settling tank.

Industrial and domestic effluent water after settling tanks will undergo filtration through gravel

& sand bed and will be used for toilet flushing, green belt watering, dust suppression and vehicle

washing.

f. Water quenching will be avoided and dry quenching will be adopted for red hot coke. This will

eliminate waste water generation and treatment from Coke Oven Plant.

Solid and Hazardous Waste

d. Fly ash and bottom ash from CPP will be supplied to Gava Ecocrete Pvt Ltd as per MOU for fly ash

brick manufacturing. Bottom ash , fly ash and kiln accretion from DRI kiln will be used as road

making and land fill material. Possibility of dumping DRI ash & dust in abandoned coal mines to

be explored.

e. BF slag & sludge will be utilized in sinter making and balance will be sold to ASO Cement Ltd as

per MOU. IF slag normally contains about 15% Iron, hence slag will be cooled, crushed and

undergo magnetic separation. Residual iron thus recovered will be recycled to IF for re-melting

and slag which has high silica content and equivalent to river sand will be used as construction

material/land fill.

f. Used oil, DM plant resins and lead batteries like hazardous materials will be handed over to

authorized dealer/suppliers

xi) Hazard Identification & Risk Analysis

It may be observed that the major on-site emergency situation may occur from coal & chemicals storage

and handling; fuel gas handling, molten metal and slag handling, acids and alkali storage and handling and

electrical short-circuit. The off-site environmental disaster may occur if large-scale fire and explosion




occurs, the effect of which extends beyond the plant boundary. The off-site environmental disaster may

occur due to significant environmental degradation for a sustained period.

Probable Hazards has been identified through the process of HIRA for major units like ASU, DRI, SMS,

Rolling mill, Sinter & CPP. The respective mitigation majors are also enlisted along with the onsite

emergency Plan. The Environmental management plan includes the environmental Risk mitigation

measures.

BEL has a well-developed Disaster Management Plan consisting of the preparedness plan for onsite and

offsite disasters and the role of key persons during occurrence of any disaster. An emergency cell headed

by Works Main Controller and followed by Site Controller, Combat Leader, Rescue team operates to

prevent any type of disaster. The DMP also states the activation and closing procedure for onsite

emergency along with the responsibilities of each member.

xii) Issues raised during Public Hearing

Public Hearing for proposed expansion from its 0.6 MTPA Non-Recovery Coke Oven and 40 MW Power

Plant to 1.0 MTPA Integrated Steel Plant, 1.2 MTPA Non-Recovery Coke Oven and 205 MW Power Plant at

Dauka, PO- Tentulmuri, PS-Narayangarh, Dist-Paschim Medinipur, West Bengal by M/s Bengal Energy

Limited was conducted on 15.05.2018, at 12.00 hrs at the project site, WB.



Tentulmuri

Source of water for the plant and

concern on pollution due to

expansion

Water requirement will met from nearby

river for which the company has requisite

permission. Pollution control norms of

statutory authorities will be followed &

proper control measures will be taken for



2 Sri Subod Dey, Khorigaria

Sri Sukumar Das,

Khorigaria


expansion, its control so as to

provide a better environment for

local village.






3 Sri Mantu Behari Patra Enquired about development of

the area due to expansion



basis.

4 Sri Anil Singh, Banspukuria

Sri Dipak Pal, Tentulmuri

Employment provision for local

people and their safety aspects.


5 Sri Badal Patra, Tentulmuri Requested the proponent to


protection and provide food like

gur and channa to the labours.



basis.


Khorigaria

Sri Dhananjoy Bhuiya,

Khorigaria

Sri Bhadreswar Singh,

Nangunia

Provision of training programs

for skill development to local and




basis.

7 Sri Sujit Khara,

Malka












xiii) CER Plan with proposed expenditure

The company will spend 18.10 crores of its project cost on CER activities based on circular . This will be

spent along the construction activities of the project and cover all the issues raised by public during

Public Hearing and as committed by project proponent.


2nd Yr (in lacs)

3rd Yr (in lacs)

Total (in lacs)

1

Refreshers course to technical

persons, on advanced

industrial training and

practical exposure to

industries, like process, safety,

disaster etc.

Rent Establishment + Training Material +

Stipend+ faculty 60 60 60 180

2

Development of water shed

and renovation of water bodies

in Banspukuria, Tentulmuri

villages

12 Nos of New &

Existing water

bodies @ 4

Nos/Yr. @ Rs

400000

Digging, Paving, de-

siltation & removal

of Aquatic weeds

16 16 16 48

3

Construction of village

community center and its

renovation

3500000/ Village

3 Villages with

community hall,

recreational and

study centers

35 35 35 105

4 Strengthening of approach

roads

Proposing 4 km CC

Approach &

Village Roads

Rs 1200000./Km for

widening &

strengthening

48 48 48 144

5 Adoptation of primary schools

and Anganwadi Centres

3 Schools & 3

Anganwadi

centres

Renovation of the

school building,

construction of

toilets, provide

bench & desk

25 25 25 75

6 Technical and Infrastructural

aid to farmers.

Providing deep irigation points with

electricity, supply of high yield seeds,

fertilizer to poor farmers. The villages will

be decided in consulattion with local

administration.

35 30 65 130

7 Promote artisans

Hand loom and Dhokra metal casting are

famous cottage industries of the area are

in ruined condition to be resumed with

modernisation

15 22 18 55

8 Swatch Bharat Mission

Providing Tractors, Back Hoe cum

toploader, dust bins and development of

the dump yard

300 300 225 825

9 Energy efficient street light Electrification of the village with energy

efficient LED bulbs. 77 78 76 231

10 Plantation and distribution of

saplings in and around the






villages


xiv) Occupational Health Measures

Sl. No. Group Item Potential Health hazard Preventive measures

I Raw materials and products handling

Iron ore & Coke, Eye/skin irritation Water sprinkling’ Coal , lime stone/Dolo Respiratory track diseases Dry fogging in

conveyors, ID fan Other fluxing minerals due to Dust, burning due to bag filter, PPE like

safety shoes, Product steel local fire Dust mask and safety

goggles. Acids/Alkalis Water jet for eye

washing II Major shops DRI kiln flue gas CO, dust, heat Pollution Control

Equipments for direct exhaust of the gas

Sinter Plant Dust, heat, Respiratory track diseases, Well ventilation of work place with air ventilating systems

noise Head Ache PPE like gloves, dust mask to prevent dust inhalation

Captive power plant

Fly ash, explosion, noise, vibration, HT, electric equipments, Acid and alkali

Electric shock, injury due to chemicals, burn/ eye injury

Use of PPE, barricading high voltage area.

III Utilities Fuel gas Gas leaks Fire and gas Use of PPE

Distribution Poisoning Electric power

Supply Short circuit Electric shock Use of PPE

IV All shops Falling from

height Collapse of scaffoldings Injury, breaking of bone Proper scaffolding to

withstand Breaking of slings Load and use of safety

belt Tested from time to time.

Falling of heavy People working over Head injury Use of helmet and safety shoes Objects from

height Head, next floor

xv) Post Project Monitoring Plan

Depending upon prevailing predominant wind direction AAQ monitoring stations have been decided

where monitoring instruments shall be installed for measuring polluting parameters at regular intervals.

Similarly Fugitive emission will be monitored twice a month and Stack monitoring will be continuous

with Online monitoring systems. Three locations has been identified for Ground Water and Surface water

monitoring which will be carried out twice in a year. ETP, STP, CT will be monitored once a month or as

per the Standard Operating Procedures.




CHAPTER -12

CONSULTANT PROFILE

(A Techno-Enviro Consultant)

(Earlier Named as Global Experts)

NABET Accreditated consultant (Serial No 78) & SPCB, Odisha Empanelled

Consultant.

M/s Global Tech Enviro Experts Pvt. Ltd. (GTEEPL) is a professionally managed quality

conscious organization, which provides environmental solutions to various industrial

organizations with sustainable growth and environmental friendly ecosystem. It is a

competent technical organization providing environmental solutions with latest technical

know how, legal advice, liasioning with various authorities and community at large. More

than 60 industries have engaged Global Experts as their consultant to obtain

environmental & statutory clearances from various statutory bodies and Government

Agencies. Presently more than 10 nos. of Integrated Steel Plants (Signed MoU with Govt.

of Orissa) have engaged Global Experts for carrying out their EIA/ EMP Studies and other

allied environmental clearances. The Global Experts is the first consultant in Orissa to

prepare REIA/ EMP Study report for 1.5 MTPA Integrated Steel Project in Orissa.

Recently Global Experts is been engaged in environmental clearance from MoEF, New

Delhi, VISA Steel Ltd., ACC Bargarh Cement Works, Dungri Limestone Quarry, SPS Steel

and Power Ltd., Maithan Ispat Ltd., various mines of Adhunik Metaliks Ltd. M/s Global

Experts is the first consulting firm in Eastern and North-Eastern region of India to

undertake the EIA/EMP Study along with Liasioning for MoEF clearance for Vedanta

International University Project. Global Experts has a distinct track record in the field of

liasioning with local public in order to carry out Public Hearing jobs for different Steel

Plants to their utmost satisfaction. Our Internal resources and technical acumen blended

with highest degree of Public Relationship has been our strength in providing a total

solution for Environmental aspects of Mines and Industries.

The technical team of Global Experts has wide experience in design, engineering,

erection & commissioning of various pollution control devices, carrying out statutory

Audits, drawing of water pipe line, Water and Air Quality modeling, Mine Plans, designing

of Intake Well and other technical assignment for various industries.

Global Experts is also deeply involved in Hazardous Waste Audits, and Water Harvesting

Projects etc. We are associated with Administrative Staff College of India (ASCI) for the

hazardous waste Inventorisation of all industries in Orissa for their initial preparation.

SERVICES:-

Environmental:

Environment Impact Assessment

Environmental Management Plan

Pollution Prevention & Control (Design, Installation & Maintenance of ETPs, Air

Pollution Control Equipment).

Preparation of Comprehensive EMP mitigation measures, advising on air pollution

control, wastewater treatment.

Municipal Solid Waste Management (Vermin-technology & Bio-Technology),

Industrial Waste, Urban Waste




Environmental Monitoring & Survey.

Greenery Management (Plantation, Maintenance, Nursery raising & Sailing of

seedling)

Watershed Management

Liasioning with OSPCB, CPCB & MoEF

Environment Auditing, Energy Auditing, Assessing the performance of

environmental systems, environmental liabilities.

Bio-medical Waste Management

Third Party Hazardous Waste Audit

Environmental Monitoring (Air, Water, Soil)

Laboratory Testing of different samples in Laboratory

Techno-Functional:

Site Selection & Procurement of land.

Design, Erection & Commissioning of industrial units, water treatment plant,

Effluent Treatment Plant, Sewage Treatment Plant etc.

Preparation of Mining Plan, Environmental Clearance, Forest Diversion Proposal

Rehabilitation & Reclamation.

Liasioning with statutory authorities.

Mechanical Fabrication.

Engineering Designing

Turnkey Projects

Preparation of DPR for Integrated Steel Plants

Preparation of DPR for MSW Management practices

Preparation of Feasibility Report for Water Pipeline & Intake-well Design,

Supervision & Commissioning

Design, Erection & Commissioning of Dust Suppression Equipments like Sprinkler

System, Dry Fog System & Scrubber etc.

Dust Extraction System like Cyclone & Bag filter.

The list of participatory functionaries in preparation of this EIA is enclosed below

along with the credentials validating the firm for this purpose.

Declaration by Experts contributing to the EIA of M/s. KIC Ltd




I, hereby, certify that I was a part of the EIA team in the following Capacity

that developed the above EIA.

Declaration by the Head of the accredited consultant organization/ authorized

person

I, Manoranjan Nayak hereby, confirm that the above mentioned experts prepared the

EIA/EMP report of M/s. KIC Metaliks Ltd. I also confirm that the consultant organization

shall be fully accountable for any mis-leading information mentioned in this statement.




Signature:

Name: Manoranjan Nayak

Designation: Managing Director

Name of the EIA consultant organization: Global Tech Enviro Experts Pvt. Ltd.




The baseline environment monitoring of M/Bengal Energy Ltd has been carried out by

M/s Kalyani Laboratories Pvt Ltd, MoEF accreditated laboratory. The accreditation

certificated is enclosed herewith:




NABL Accreditation Certificate

expansion from 0.6 mtpa non recovery coke ......2006 shall be provided. copies of consent to...

Documents